BMC BladeLogic Server Automation

Administration Guide

Supporting
BMC BladeLogic Server Automation version 8.1
February 2011

www.bmc.com

Contacting BMC Software
You can access the BMC Software website at http://www.bmc.com. From this website, you can obtain information about the company, its products, corporate offices, special events, and career opportunities.

United States and Canada
Address BMC SOFTWARE INC 2101 CITYWEST BLVD HOUSTON TX 77042-2827 USA Telephone 713 918 8800 or 800 841 2031 Fax 713 918 8000

Outside United States and Canada
Telephone (01) 713 918 8800 Fax (01) 713 918 8000

© Copyright 2002-2011 BladeLogic, Inc. BMC, BMC Software, and the BMC Software logo are the exclusive properties of BMC Software, Inc., are registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office, and may be registered or pending registration in other countries. All other BMC trademarks, service marks, and logos may be registered or pending registration in the U.S. or in other countries. All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. BladeLogic and the BladeLogic logo are the exclusive properties of BladeLogic, Inc. The BladeLogic trademark is registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office, and may be registered or pending registration in other countries. All other BladeLogic trademarks, service marks, and logos may be registered or pending registration in the U.S. or in other countries. All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. AIX and IBM, are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. UNIX is the registered trademark of The Open Group in the US and other countries. The information included in this documentation is the proprietary and confidential information of BMC Software, Inc., its affiliates, or licensors. Your use of this information is subject to the terms and conditions of the applicable End User License agreement for the product and to the proprietary and restricted rights notices included in the product documentation.

Restricted rights legend
U.S. Government Restricted Rights to Computer Software. UNPUBLISHED -- RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER THE COPYRIGHT LAWS OF THE UNITED STATES. Use, duplication, or disclosure of any data and computer software by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions, as applicable, set forth in FAR Section 52.227-14, DFARS 252.227-7013, DFARS 252.227-7014, DFARS 252.227-7015, and DFARS 252.227-7025, as amended from time to time. Contractor/Manufacturer is BMC SOFTWARE INC, 2101 CITYWEST BLVD, HOUSTON TX 77042-2827, USA. Any contract notices should be sent to this address.

Customer support
You can obtain technical support by using the BMC Software Customer Support website or by contacting Customer Support by telephone or e-mail. To expedite your inquiry, see “Before contacting BMC.”

Support website
You can obtain technical support from BMC 24 hours a day, 7 days a week at http://www.bmc.com/support. From this website, you can
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

read overviews about support services and programs that BMC offers find the most current information about BMC products search a database for issues similar to yours and possible solutions order or download product documentation download products and maintenance report an issue or ask a question subscribe to receive proactive e-mail alerts when new product notices are released find worldwide BMC support center locations and contact information, including e-mail addresses, fax numbers, and telephone numbers

Support by telephone or e-mail
In the United States and Canada, if you need technical support and do not have access to the web, call 800 537 1813 or send an e-mail message to customer_support@bmc.com. (In the subject line, enter SupID:<yourSupportContractID>, such as SupID:12345). Outside the United States and Canada, contact your local support center for assistance.

Before contacting BMC
Have the following information available so that Customer Support can begin working on your issue immediately:

product information — — — product name product version (release number) license number and password (trial or permanent)

operating system and environment information — — — — — machine type operating system type, version, and service pack or other maintenance level such as PUT or PTF system hardware configuration serial numbers related software (database, application, and communication) including type, version, and service pack or maintenance level

■ ■ ■

sequence of events leading to the issue commands and options that you used messages received (and the time and date that you received them) — — — product error messages messages from the operating system, such as file system full messages from related software

3

License key and password information
If you have questions about your license key or password, use one of the following methods to get assistance:
■ ■

Send an e-mail message to customer_support@bmc.com. Use the Customer Support website at http://www.bmc.com/support.

4

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction 11 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 15 15 16 17 18 19 19 21 29 30 30 31 32 33 33 34 34 39 39 41 41 42 42 42 43 Intended Audience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Shell Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation

System architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Client tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Middle tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default permissions and security configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perl support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools for managing BMC BladeLogic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating data for support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment . . . . . . Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server

Understanding the application server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application server processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work item threads and the job execution thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pooled database connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authentication framework. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Application Server Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the configuration of an application server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting Application Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting all Application Servers on the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restarting Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restarting all Application Servers on the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping all Application Servers on the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

5

Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to configure Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Starting the Application Server Administration console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 The set Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 The show Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 The help Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Specifying multiple values for a parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Changing the default separator for multiple values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Deleting a configuration setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Managing Application Server behavior with the Application Server Administration console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Configuring the Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Changing the heap size for BMC BladeLogic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Enabling/disabling SOCKS proxy rule evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Configuring the file server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Configuring a mail server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Configuring Perl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Configuring an SNMP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Configuring a database server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Configuring the process spawner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Configuring expiration time for credentials of NSH Script Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Processing across mount points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Restricting the size of configuration and extended objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Configuring user interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Setting SRP login requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Configuring the PXE Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Configuring the Licensing Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Enabling asynchronous execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Enabling web services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Configuring multiple Application Servers on the same host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 About Application Server deployments and profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Creating additional Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Listing conflicting attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Getting information about Application Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 The Application Server Launchers node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Reporting Application Server information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Managing multiple Application Servers on the same host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Starting a specific Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Stopping a specific Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Redeploying a stopped Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Terminating a specific Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Restarting a specific Application Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Removing an Application Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Adding unmanaged deployments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Editing the list of roles with Application Server Launcher access . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Resetting database passwords for the Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

6

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Chapter 4

Administering security

115 117 117 118 119 120 121 122 122 123 123 123 124 124 126 128 128 129 130 130 130 131 132 133 133 134 135 137 140 142 150 153 158 158 159 159 160 160 161 163 163 163 166 166 167 169 170 171 171
7

Fundamentals of BMC BladeLogic security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Session layer security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Impersonation and privilege mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single sign-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSA SecurID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Directory/Kerberos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Domain Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authentication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single sign-on session credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keytab files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RBAC role selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security for different communication legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMC BladeLogic Console to Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLCLI to Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Shell to Network Shell Proxy Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reports client to reports server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Server to agent or repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Shell to agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repeater to agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing single sign-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Authentication Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Application Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting override locations for client SSO files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up certificate verification using OCSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing LDAP authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of LDAP configuration tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High availability configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Certificate trust store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distinguished names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring LDAP authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing RSA SecurID authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring RSA Authentication Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring SecurID authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing PKI authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring PKI authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing Domain Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample domain structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents

. . . 228 Typical scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Securecert file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Implementing security – Application Server to agents or repeaters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Configuring the secure file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Options for users and users. . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Configuration file functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Options for exports file . . . . . . . . . . 251 Examples . . . . . . . .local files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 No authentication – Using a default installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Securing communication with CA certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 8 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Provisioning agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Exports file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication . . . . . . 240 Configuring the exports file . . . . . . . . 219 Configuring agents to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates 221 Discontinuing use of client-side certificates. . . . 210 Implementing security – Network Shell to agent . . . 206 TLS with client-side certs – Discontinuing use of client-side certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Overview of AD/Kerberos configuration tasks . . . 236 How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .local files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Restricting commands . . . . 222 Using certificates to secure communication between clients and Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Implementing Active Directory/Kerberos authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . servers. . . . . . . . . . 180 Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication . . 247 Configuring the users or users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Secure file . . . . . . . . 223 Generating a self-signed certificate for an Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Options . . . . . . . . . 253 Clients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server . 244 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the repeater . 212 Implementing Security – Repeater to agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Communication protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Users and users. . . . . . . . . . . and the secure file . . . 211 TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client . . 255 Options for secure file . . 228 Generating a user information file . . . . . . 258 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .local files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Using the blcred utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 233 Introduction to the configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Subnet designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Configuring Advanced File Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling the target server (Agent) cleanup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional log files of interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning up the file server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Performing an unattended (silent) installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Before you begin . . . . . . . Scheduling the retention policy utility to mark data for deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Changing the administrator user and password for Advanced Repeater Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the clean-up utility . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the Application Server cache . . . . . 305 Best practice information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About logging configuration for BMC BladeLogic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Installing using the installation program. . . . . . . . . Marking data for deletion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning up historical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 What is the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater? . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling the database cleanup . . . . . . . . 320 Enable SSL on Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters. . . . . . 319 Set up the Advanced File Server for secure communication . . . . . . . 309 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers. . Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 263 264 264 264 267 271 271 271 271 272 287 288 288 289 292 293 293 294 295 296 297 297 298 299 299 300 300 303 Cleaning up the BMC BladeLogic database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Log4crc. . . . Cleaning up target servers (Agents) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Key terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agent logging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling the cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Configuring Advanced Repeater servers. . . . 306 Installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater . . . . . PXE Server logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Server logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Configuring the securecert file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning up repeater servers . . . . Executing the database clean-up utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Generate the SSL certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Contents 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling the file server cleanup .txt file . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling the repeater server cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collecting log data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMC BladeLogic log file reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling the Application Server cache cleanup . . . . . . . . 318 Securing communication between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Setting up the connection to BMC Atrium Orchestrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Configuring job approval for job types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Requirements for integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Location of configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Security Glossary Index 339 345 10 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Disabling SSL communication . . . . . . . . 324 Configuring bandwidth throttling between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Configure the Advanced Repeater server for secure communication . . 332 Enabling BMC Remedy ITSM integration for job approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Assigning job approval permissions . . 323 Troubleshooting advanced file servers and advanced repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection . . . . . . 327 Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 329 Levels of integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Starting and stopping the Advanced Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Location of log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Configure the Advanced File Server to use secure communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

the configuration you define for both the client and the server determines how the client and server communicate with each other. how to implement security restrictions. Clients establish contact with servers by means of the RSCD agents installed on server machines. a server is a machine where an RSCD agent is installed. The configuration of the RSCD agent on those servers determines whether the client can establish a connection with the server and what permissions the client will have. If a connection is established. Clients are machines running the BMC BladeLogic Console or Network Shell. In the BMC BladeLogic context.Chapter 1 1 Introduction The BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide describes all of the configuration and administration tasks you can perform to ensure the smooth functioning of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation (referred to in this guide as “BMC BladeLogic”). and how to define user permissions using the BMC BladeLogic configuration files. Intended Audience This document is intended for system administrators who manage data centers and networks of remote servers. Terminology Throughout this document you will see discussions related to client and server machines. Chapter 1 Introduction 11 . This document describes how to set up and maintain an Application Server.

” When describing paths. Network Shell Documentation BMC BladeLogic provides descriptions of all Network Shell commands and utilities as man pages available on both Windows and UNIX-style systems. The following is an example of system text: ERROR: You must be "root" for pkgadd to execute properly. the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Network Shell Command Reference provides a full description of all Network Shell commands and utilities. Documentation Conventions In this document. serif fonts depict text that a user might enter at the command line or text that a system generates in response to user input. “From the File menu. Bold fonts identify Network Shell commands and utilities.Documentation Conventions In some contexts. enter man <command>. Monospace fonts also depict file system paths. To display a man page while using Network Shell. this guide uses UNIX-style path separators (forward slashes) except in situations where a Windows-style path separators (backslashes) are specifically required. as well as the exports. Within a procedure. users. users. In addition. such as man nsh. a machine may be a BMC BladeLogic server. This document always calls the machine being contacted a server. a procedural step might read. 12 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .local. This can happen because you can install client applications on the same hosts where you have installed an RSCD agent. For example. monospace. select Add. Despite that possibility for confusion. this document always uses the term client to refer to a machine where someone is using the BMC BladeLogic Console or Network Shell to contact another machine. bold text highlights actions that you should take. and in other contexts the same machine can be a client. and secure configuration files.

Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 2 This chapter provides an overview the system architecture for BMC BladeLogic Server Automation (BMC BladeLogic). server. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 13 . and middle tiers. The following graphic illustrates the relationship between the major components of the three-tiered BMC BladeLogic system. System architecture A BMC BladeLogic system has a three-tier architecture that consists of client. as well as a discussion of other topics that apply to the BMC BladeLogic system as a whole.

a command line interface (BLCLI) that provides API-level access to the functionality available through the console. 14 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . and Network Shell for ad hoc administration of one or more servers. It also includes a web interface to the BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation server.Client tier BMC BladeLogic Console BLCLI reports client (web browser) Network Shell Client Tier PXE / TFTP Server Application Server(s) reports server Network Shell Proxy Server (optional) BMC BladeLogic core database Middle Tier reporting data warehouse Agent File Server Server Tier Remote Server Remote Server Agent Server Agent Server Agent Server Agent Server Agent Server Client tier The BMC BladeLogic client tier includes the BMC BladeLogic console.

It also lets system administrators provision operating systems onto servers. Not only does the Application Server manage communication between consoles and remote servers. Middle tier The primary component of the middle tier is the Application Server. Server tier The BMC BladeLogic server tier consists of RSCD agents on remote servers. a BMC BladeLogic system can incorporate multiple Application Servers that cooperate by balancing job processing workloads. the middle tier includes an Apache Tomcat server. Operating as an intermediary between Network Shell clients and the managed servers those clients target. with the principal components being the PXE Server and the Application Server. All BMC BladeLogic client-tier applications let you manage Solaris®. and it reads data from the core BMC BladeLogic database as well as a reporting data warehouse. HP-UX. BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics uses the Application Server to authenticate users. The middle tier also includes several components used for provisioning servers. The Application Server provides servers being provisioned with the instructions necessary to provision the machine. Network Shell is a network scripting language that enables cross-platform access through a command line interface. If necessary. and Microsoft Windows 2000/2003/2008 servers. The Application Server communicates with RSCD agents and initiates all communication to perform ad hoc and scheduled tasks. Network Shell can optionally incorporate a middle tier component—an Application Server that is configured to run a Network Shell Proxy Server. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 15 . The PXE Server delivers instructions to servers being provisioned so they can download a bootstrap program. the Network Shell Proxy Server authenticates Network Shell client users and ensures traffic is encrypted between clients and managed servers. AIX®. allowing administrators to adjust its performance to accommodate added users and increased database activity. which controls how the BMC BladeLogic console communicates with remote servers. RSCD agents never initiate communication with an Application Server or any other BMC BladeLogic component. it also controls interaction with the database and file servers. The reporting data warehouse is populated using information from the core BMC BladeLogic database. Linux® (Red Hat and SUSE). If a site is running BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics.Middle tier The BMC BladeLogic console is a graphical user interface that gives system administrators a host of sophisticated tools for managing and automating data center procedures. The Application Server is completely scalable.

When a user is assigned to a role. such as QA engineers or web administrators. A system object is an object you can interact with in the BMC BladeLogic Console. you do not have to modify the agent configuration files. you should understand the default configuration of BMC BladeLogic. For many BMC BladeLogic installations. BMC BladeLogic also lets you control access to servers at the agent level. A role is a set of authorizations and other information that reflects the capabilities of an organizational entity. ■ 16 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . he or she is granted the authorizations defined for that role. you can control user access through a combination of role-based and system object-based authorizations. For more information on managing access at the console level. The definition of a system object includes a set of authorizations specifying roles who can access the object and the actions those roles can perform. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. The system’s default configuration provides sufficient functionality and appropriate user permissions. If your installation requires additional refinement.Default permissions and security configuration Default permissions and security configuration In BMC BladeLogic. With protocol 5. a BMC BladeLogic protocol for secure communication based on Transport Layer Security (TLS). TLS automatically negotiates the strongest form of encryption that clients and servers can support. the successor to Secure Socket Layer (SSL). access control can be managed at multiple levels. All clients and servers are set to communicate using protocol 5. Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. the following permissions and security configurations are set by default for each RSCD agent: ■ All clients are granted read/write access to all servers. Configuration files on the RSCD agent let you define who can access servers and how users communicate with those servers. When you install BMC BladeLogic on clients and servers.

For either of these approaches. Other forms of authentication are possible. see Chapter 5. see Chapter 4.” On Windows. they are set up for SRP authentication when using BMC BladeLogic clients to communicate with Application Servers. On UNIX. ■ For a complete discussion of how users are granted permissions on servers. read.” Perl support BMC BladeLogic provides built-in support for Perl. Because of this integration.Perl support ■ Users are granted permissions on managed servers through two different processes: — For Windows servers. users are mapped to user “Anonymous. you can use Perl scripts to perform functions on remote hosts (such as open. This process allows a role to be mapped to a local or domain user who has permissions for a Windows server. the connecting user is granted the permissions of that equivalent user. If so. — In all other situations. users are mapped to user “nobody.” Incoming users can be granted the permissions of a specified user. but they require additional configuration. and members of the Administrator group in Windows are not automatically mapped to Administrator. For more information on Windows user mapping. The BMC BladeLogic Perl module integrates with libnc. the core library for BMC BladeLogic. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. However. the agent maps the incoming user to a default user with downgraded permissions. users can be granted permissions through a process called Windows user mapping. which functions like a network-enabled version of libc. the script programming language. “Setting up configuration files. root users on UNIX are not automatically mapped to root. For more information on securing communication between all components of a BMC BladeLogic system. If a user does not have an equivalent local identity on the server. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 17 . when a user attempts to connect to an agent.” By default when you add users to the BMC BladeLogic system. users can be granted permissions through a process of user impersonation (for all UNIX servers) or user privilege mapping (for Windows). and write files) as long as those hosts are running RSCD agents. the agent maps the user to an identity using the following steps: ■ First the agent determines whether the user has an equivalent identity on the server machine. “Administering security. but that requires modification of the configuration files.

“Managing BMC BladeLogic data. These tools let you delete unused data or data no longer needed for BMC BladeLogic operations. and historical data such as old audit trail entries. You can use this utility to delete old temporary files in the Application Server cache (directory). The BMC BladeLogic file server clean-up utility. see Chapter 6. A target server clean-up utility. the Perl module is automatically installed. as described in “Configuring Perl” on page 77. See the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide for a list of the platforms for which BMC BladeLogic provides Perl support. If you are using Perl in conjunction with the BMC BladeLogic Console.” 18 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . You can use this utility to delete unused files from the file server. You can use this utility to delete old files that accumulate on target servers (agents) from Deploy Jobs. You can delete these files by using the repeater server clean-up utility.Tools for managing BMC BladeLogic data When you install Network Shell on a platform that can support a BMC BladeLogic Application Server. A repeater server clean-up utility. An Application Server cache clean-up utility. This utility deletes from the database objects users have deleted in the BMC BladeLogic Console. objects marked for deletion with the retention policy utility. snapshot results and compliance results. ■ ■ ■ ■ For more information on these tools. Data from Deploy Jobs can also accumulate in the staging directory on repeater servers. you must configure the Application Server so it knows the location of Perl. audit results. These tools include: ■ A database clean-up utility (cleanupDatabase) to minimize the amount of space taken up by unused data in the BMC BladeLogic database. Tools for managing BMC BladeLogic data BMC BladeLogic provides a suite of tools for managing data in the BMC BladeLogic system and controlling its growth where necessary.

use Shift + Click or Ctrl + Click. DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED job property . 2 In the Generate Support Data dialog. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. (The Select Application Servers dialog lists only Application Servers configured to use the same database and file server and that are currently accessible.) To select multiple Application Servers. NOTE To use the Support Data Generation tool. 3 Select the data you want to include in the zip file. Click Select All or click the data types you want. select the Application Servers from which you want to collect data. your role must be granted the BL_Administration. ■ ■ ■ Generating data for support The Generate Support Data tool generates data about the Application Servers and other components in the BMC BladeLogic environment and packages that data into a zip file.provides additional diagnostic information to the job log.Read authorization. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 19 . select Configuration => Generate Support Data. Application Server Diagnostics — Runs predefined tests that evaluate the status of the BMC BladeLogic environment while it is running and identifies problems. Database Diagnostics — Run predefined tests from the command line that evaluate the status of the BMC BladeLogic database and identifies potential issues. Accept the default selection (the Application Server to which you are connected) or click the Browse button (three dots) and select one or more Application Servers from the Select Application Servers dialog.Troubleshooting tools Troubleshooting tools BMC BladeLogic provides several tools that you can use to collect data for diagnosing issues and working with Customer Support: ■ Generate Support Data — Generates data about Application Servers and other components of the BMC BladeLogic environment and packages that data into a zip file. This data can be useful for diagnostic purposes when you contact Customer Support.

log. A file containing all status information for the Application Server. 20 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .txt. the Secure file is included. or a Smart Group of servers. A “rolled-over” log file is one that is generated after a preset size has been reached for the currently active log file. Click Deploy Job Logs and use the Browse button (three dots) to select one or more jobs.local home Application Server Security Files Deploy Job Target Logs (Failed Targets Only) Security files from the Application Server. For example. if any. When the log file reaches that size.) The file’s name is StatusReport. You can also include Application Server logs that have been rolled over. If an Agent resides on the Application Server. The log from one or more Agents. Security files included are: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ System Properties table Agent log Secure Exports Users User.1). Agent Security Files The current security files from one or more Agents. or a Smart Group of servers.log file. The file’s name is System Properties. Click Agent Security Files and use the Browse button (three dots) to select a server. a new log file is automatically created (appserver.Generating data for support This selection: Includes: Application Server log The currently active Application Server log. You can also include console logs that have been rolled over. group of servers. group of servers. A file containing the current contents of the SYSTEM_PROPERTY table in the database to which the Application Server is connected. Click Agent Log and use the Browse button (three dots) to select a server. all security files are included.txt. (This information is the same as that generated by the Export Detail Report operation in the Infrastructure Management window. suppose you set the size to 20 MB for the appserver. At a minimum. All transaction logs for target servers that failed to execute the specified Deploy Job run. You can also include Agent logs that have been rolled over. Application Server Deployment files Application Server status The entire deployment directory for the specified Application Servers. Console log The current console log.

zip and data_10_08-appserver1. your role must be granted the BL_Administration. The file’s name is NetworkInformationReport. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 21 .) A file of information about network configuration and status for each Application Server.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment This selection: PXE Server Files Includes: Information about the PXE server and the services it runs. These predefined tests collect data on the status of the BMC BladeLogic environment while it is running. compare the data to expected behavior. Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment Application Server Diagnostics The Application Server Diagnostics tool provides tests that can be helpful for monitoring the status of your BMC BladeLogic environment and for working with Customer Support to identify and resolve issues. (This information is the same as that reported in the Infrastructure Management window. suppose you selected configserver1 and appserver1 and specified data_10_08. Network Information 4 Click Generate Data. NOTE To use the Support Data Generation tool. If you selected multiple Application Servers. 5 Specify a path to the location where you want to store the zip file. BMC BladeLogic generates the data and creates a zip file. the zip file for each has a name based on the file name you specified plus the Application Server name.zip. The zip files created would have the names: data_10_08configserver1.Read authorization. For example. 6 In the Object Name field.zip as the file name.txt. 7 Click Save. type a name for the zip file. For each Application Server you selected. and analyze it to determine test success or failure.

Tests the job framework. using a job created for test purposes. using a job created for test purposes. selecting the Configuration test group runs both the AppServer Test and the Service Deployment Test. ■ 22 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Tests the Application Server’s connectivity with the database and executes test queries. both of which test the Application Server configuration.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console.Tests are grouped by the type of evaluation they do. select Configuration => Application Server Diagnostics View. Tests the Application Server’s connectivity with the File Server.keystore files are properly synchronized between the various deployments (each deployment has its own keystore file).) Select a group of tests from the Diagnostic Group drop-down menu. 3 The Application Server Diagnostics area lists the tests to be run. The Select Application Servers dialog lists Application Servers configured to use the same database and file server. (Use Shift + click or Ctrl + click to select multiple tests. however. Tests the Application Server’s deployment to determine if the Application Server has been properly configured Database Diagnostic Test Environment KeyStore Test File Manager Diagnostic Test Pseudo Job Diagnostic Test Service Deployment Diagnostic Test Accept the tests listed in the Application Server Diagnostics area or refine the list in one of the following ways: ■ Select one or more tests from the Application Server Diagnostics area. You can select one or more tests from the list. Checks whether the bladelogic. they do not need to be running on the same host. Selecting a test group lists those tests in the Application Server Diagnostics area. 2 In the Application Server Diagnostics view. Tests the job execution framework. Test AppServer Test BlExec Job Diagnostic Test Description Tests the Application Server’s configuration connectivity with other Application Servers. For example. Accept the default selection (the Application Server to which you are connected) or click Browse and select one or more Application Servers. including parallel execution. select the Application Servers from which you want to collect data.

or Failure Advice tab. and description for all diagnostics. select the Application Server for which you want to display test results. 7 When you are finished viewing test results. open a shell (in Linux) or a command prompt (in Microsoft Windows). Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 23 . NOTE The warning messages displayed for any of the DB diagnostics are in most cases an indication that the system needs to be tuned with the recommended values suggested for optimum performance of the product. name.. Or click Run Selected Tests to run only the tests you selected in that area. To run the Database Diagnostics tool 1 On the BMC BladeLogic Application Server.NSH/bin folder. Table 1 Parameter help list listFull Parameters for the DBdiagnostic command (part 1 of 2) Description Displays the help for the command. For the diagId argument used by some of the parameters. the Status column shows an icon that indicates the success or failure of each test. Lists all diagnostics with full details (for example. Log. run dbdiagnostics list to determine the ID for each specific diagnostic test.. Select a test and click the View Results icon to show detailed test results. These predefined tests collect data on the configuration of the BMC BladeLogic database and provide feedback. Then click the Test Output. 2 From the . Database Diagnostics The Database Diagnostics tool provides tests that can be helpful for monitoring the status of the database and for working with Customer Support to identify and resolve issues. click Close.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment 4 Click Run All Tests to run all tests listed in the Application Server Diagnostics area.exe or dbdiagnostic. Consult with your DBA to see whether these recommendations can be applied. 5 In the Application Server Diagnostics area. the parameters and their children).sh with any of the parameters shown in Table 1. Lists only the ID. which are listed in the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide. execute either dbdiagnostic. 6 On the Diagnostic Results dialog.

getResLastExec diagId=diagId Displays the results for the last execution for a specific diagnostic. getDiagParams diagId=diagId Displays the parameters for a diagnostic.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment Table 1 Parameter getDiag Parameters for the DBdiagnostic command (part 2 of 2) Description diagId=diagId Displays information for a specific diagnostic. The remaining tests apply to Oracle databases only. Table 2 on page 25 shows example IDs for each of the diagnostic tests available with the dbdiagnostics tool. the status of the run. getResAfterDate diagId=diagId afterDate=MM-dd-yy[yy] (you can enter a two or four digit year) Displays all of the results for diagnostics recorded on or after the specified date starting at 00:00:00 AM. To run a diagnostic test. such as statistics on the last execution of the diagnostic. and the parameters used for that run. delRes diagId=diagId Delete the results for a specific diagnostic. 24 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Note that these IDs are not fixed and can be different in different environments. first obtain the list of IDs by running dbdiagnostics list and then use the ID of the particular diagnostic that you want to run as input to the utility. NOTE The Top_N_tables_chk and JRE_Row_Count_Chk diagnostic tests apply to both Oracle and SQL Server databases. delAllRes runDiag Deletes all results for all diagnostics. IDs for the diagnostics Each diagnostic test has an associated ID. diagId=<diagId> optName1=val1 optName2=val2 Runs a specific diagnostic using optional parameters. You can find the list of parameters for a diagnostic by running the diagnostic with the getDiagParams parameter followed by the diagId.

For a description of how to use this diagnostic to verify that Schema statistics are current. dbdiagnostics runDiag diagId=1000000 Figure 1 output from the command You can then view the results of the diagnostic by running the command with the getResLastExec parameter. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 25 . see the “Before you install” chapter of the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide Example syntax and output The following example shows the command format you would use to run the ORACLE CHECK BLOCK SIZE diagnostic. 1000001 ORACLE CHECK NUMBER PROCESSES ALLOWED Checks the number of Oracle processes and provides advice. 1000004 TOP_N_TABLES_CHK Checks the data volumes/sizes of the top N tables. 1000005 JRE_ROW_COUNT_CHK Checks the job_run table and returns the record with the largest number of events. and recommends remediation if the statistics are not current.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment Table 2 ID 1000000 Diagnostic names and description Diagnostic name and description ORACLE CHECK BLOCK SIZE Checks the Oracle block size and provides advice. 1000006 DBMS_STATS_CHK Checks to see if the Schema statistics are current (based on a user-supplied expiration). which displays the results of the last execution for this diagnostic (shown in Figure 2). while Figure 1 shows the output returned from the command. 1000003 ORACLE OPTIMIZER SETTINGS CHK Checks the Oracle optimizer settings.

2 Do one of the following: — Right-click the job and select Set Property. you can use the DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED job property to provide additional diagnostic information to the job log. select DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED from the Extended properties list. The default value for the DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED property is FALSE. select a job. Select DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED from the Name drop-down list. 4 Click OK. NOTE Be sure to set the DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED property back to FALSE when not diagnosing an issue. To set the DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED job property 1 In the Jobs folder. The additional level of logging provides you or BMC Software Customer Support representatives with more detailed information when diagnosing issues with job execution.0 Running a job in debug mode If you are experiencing issues with job execution. — In the Properties tab. The Set Job Properties window is displayed. which is large enough.0 messageLevel=INFO message=ORACLE CHECK BLOCK SIZE: Block size on the Database is 8192. as running the job in debug mode does have a negative impact on performance. messageTime=2010-03-22 12:47:03. 26 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 3 Set the property value to TRUE.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment dbdiagnostics getResLastExec diagId=1000000 Figure 2 Sample output for ORACLE CHECK BLOCK SIZE diagnostic diagId=1000000 execDiagId=2000002 execStartTime=2010-03-22 12:47:02.

You can also review the log file on the Application Server for the additional diagnostic information. Click Close to close the dialog. the Application Server log file is located in: UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. navigate to a job or Execution Task.log If you are running a multiple Application Server environment. see “Considerations for troubleshooting jobs in a MAS environment” on page 57.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment To view the job log 1 Open the Jobs folder. use the Run Details drop-down to select Errors. 5 Click Close to close the log messages window. Success. The Log Item Details dialog opens. and select Show Log.00\NSH\br/appserver. or All. 2 Select a run of a job. 3 To filter messages so the job log only shows servers with specific job results. double-click on a message.00/NSH/br/appserver. Click the Up arrow or the Down arrow to scroll through messages one by one. right-click the job or Execution Task and select Show Results to display its job runs.0. right-click. 4 To display messages in a dialog that allows you to scroll through messages one by one.log Windows installationDirectory\BladeLogic. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 27 . A window displays log messages generated by the job. By default. Warnings.0.

Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment 28 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

Use the following tools to make configuration changes: ■ To make changes to basic configuration settings at a later time. file. See “Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server” on page 34.Chapter 3 3 Configuring the Application Server The core of the three-tier architecture in BMC BladeLogic is the Application Server. see “Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings” on page 39. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 29 . Remote users can use the console through either RDP or Citrix from a remote machine to the machine where the console resides. There are two general configurations for Application Servers in the BMC BladeLogic environment: ■ Single (Default) Application Server on the Host This configuration is the most common one and can be performed as a last step in the installation of an Application Server. and mail servers. For information. See “Configuring multiple Application Servers on the same host” on page 93. you can run the Application Server Configuration wizard. you use the PostInstall Configuration wizard to perform the initial configuration of the Application Server. ■ Multiple Application Servers on the Same Host This configuration lets you add multiple Application Servers to the host and configure them to perform one or more functions. With this basic configuration. Controlling communication between clients and servers as well as access to database. NOTE The Application Server and the RCP client (BMC BladeLogic console) must be located on the same Local Area Network (LAN). During installation. you can start the Application Server and then fine-tune it as needed. the Application Server can be adjusted to scale a system and to fine tune its performance.

For information. The other process is a process spawner. the Application Server can handle many more client connections than it has worker threads. For information. use the Infrastructure Management window. the Application Server picks a worker thread from the pool to execute that task. the worker thread is returned to the pool. the Application Server maintains a pool of threads that can be used for processing client activity. the BMC BladeLogic Application Server runs as two distinct processes. So is the number of open client connections. which launches new processes external to the Application Server process. see “Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to configure Application Servers” on page 44. When a client requests any type of activity. BMC BladeLogic calls these worker threads. Rather than dedicating a thread to each client connection. Process spawning is primarily used for Network Shell Script Jobs and some types of extended objects. To manage multiple Application Servers on the host or change their configurations. 30 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . see “Managing multiple Application Servers on the same host” on page 109. you can configure the Application Server so the process spawner does not run as an external process. (The number of worker threads in the pool is configurable.Understanding the application server ■ BMC BladeLogic provides a utility called the Application Server Administration console. Using this approach. Spawning processes externally to the Application Server can be beneficial for memory management. which is a command line utility that allows you to set all parameters used by the Application Server. If you prefer. and you can also use it to set other more complex configuration options. See “Configuring the process spawner” on page 79 for more on configuration. ■ Understanding the application server Application server processes The BMC BladeLogic Application Server is designed to process connections from many clients simultaneously.) Typically. When the request is complete. One process runs the core functionality of the Application Server. The Application Server Administration console lets you set the same parameters as those available in the Post-Install Configuration wizard. See “Scaling the Application Server” on page 52 for more on configuration.

Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 31 .) When a job comes due.Work item threads and the job execution thread Work item threads and the job execution thread A single Application Server processes BMC BladeLogic jobs using one job execution thread and a configurable number of work item threads.) The number of work item threads needed for any job varies by job type. In addition. but there are exceptions to this rule. The next work item thread goes to the third job in the queue. In this case. until a work item thread has been assigned to all jobs in the queue. For most job types. All jobs require one work item thread for pre-execution and another for post-execution. it is assigned to the second job in the queue. For more information on specifying the number of available work item threads. see “Job distribution” on page 32. all jobs can begin processing as soon as a work item thread becomes available. For a description of how jobs are divided into job parts. When allocating work item threads. which perform all work required for that job. and so forth. it is assigned to the first job in the queue of pending jobs. one work item thread is required to execute each part of the job. With this system. When an Application Server is running multiple jobs. the job execution thread continues to watch for other scheduled jobs. when a work item thread becomes available. Then the cycle of allocating work item threads begins again. the job execution thread loads the job and allocates work item threads. the Application Server assigns equal preference to all pending jobs. the number of job parts equals the number of target servers. However. After initiating a job in this way. (Note that a job set to run immediately is considered a scheduled job. starting with the first job in the queue. When the next work item thread becomes available. The job execution thread constantly watches for scheduled jobs. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. Deploy Jobs can optionally utilize a special pool of lightweight work item threads used only for processing Deploy Job phases that access target servers. see “Scaling the Application Server” on page 52. jobs with fewer job parts may complete sooner than jobs with many job parts. a sufficient number of work item threads may not be available for simultaneously processing all jobs. (For a description of how multiple Application Servers can process jobs cooperatively.

Application Servers make an effort to distribute work items to each other to increase the number of concurrently executing work items and shorten overall execution time. However. if a BMC BladeLogic installation consists of two Application Servers that are both configured to run the same maximum number of jobs. By default. all Application Servers should have this attribute set to True. 32 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . When multiple Application Servers are configured to execute jobs. work items are not shared to or from that Application Server. Generally. by default) in the Application Server’s profile. NOTE You cannot enable or disable work item sharing at the job type level. If this attribute is set to False. provided that the Application Server making the request is not already executing the maximum number of jobs that it can run simultaneously. each Application Server will be given the same number of jobs to run (assuming there are an even number of jobs to execute).Job distribution Job distribution If you have multiple Application Servers installed and they all access the same database. scheduled jobs are delegated to the first Application Server that requests a job. Best Practice: Do not mix-and-match the value of the MultiAppServerEnabled attribute between Application Servers. if all local work item threads are already processing work items. Using additional Application Servers increases the job execution capacity of the system and in most cases speeds overall job processing.) For example. Application Servers are configured to cooperate when executing jobs. For more information on configuring cooperation between Application Servers. This work item sharing capability is controlled by the MultiAppServerEnabled attribute (which is set to true. only one Application Server manages each individual job. Typically. the Application Server will distribute work items to other Application Servers that have idle work item threads. see “Setting up job distribution between multiple Application Servers” on page 55. local work item threads on an Application Server will process all work items for a job before those work items can be distributed to other Application Servers. (That maximum number can be configured. During job execution. or all Application Servers should have the attribute set to False. Although work for an individual job can be spread among multiple Application Servers. those Application Servers can cooperate by distributing jobs to balance their processing workloads. the number of work items processed during a job run directly corresponds to the number of target servers for the job.

such as client connections. see “Setting the number of database connections” on page 64. That framework is based on three services: ■ Authentication Service—An entity dedicated to authenticating users by means of all supported authentication protocols.Pooled database connections Pooled database connections The BMC BladeLogic Application Server maintains two different pools of database connections—one is used for processing jobs running the BMC BladeLogic Console and the other is used for processing all other activity. When the database activity is complete. A Network Shell Proxy Service can be located on the same host. The client application can then initiate a session by presenting the session credential to an Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service. or it can be set up on a stand-alone machine even though it is still associated with an Application Server. When a worker thread or a work item thread needs a database connection. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 33 . ■ ■ The Authentication Service and the Application Service are always located on the same host. the thread attempts to trim the number of database connections back to the low boundary. You can configure the high and low boundaries to accommodate user needs. Based on the authentication protocol. If the number of database connections reaches the high boundary. the database connection is returned to its pool. For more information. it acquires one from the appropriate pool of database connections. If authentication succeeds. ensuring that the number of connections stays within high and low boundaries. the Authentication Service uses the appropriate mechanism to authenticate that user. A thread watches the pool of database connections. the client contacts the Authentication Service using any supported authentication protocol. Network Shell Proxy Service—An entity that encapsulates the functionality of a Network Shell Proxy Server. Application Service—An entity that encapsulates the functionality of a BMC BladeLogic Application Server. Authentication framework A BMC BladeLogic Application Server employs a unified framework for processing all user authentication requests. the Authentication Service issues a session credential to the client application. When users on a BMC BladeLogic client application (except BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation) want to authenticate.

34 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .The Application Server Launcher For more information on authentication and other security features. restart. Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server The BMC BladeLogic Post-Install Configuration wizard consolidates the minimum configuration steps that must be performed to set up an Application Server.” The Application Server Launcher An Application Server Launcher is a mechanism for configuring and controlling multiple Application Servers on the same host. remove and redeploy) each additional Application Server on the host. The Application Server Launcher must be running on the host in order for you to perform these operations. terminate. Installing the Application Server on a host also installs the Application Server Launcher. stop. and restarting the Application Server on the host also starts. “Administering security. Use the configuration wizard to configure your database connection. It is so called because it launches (starts) and controls these additional Application Servers. See “Configuring multiple Application Servers on the same host” on page 93. Starting. The Application Server Launcher lets you configure and manage (start. and restarts the Application Server Launcher. including a description of how BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation authenticates users. only a few must be set to make a BMC BladeLogic system functional. stopping. Available for both Windows and UNIX-style installations. The Post-Install Configuration wizard presents those essential tasks in a graphical user interface and provides explanatory information for each step in the process. The BMC BladeLogic environment supports one Application Server Launcher per host. see Chapter 4. stops. Although the BMC BladeLogic Application Server Administration console provides commandline mechanisms for configuring all possible Application Server options. the configuration wizard allows you to set the following configuration options: ■ Database connection parameters—The BMC BladeLogic Console works in conjunction with an Oracle or SQL Server database server in its middle tier.

you cannot configure the Application Server. enter the following: ■ ■ Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 35 . The installation program gives you the option of launching the wizard at the end of the installation procedure. Start the wizard manually by running one of the following commands in the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. do one of the following: ■ Perform an installation that includes installation of the Application Server. and other types of information that is not easily stored in a database. and the SNMP destination to which all SNMP traps are sent. Notification servers—The BMC BladeLogic Console optionally generates email and SNMP traps that send notifications when a job completes. Super-user passwords—The BMC BladeLogic Console provides several predefined users. Use the configuration wizard to provide SRP passwords for the RBACAdmin and BLAdmin users. From the Windows Start menu. Use the configuration wizard to identify the file server and a directory within the file server. ■ 1 To start the Post-Install Configuration wizard. — On a Windows system. The RBACAdmin user has full permission to manage roles and users in the RBAC Manager workspace in the BMC BladeLogic Console. the OS-specific x11 libraries must be installed. Click Cancel to close the wizard. Obtain the necessary connection information and run the PostInstall Configuration wizard again to complete your system configuration. If you are running the Post-Install Configuration wizard on UNIX. Use the configuration wizard to identify an SMTP server. Network Shell scripts.Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server ■ File server—The BMC BladeLogic Console uses a file server to store large snapshots of files. BLPackages. select Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Utilities => Application Server Configuration Wizard. Windows installables. where you can assign permissions for all users. the address from which the notification emails originate. ■ ■ NOTE Be aware of the following: ■ If your database is not set up or you do not currently have the information needed to establish a connection to that database. The BLAdmin user has Read access for all system objects within the BMC BladeLogic Console.

enter the following: . Password—Password assigned to the user ID. 3 Choose a Database Type—either Oracle or SQL Server. By default a BMC BladeLogic installation uses the following database ports: Database Type Oracle SQL Server Port Number 1521 1433 Database Name—SQL Server database name. the wizard will display configuration settings that have already been entered for the Application Server and allow you to change those settings./br/blappconf NOTE If you invoke the wizard without passing the -install flag. If you are using a custom connection string.) SID—System ID of the Oracle database. The Database page displays. provide the following database configuration information (and do not select the Advanced option): Database Server—Server running the database. (This option is only available for Oracle databases. The configuration wizard opens.. 4 If you are not using a custom connection string.Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server \bin\ blappconf. or. 2 Read the introductory page and click Next.) User ID—User name that the database needs to authenticate your connection. By default the database name is bladelogic. provide the following database configuration information: 36 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .exe — On a UNIX-style system. (This option is only available for SQL Server databases. Database Port—Port the database listens on..

Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server User ID—User name that the database needs to authenticate your connection. Advanced—Select this option to indicate that you are providing a custom connection string.local file on the file server: Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 37 . One way to accomplish the necessary mapping is to create an entry like the following in the exports file on the file server: appServer rw. By default. create an entry like the following in the users. File Server Storage Location—Directory on the file server where data is stored. disk space. Password—Password assigned to the user ID. the directory of the file server is appserverInstallDirectory/storage. The File Server page displays. Connection String—Type the custom connection string in the field below the Advanced checkbox. the file server is created on the same machine as the Application Server. 72 GB of available. 6 Provide the following file server configuration information: File Server Name—Name of the server where data is stored. non-redundant. NOTE Do not limit access to the file server by pushing agent ACLs to the agent on the file server. and all users must be mapped to that user. ■ A file server must have. A file server should meet the following requirements: ■ An RSCD agent must be installed and licensed. All users need to be mapped to the same user on the file server. 5 Click Next. as a minimum. A user name must be defined on the file server. By default. Without this mapping a user may not be able to access a file that another user has stored on the file server. BMC BladeLogic recommends that the file server have 200 GB or more of available RAID 5 disk space. ■ The internal System:System role/user must be mapped to the user name defined on the file server. To accomplish the mapping.user=userName ■ where appServer is a comma-separated list of Application Server names or IP addresses and userName is the name to which all users are mapped.

) Email From—Email address from which BMC BladeLogic-generated email is sent. typically bladmin or administrator. 12 Click Finish. BMC BladeLogic jobs can generate email upon their completion. where you can assign permissions for all BMC BladeLogic users. 8 Provide information identifying an email server by entering the following under SMTP Options: SMTP Server—Name or IP address of the host managing email. 11 Under both RBACAdmin User and BLAdmin User. 9 If you are using SNMP trap notifications. The RBACAdmin user has full permission to manage roles and users in the RBAC Manager workspace in the BMC BladeLogic Console. The BLAdmin user has Read access for all system objects within BMC BladeLogic. SNMP Port—The port on the SNMP server that listens for SNMP traps.user=userName where userName is the name to which all users are mapped. For more information on the RBACAdmin and BLAdmin users. 10 Click Next. Passwords are used to authenticate the RBACAdmin and BLAdmin users via the SRP authentication protocol. By default the port is set to the standard SNMP port of 162. the process will attempt to create it. 7 Click Next.Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server System:System rw. enter a password and then retype the password to confirm your entry. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. If the required directory structure does not already exist on the file server. 38 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The Notification Servers page displays. The User Passwords page displays. You will not be able to enter a password if a password has already been set. provide information identifying the SNMP server by entering the following under SNMP Options: SNMP Server—Name or IP address of the host to which SNMP traps should be sent. (SMTP stands for simple mail transfer protocol.

.. Database connection File server Notification servers Most configuration settings or to set additional configuration parameters on an Application Server The Application Server Administration console (blasadmin).Changing the configuration of an application server NOTE BMC BladeLogic recommends that you synchronize the clock on the Application Server and all client machines. Changing the configuration of an application server There are three tools you can use to change an Application Server’s configuration. if an Application Server is in Boston. This wizard presents the same information as the Post-Installation Configuration wizard. The Application Server Configuration wizard. You can also use the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to change these settings. see “Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings” on page 39. Clocks should be synchronized to the minute. host) Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings To change configuration settings on an Application Server. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 39 . except that it is in a tabbed format and shows current settings in the text boxes.. Attributes (configuration settings) specified The Infrastructure Management window. the clock on client machines in San Francisco should be set to 4:04. Which tool you use depends on the settings you want to change. where the time is 7:04. See in an Application Server’s profile (when there “Viewing and editing an Application Server’s are multiple Application Servers on the same profile” on page 100.. For information. For example. To change. Initial (post-installation) configuration settings for the Application Server: ■ ■ ■ You can use. you can use the Application Server Configuration wizard (blappconf). See “Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to configure Application Servers” on page 44.

exe ■ To change the configuration of a specific Application Server when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. enter the following: \bin\blappconf — On a UNIX-style system. For example: blappconf -s JobServer1 40 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . from the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. you cannot use the Application Server Configuration wizard to change them. 1 Start the Application Server Configuration wizard: ■ To change the configuration of the default Application Server. select Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Utilities => Application Server Configuration Wizard. use one of the following methods: — From the Windows Start menu. — From the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. enter the following: \bin\blappconf -s applicationServerName Where applicationServerName is the name of the Application Server you want to change.Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings You can change the following settings: ■ Database connection parameters File server name and storage location Notification servers — SMTP server and email address from which notification emails originate and SNMP server and port to which SNMP traps are sent ■ ■ NOTE After super-user passwords are set in the Post-Installation Configuration wizard. enter the following: . You must use the RBAC Administration tool./br/blappconf.

4 Restart the Application Server. If you specify blappconf with no -s option. Right-click BladeLogic Application Server and select Start from the pop-up menu. use the Infrastructure Management window. enter the following: /etc/init. from the Start menu. select Settings => Control Panel. Starting Application Servers There are two methods for starting Application Servers. Double-click Administrative Tools.d/blappserv start ■ Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 41 . and double-click Services. To start all Application Servers on the host. changes affect only the default deployment. 3 Click OK. whether a single (default) Application Server or multiple Application Servers. use this command to configure the template deployment: blappconf -s _template 2 The Application Server Configuration wizard appears.Starting Application Servers NOTE If you specify blappconf -s. ■ Starting all Application Servers on the host This operation starts all Application Servers on the host. Application Servers created on the host in the future will not have the changes. To start a specific Application Server (when additional Application Servers are configured on the host). See “Starting a specific Application Server” on page 109. changes affect the specified deployment. Make changes you want. To have changes affect future Application Servers. from the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. do one of the following: ■ On Windows. The method you use depends on the Application Servers you want to start: ■ To start all Application Servers on the host. whether a single (default) Application Server or multiple Application Servers. On a UNIX-style system. see “Starting all Application Servers on the host”.

enter the following: /etc/init. the default Application Server must already be started.d/blappserv restart ■ Stopping Application Servers There are two methods for stopping Application Servers. the default Application Server must already be started. On a UNIX-style system. See “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111. To use this restart operation. ■ Restarting all Application Servers on the host This operation restarts all Application Servers on the host. To use this stop method. see “Restarting all Application Servers on the host”. See “Stopping a specific Application Server” on page 109.Restarting Application Servers Restarting Application Servers There are two methods for restarting Application Servers. Right-click BladeLogic Application Server and select Restart from the pop-up menu. ■ 42 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . whether a single (default) Application Server or multiple Application Servers. To stop a specific Application Server (when additional Application Servers are configured on the host). whether a single (default) Application Server or multiple Application Servers. from the Start menu. select Settings= > Control Panel. To restart a specific Application Server (when additional Application Servers are configured on the host). The method you use depends on the Application Servers you want to restart: ■ To restart all Application Servers on the host. The method you use depends on the Application Servers you want to stop: ■ To stop all Application Servers on the host. Do one of the following: ■ On Windows. and double-click Services. use the Infrastructure Management window. whether a single (default) Application Server or multiple Application Servers. Double-click Administrative Tools. see “Stopping all Application Servers on the host” on page 43. use the Infrastructure Management window.

NOTE You can also use the Infrastructure Management window to gracefully shut down a specific Application Server (when multiple Application Servers are configured on the host). enter the following: /etc/init. See “Stopping a specific Application Server” on page 109. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 43 . What happens when you pause. On a UNIX-style system. To stop all Application Servers on the host.d/blappserv stop ■ ■ Shutting down Application Servers gracefully The BLCLI provides commands that allow you to shut down an Application Server after all jobs running on it have completed or after a specified period of time has elapsed. You can also use related commands to pause an Application Server while it processes all active jobs or resume service after you have paused the Application Server. From the Windows Start menu. Double-click Administrative Tools. or shut down an Application Server When you pause an Application Server. These commands are available in the AppServerShutdown name space of the BLCLI. do one of the following: ■ From the Windows command line window where the Application Server is running. or resume a specific Application Server or all Application Servers on the host. even though they may be currently processing jobs. Right-click BladeLogic Application Server and select Stop from the pop-up menu. and double-click Services. The BLCLI provides commands that allow you to shut down Application Servers more gracefully (see “Shutting down Application Servers gracefully”). select Settings => Control Panel.Stopping all Application Servers on the host Stopping all Application Servers on the host Performing this procedure immediately stops all Application Servers on the host. pause. enter Control-C. resume. the following occurs: ■ The job execution thread on the Application Server no longer processes newly scheduled jobs. You can use these commands to shut down. See the BLCLI Help for specific information on AppServerShutdown.

When you use AppServerShutdown commands to shut down an Application Server. Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to configure Application Servers The BMC BladeLogic Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) is a command line utility that lets you set parameters needed for an Application Server. ■ ■ NOTE When you pause an Application Server. If any of those work items take a long time to finish. These parameters define the location and behavior of the application. To expedite the processing of any currently active jobs. The job execution thread can again process scheduled jobs and the Application Server can request work item threads from other Application Servers. the shutdown sequence begins. the Application Server continues to give out work item threads to other Application Servers. the Application Server’s job framework is paused. 44 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . and other components of an Application Server. it continues to process all of its current work items. file. and SNMP servers. versus the subset you can configure with the Post-Install Configuration Wizard. When all jobs and work items have completed or a specified period of time has elapsed. The Application Server is temporarily set so it can no longer request work item threads from other Application Servers. mail. The blasadmin utility lets you configure all parameters. as described above. if requested. the Authentication Service. When you instruct a paused Application Server to resume work. database. This section provides procedures to control all aspects of the Application Server’s behavior. the Application Server will not appear to be paused until all of those work items are complete. you essentially undo the actions listed above.Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to configure Application Servers ■ The Application Server is temporarily set so other Application Servers cannot distribute jobs to it.

Starting the Application Server Administration console To start the Application Server Administration console. How you enter the command depends whether you want to configure the default Application Server or one of multiple Application Servers on the host. you can both run the blasadmin utility and pass it a command at the same time. see: ■ ■ ■ The set Command The show Command The help Command 3 Exit the blasadmin utility. do one of the following: ■ On Windows. you can change the location of a file server (on the default Application Server) by entering the following command blasadmin set fileserver location /tmp/Storage. How you start this utility determines the Application Server configuration affected by the commands.Starting the Application Server Administration console To configure Application Servers with the Application Server Administration Console (blasadmin): 1 Start the Application Server Administration Console. enter the following: \bin\blasadmin. For information. 4 Restart the Application Server to have your configuration settings take effect. TIP If you want to enter just one or two commands. 2 At the prompt. enter the commands. — From the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. For example. select Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Utilities => Application Server Administration.exe Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 45 . See “Starting the Application Server Administration console”. do one of the following: — From the Start menu. Starting blasadmin to Configure the Default Application Server To start the Application Server Administration console when there is a single Application Server on the host. run the blasadmin command.

Starting the Application Server Administration console

Both options run the same command.

On a UNIX-style system, from the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed, enter the following:
./br/blasadmin

This command starts the blasadmin utility and you can use blasadmin set and show commands.

NOTE
All commands you enter during the session affect only the default Application Server. Application Servers created on the host in the future do not have the changes. To have changes affect future Application Servers, use this command to start blasadmin and configure the _template deployment: blasadmin -s _template For information on the default and _template deployments, see “Editing the list of roles with Application Server Launcher access” on page 113

Starting blasadmin when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host
If there are multiple Application Servers on the same host, you need to specify whether you want to use blasadmin to configure one specific Application Server or all Application Servers on the host. Do one of the following:

To start blasadmin and configure one specific Application Server, use:
blasadmin -s appServerName

Where: -s appServerName is the Application Server’s name. For example:
blasadmin -s OtherJobServer

This command starts the blasadmin utility and you can enter blasadmin commands. All commands you enter during the session (until you enter exit at the blasadmin prompt) affect only the Application Server you specified.

To start blasadmin and configure all Application Servers on the host, use:
blasadmin -a

46

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

The set Command

This command starts the blasadmin utility and you can enter set and show commands. All commands you enter during the session affect: — All additional Application Servers configured on the same host — The _template deployment — The default Application Server For information on deployments, see “Editing the list of roles with Application Server Launcher access” on page 113.

The set Command
The set command sets the parameter to the specified value in the configuration. The setting takes effect when you restart the Application Server.The format for the set command is:
set component parameter value

Where:
■ ■ ■

component is the Application Server functionality you can configure parameter is an option that controls the Application Server behavior value is the value for the parameter

For example:
blasadmin> set fileserver name redhat1

This example sets the file server’s name to redhat1.

NOTE
When configuring settings on the Application Server, you must restart the Application Server for a setting to take effect.

TIP
When there is no ambiguity about the command you are typing, you can enter a shortened version of a command. For example, you can type set f n instead of typing set fileserver name.

Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server

47

The show Command

The show Command
The show command shows components, parameters, and current settings for an Application Server. The format is: show [component] [component parameter] [all]
To Show Descriptions of all parameters for all components At the bladmin> prompt, enter show descriptions For example:
bladmin> show descriptions [AccountConfig] AccountLockoutDuration - How long (in minutes) to keep the account locked AccountLockoutThreshold - How many failed logins before the account is locked MaxPasswordAge - How many days before a password needs to be changed MinPasswordLength - Minimum length of password required [AgentConfig] EnableAgentRpc - Enable or disable agent RPC communication [true, false] SecureFilePath - Path to the rsc “‘secure’ file. [AppServer] AppServerName - name of application server AppSvcPort - listening port for Application service . . .

All components and parameters, plus settings for parameters that have them

show all For example:
bladmin> show all [AccountConfig] AccountLockoutDuration:0 AccountockoutThreshold:0 MaxPasswordAge:0 MinPasswordLength:0 [AgentConfig] EnableAgentRpc:false SecureFilePath: . . .

48

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

The show Command

To Show

At the bladmin> prompt, enter

A component’s parameters show component (with descriptions) For example:
bladmin> show fileserver available options: [all|location|name] all - display all configuration parameters for this option location - the NSH style </c/temp> location name - the name of the fileserver

A component’s parameters show component all and settings For example:
bladmin> show snmpconfig all [SnmpConfig] SnmpPort:162 SnmpServer:

The current setting for a single parameter

show component parameter For example:
bladmin> show database MaxGeneralConnections MaxGeneralConnections:100

Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server

49

The help Command

The help Command
The help command provides help on the set and show commands.
To get help on At the bladmin> prompt, enter

A list of components (with help set | show descriptions) you can specify with the command For example:
bladmin> help set AccountConfig - minimum password length configuration AuthServer - authorization configuration ConfigManagerUI - configuration for UI Database - the database configuration parameters . . .

All of the parameters for a help set | show component component For example:
bladmin> help set Database

A description of a parameter

help set | show component parameter For example:
bladmin> help show pxeserver listen_port the server port the PXE server listens on

Specifying multiple values for a parameter
Some Application Server parameters accept more than one value. To specify multiple values for a parameter, use a comma-separated list. For example:
blAdmin> set ManagementService EmailRecipients adA@ACo.com,adB@ACo.com

Changing the default separator for multiple values
In the blasadmin utility, the comma is the default separator for specifying multiple parameter values. If the values you want to specify include commas, you can change the separator to a different character. To change the default separator, enter the blasadmin command with the -c option.

50

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Deleting a configuration setting

blasadmin -c value_separator_character

For example, to change the value separator to a semicolon, you would enter:
blasadmin -c ;

The setting is in effect only for the blasadmin session (until you exit the blasadmin utility).

Deleting a configuration setting
You can delete a parameter value from an Application Server’s configuration. To delete the value, use the blasadmin set command and specify an empty value surrounded by quotation marks (““). For example:
blasadmin -s OtherConfigServer set AuthServer AppServiceURLs ““

This example removes the AppServiceURLs value for Application Server named OtherConfigServer.

Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server

51

Managing Application Server behavior with the Application Server Administration console

Managing Application Server behavior with the Application Server Administration console
Using the Application Server Administration console, (the blasadmin utility) you can perform a variety of tasks to manage all aspects of Application Server behavior. The following list describes the procedures you can perform to manage the Application Server. Many of these procedure include subordinate procedures.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Configuring the Application Server Configuring the file server Configuring a mail server Configuring Perl Configuring an SNMP server Configuring a database server Configuring the process spawner Processing across mount points Restricting the size of configuration and extended objects Configuring user interface settings Setting SRP login requirements Configuring the PXE Server Configuring the Licensing Module Enabling asynchronous execution Enabling web services

Configuring the Application Server
The Application Server is the core of the middle tier in a BMC BladeLogic installation. Not only does the Application Server control communication between clients and servers, it also regulates activity between the client and the database, file, and mail servers. The Application Server provides many adjustable parameters that allow you to scale a BMC BladeLogic system to virtually any size.

Scaling the Application Server
The Application Server provides several options that you can adjust to accommodate increased activity. An Application Server should be configured so that even when all of its work item threads are busy, the Application Server still has additional resource capacity.

52

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Configuring the Application Server

1 Start the Application Server Administration console, as described in “Starting the
Application Server Administration console” on page 45.

2 To specify the maximum number of worker threads, enter the following:
set appserver maxworkerthreads #

where # is the maximum number of threads that can process requests from clients. For example, you might set this to 10, which means that only 10 client connections can be serviced at a time even though many more users might actually be connected to the Application Server. Worker threads should not be confused with work item threads, which process BMC BladeLogic Console jobs (see step 5).

3 To specify the maximum number of client connections that the Application Server
can manage, enter the following:
set appserver MaxClientContexts #

where # is the maximum number of connections to clients.

4 To specify the maximum number of jobs, enter the following:
set appserver MaxJobs #

where # is the maximum number of jobs. By controlling the number of jobs that are processed simultaneously, you can avoid overtaxing Application Server resources.

5 To specify a maximum size for the pool of threads that can be used to process BMC
BladeLogic Console jobs, enter the following:
set appserver MaxWorkItemThreads #

where # is a number of work item threads. All BMC BladeLogic jobs let you specify how many targets to process in parallel. You can set a value from 1 to 10 or allow an unlimited number of targets to be processed in parallel. The MaxWorkItemThreads and MaxLightweightWorkItemThreads (see step 6) also can control how many targets can be processed in parallel. If your system uses one Application Server, the maximum number of targets that can be processed is based on the Application Server’s available work item threads. If your system uses multiple Application Servers, the maximum number of targets that can be processed in parallel is based on the sum of all available work item threads on all Application Servers.

Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server

53

Other than being limited to particular types of tasks. enter the following: set appserver MaxLightweightWorkItemThreads # where # is a number of lightweight work item threads. see “Work item threads and the job execution thread” on page 31. Using lightweight work item threads helps you run more Deploy Jobs in parallel more efficiently. For more on the role of work item threads. To avoid this kind of inefficiency. lightweight work item threads behave exactly like work item threads. work item threads often sit idle while target servers process deployment tasks. These threads are only used during the Simulate and Commit phases of a Deploy Job. An Application Server can optionally provide a secondary pool of lightweight work item threads. 7 Restart the Application Server. 54 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 6 To specify a maximum size for the pool of lightweight work item threads that can be used for Deploy Jobs. By default this value is set to 0. Lightweight work item threads primarily perform tasks on target servers and consequently consume almost no memory on an Application Server.Configuring the Application Server When processing Deploy Jobs. the Application Server can use a pool of lightweight work item threads to process phases of a Deploy Job that access target servers.

keystore files. each Application Server periodically updates its time stamp. enter the following: set appserver ServerMonitorInterval # where # is the frequency with which an Application Server updates its own time stamp (that is. it also checks for the heartbeat of any remote Application Servers.keystore file. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. ■ 1 Start the Application Server Administration console.Configuring the Application Server Setting up job distribution between multiple Application Servers When Application Servers are configured to access the same database. 3 To specify an interval between heartbeats for an Application Server. 2 To specify a time span that indicates a remote Application Server has timed out. Application Servers that are cooperating monitor each other’s heartbeat to determine which Application Servers are in service. if RemoteServerTimeout is set to 5. System clocks on all Application Servers must be synchronized to within a few seconds of each other. To accomplish this. When an Application Server updates its heartbeat. the following prerequisites must be met: ■ Each Application Server must be configured to access the same database and have the same bladelogic. the Application Server is considered out of service. enter the following: set appserver RemoteServerTimeout # where # is number of seconds between heartbeats before a remote Application Server is considered out of service. For Application Servers to cooperate. they must know which Application Servers are in service. For information on synchronizing bladelogic. and 10 seconds elapse between heartbeats. For example. they automatically attempt to cooperate by balancing their job processing workloads. which functions as its heartbeat. see “Synchronizing keystore files of multiple Application Servers” on page 58. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 55 . They accomplish this by distributing the processing of entire jobs or work items for large individual jobs to other Application Servers. its heartbeat). NOTE For Application Servers to cooperate.

5 To specify a time-out for responses from a remote Application Server. the connection times out. 8 To specify a port used for communication between Application Servers. enter the following: set appserver UseSSLSockets true where true indicates that connections to this Application Server must be encrypted using SSL. 9 Restart the Application Server. By default the RegistryPort is set to 9836.Configuring the Application Server 4 To specify a time-out for connecting to a remote Application Server. Once that maximum is exceeded. enter the following: set appserver SocketConnectTimeout # where # is the maximum number of seconds for obtaining an initial socket connection to a remote Application Server. Once the maximum is exceeded. 56 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 7 To specify that remote Application Servers contacting the Application Server must authenticate. enter the following: set appserver RequireClientAuthentication true where true instructs the Application Server to require authentication from remote Application Servers. enter the following: set appserver RegistryPort # where # is a port number. the connection times out. connections encrypted with SSL also require client authentication. Generally. 6 To specify that a socket connection use SSL. enter the following: set appserver SocketTimeout # where # is the maximum number of seconds to wait for a response from an Application Server after the initial connection has already been established.

with one job server running on each. the logging information for the job is actually distributed between the log files on both appserver1 and appserver2. they automatically attempt to cooperate by balancing their job processing workloads.log There are also individual log files for each Application Server deployment.log Windows installationDirectory\BladeLogic. you may have two physical Application Servers (appserver1 and appserver2). By default.Configuring the Application Server Considerations for troubleshooting jobs in a MAS environment Each Application Server has a log file which contains information about what is being executed on that Application Server.log Windows installationDirectory\BladeLogic. the Application Server log file is located in: UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.1\NSH\br/deploymentProfileName. Therefore you would need to review the log files on both Application Servers.1/NSH/br/appserver. which means that the log information is also distributed. and the Distribution Manager is dynamically allocating resource and running jobs on both Application Servers as needed. For example.1\NSH\br/appserver.lo g Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 57 . In this example. which by default are located in: UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.1/NSH/br/deploymentProfileName. When Application Servers are configured to access the same database.

its target vector. ■ ■ For more information on setting the job priority level. Normal. if two concurrent jobs are competing for resources. Such a job would appear to relinquish resources to a lower priority job with a high parallelism level. For example. see BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. By default. but with a low maximum parallelism level. Low. The parallelism configuration of a job can significantly impact the appearance of the effectiveness of the job’s priority level. all Application Servers must have the same bladelogic. To synchronize keystore files of cooperating Application Servers. There is no guarantee about the order of completion of each job (which is dependent on various extraneous factors including the actions performed in each job. and so on). do the following on each cooperating Application Server: 58 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . with a relatively higher priority to ensure they are executed first in case of resource contention. consider the case of a job with a priority of Critical. see “Setting up job distribution between multiple Application Servers” on page 55. For a list of the permissions and authorizations required to modify Job Priority. If you have implemented a multiple Application Server environment. Synchronizing keystore files of multiple Application Servers Multiple Application Servers on different hosts can be set up to cooperate on processing jobs. For example.Configuring the Application Server Job distribution and job priority in a MAS environment You can use the PRIORITY* property to mark a job. see “Authorizations for changing job priority” and “Setting job priority” in the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. You can assign one of any of the following priorities: Critical.keystore file. the individual work items of the higher priority job are queued to be processed before the work items of the lower priority job.) For this cooperation to take place. the responsiveness of the target space. as it controls the maximum number of simultaneous work items that can be allocated for a given job. Note that these priority levels are meaningful only in relation to each other. or a class of jobs. (For information. once the initial work item assignment quota for that Critical priority job is reached. and Lowest. High. the Distribution Manager queues work items in respect to priority. all job types have a priority of Normal. note the following considerations regarding job priority: ■ While queuing work items across all jobs.

If the new bladelogic.keystore files of all deployments of the cooperating Application Server. 2 Copy the bladelogic. if it is in use.Configuring the Application Server 1 Stop the cooperating Application Server. At the command prompt.keystore file. start the Application Server Administration console for the deployment. change the keystore password for the _spawner deployment. At the command prompt. enter: blasadmin -s deployment_name For example: blasadmin -s default or blasadmin -s _template B At the blasadmin prompt.keystore 3 Make sure that the passwords match for bladelogic.keystore file you copied into a deployment has a different password from that of the old bladelogic. enter: Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 59 . At the command prompt. The file location is: installationDirectory/br/deployments/_template/bladelogic. (If keystore passwords match. enter: set appserver CertPasswd password C Repeat these steps for each deployment whose keystore file has changed. D Change the keystore password for the _launcher deployment. enter: blasadmin -s _launcher E At the blasadmin prompt.keystore file from the _template directory of the central Application Server to each deployment directory of the cooperating Application Server.keystore file for all Application Server deployments: A On the cooperating Application Server.) To change the password needed for the bladelogic. enter: set appserverlauncher KeyStorePassword password F If the process spawner is in use. including the PXE server. you can skip this step. change the keystore password for that deployment.

Configuring the Application Server blasadmin -s _spawner G At the blasadmin prompt. If the client exceeds these maximums. enter: set ProcessSpawner KeyStorePassword password 4 Restart the cooperating Application Servers. 2 To set a maximum period for job cancellation. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. When there is no traffic over the connection between a client and the Application Server for this period of time. 3 Restart the Application Server. This prevents situations where cancellation of a job is not performing as expected and the act of canceling the job can potentially hang the job. enter the following: set appserver IdleConnectionPruneTime # where # is a value in minutes. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. Specifying a maximum time for canceling a job part You can specify a maximum period of time that can elapse for a job part to be canceled. Setting limits for client connections The Application Server lets you specify certain limits for connections to the Application Server. enter the following: set appserver MaxTimeForCancelToFinish # where # is the maximum amount of time in minutes that should elapse for job cancellation. 2 To specify an idle prune time. such as a prune time for idle connections or the maximum amount of time a client can perform read operations from the Application Server. 60 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the connection is considered expired. the connection is closed. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. If cancellation of a job part exceeds this maximum. the job part is classified as stuck and the job part is aborted.

Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 61 . Setting it to false means only the one work item thread is canceled. Enabling automatic restart of provisioning jobs after Application Server restart A restart of an Application Server cancels provisioning jobs that have been submitted but are waiting idle (for example. all other work item threads acting on the same server are also canceled. and the connections that have expired are pruned. In addition. 3 Restart the Application Server. 4 Restart the Application Server. By default this value is set to 0. if you assign job part time-outs. Setting time-out behavior for work item threads The Application Server lets you specify time-out behavior for work item threads. use this procedure. enter the following: set appserver SocketTimeout # where # is the maximum number of seconds for client socket reads before the socket times out. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. a work item thread is canceled when it exceeds the time period you have defined in the JOB_PART_TIMEOUT property. To ensure that these jobs are automatically restarted when the Application Server restarts. idle connections with non-zero IdleConnectionPruneTime values are checked. a job waiting for the PXE client to boot). 3 To specify a time-out for client socket read operations from the Application Server. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. If necessary. 2 To set time-out behavior. enter the following: set appserver PropagateWorkItemTimeout true|false Setting this value to true means all work item threads acting on the same server are canceled when one work item thread times out. This prevents situations where multiple work item threads time out serially on the same unresponsive server. you can use this procedure to override the default behavior so that only one work item thread times out automatically. By default. which means the connection never expired.Configuring the Application Server When a new incoming connection is made.

an Update Server Properties Job always ends successfully. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. the job run is marked with a warning and the job log includes a message saying that job results have been truncated. particularly disk space. Parts that do not comply are shown in Compliance Job results. You can. If you are running a Compliance Job that examines many server objects that fail a compliance condition. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. however. If results for a Compliance Job exceed the limits you set in this procedure. Setting the outcome of Update Server Properties Jobs when target agents are unresponsive By default. Setting the value to false means that the Update Server Properties Job will be reported (in the log and in the display of job results) as having ended in failed status if the agent on the remote target is unreachable or not licensed. 2 Enable automatic restart of provisioning jobs by entering the following: set appserver restartIdleProvisionJobs true 3 Restart the Application Server. 62 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . even if the RSCD agents on the remote target servers are unresponsive. as the AGENT_STATUS property for the target servers is updated in any case. you may tax your system resources. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console.Configuring the Application Server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. set the Update Server Properties Job to end in failed status whenever agents do not respond. Setting a maximum number of Compliance Results displayed The Application Server lets you specify the maximum number of compliance results that are displayed for any failed condition in a compliance rule. 2 Set the outcome of Update Server Properties Jobs by entering the following: set JobFactory UspJobSucceedsWhenAgentDown true|false The default value is true. A Compliance Job examines a component and compares its parts to conditions defined in compliance rules for a component template.

2 To set a maximum for compliance results displayed.Configuring the Application Server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. 3 Restart the Application Server. No matter how you define this value. Setting behavior for past due jobs The Application Server lets you specify a period of time that a newly created job can remain in a queue while the Application Server is down or too busy to process the job. Setting this value to 0 means that all past due jobs execute when the Application Server starts. The period of time is measured from the scheduled occurrence of the job to the time the Application Server starts. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 3 Restart the Application Server. If you restart the Application Server and the specified period has elapsed. all existing jobs remain in the job queue for the default amount of time—60 minutes. enter the following: set appserver ComplianceResultMaxNumberOfAssets # where # is a the maximum number of server objects displayed per failed condition in a compliance rule. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. enter the following: set scheduler MaxJobTimeInSchedulerQ # where # is a value in minutes. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 63 . ■ NOTE This procedure only defines behavior for new jobs. By default this value is set to 60. Setting a value for this option specifies that: ■ If you restart the Application Server and the specified period has not elapsed. the scheduled occurrence of a one-time-only job does not execute but the scheduled occurrence of a recurring job does execute. 2 To set past due job execution behavior. the scheduled occurrence of a job does not execute.

use either of the following commands: set database MaxGeneralConnections # set database MinGeneralConnections # where # is a number of database connections. You can set the maximum and minimum number of database connections that jobs use. 3 To set a maximum and minimum number of non-job-related database connections. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.Configuring the Application Server Setting the number of database connections Use this procedure to set maximums and minimums for database connections. non-job-related purposes. You can also set the maximum and minimum number of database connections used for general. such as client connections to the database. 64 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . use either of the following commands: set database MaxJobExecutionConnections # set database MinJobExecutionConnections # where # is a number of database connections. By providing separate settings for job-related and non-job-related activity. increasing the value for MaxJobExecutionConnections can sometimes increase the performance of large Audit Jobs. 2 To set a maximum and minimum number of job-related database connections. 4 Restart the Application Server. NOTE The sum of the maximum numbers you define for MaxJobExecutionConnections and MaxGeneralConnections cannot exceed the connection limit specified by the database server. NOTE Because each work item in an Audit Job requires a dedicated database connection. you can help to prevent situations where client connections seem to hang because large jobs are using all available database connections. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console.

If this value is set to 0. This communication is used for various administration tasks. You can modify this value if necessary. The listening port for a Network Shell Proxy Service. the Application Server does not run a Network Shell Proxy Service. This port is used for BMC BladeLogic Console to Application Server communication. By default the Authentication Service runs and listens on port 9840. When you deploy a new Application Server with its type set to NSH_PROXY or ALL. It is used in conjunction with the RMI Execution Port 9850+ (which is obtained from the MaxPort/MinPort range when the Application Server starts). Typically. AppSvcPort 9841 Listening port for the Application Service (that is. ProxySvcPort is set to 9842 for the default Application Server. If this value is blank.Configuring the Application Server Setting communication ports The following sections list the port requirements for both the Application Server and the Application Server Launcher. This port is used in a multiple Application Server configuration for Application Server to Application Server communication. You must manually define a listening port for the default deployment of an Application Server. ProxySvcPort 9842 RegistryPort 9836 Listening port for traffic between Application Servers that cooperate by distributing jobs to each other. the Application Server does not run an Authentication Service. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 65 . the service that accepts client connections). the ProxySvcPort is automatically set to the Base Port plus 42. coordinate job work item execution. By default the Application Service runs and listens on port 9841. such as to pull Application Server statistics. update the remote heartbeat status. and is used in conjunction with the JMX Management Port 9838 (by default) to authenticate the client AppSvcPort (port 9841 by default). If this value is set to 0. and so on. the Application Server does not run an Application Service. Application Server ports By convention the Application Server listens to the ports listed in the following table: Port Number (By Convention) 9840 Traffic Type AuthSvcPort Description Listening port for the Authentication Service associated with an Application Server.

This communication is all local traffic for this port Incoming messages 9701 RMI execution 9702 In a firewall environment. it requires a user name and password. which the Application Server can provide if you perform the following procedure. Ports used in a multiple application server deployment by the Application Server Launcher By default. use this port is used for BMC BladeLogic Console /Application Server Launcher communication. and # is the number of the port. the following ports are used by the Application Server Launcher for BMC BladeLogic Console to AppServerLauncher communication: Port Number (By default) 9700 Traffic Type JMX Description Default Java Management Extensions (JMX) port used by the BMC BladeLogic Console to communicate with the Application Server Launcher. If the HTTP proxy server authenticates users. Each managed Application Server uses this port to notify the Application Server Launcher that the Application Server is up and in a ready state. such as AuthSvcPort. such as AuthServer. 2 To specify a listening port. The patch management component of BMC BladeLogic incorporates the ability to download files from the Internet.Configuring the Application Server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. Many organizations provide Internet access through a proxy server. enter the following: set appServerComponent listeningport # where appServerComponent is the option category you want to modify. Setting up HTTP proxy server support This procedure describes how to set up a user name and password for authentication on an HTTP proxy server. 66 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Default communications port used for Application Server communication with the Application Server Launcher. 3 Restart the Application Server. listeningport is the type of listening port. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.

enter the following: set appserver HTTPProxyPassword password where password is the password assigned to the proxy user you identified in the previous step. 6 Restart the Application Server. enter the following: set appserver HTTPProxyName serverName where serverName is the name of the HTTP proxy server. 3 To specify a listening port for the HTTP proxy server. 5 To specify a password. This procedure is primarily useful when an Application Server has more than one network interface and you want the Application Server to listen for connections on only one. Binding the Application Server to an IP address Use this procedure to specify an IP address to which an Application Server should listen. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 2 To specify an IP address to which the Application Server should listen. You can also instruct the Application Server to listen for connections on all of its IP addresses. enter the following: set appserver HTTPProxyPort # where # is the port used to contact the proxy server. 2 To identify a proxy server. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. enter the following: set appserver SocketsBindAddress IP_address|all Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 67 .Configuring the Application Server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. enter the following: set appserver HTTPProxyUser userName where userName is the name of a valid user on the proxy server. 4 To specify a user name provided to the HTTP proxy server.

Similarly. such as the management object used by JConsole. If you have previously instructed an Application Server to listen for a specific IP address. 5 Restart the Application Server. 68 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Configuring ports for remote execution objects Use this procedure to configure ports used to access remote execution objects. the Application Server listens on all of its IP addresses. Enabling and disabling Network Shell proxy inspection To ensure data integrity. enter the following: set ProcessSpawner RMIExecutionPort # For more on the process spawner. you must use all in this command to change those instructions so the Application Server listens on all IP addresses. see “Configuring the process spawner” on page 79. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 3 To specify a port used to access JConsole. enter the following: set appserver RMIExecutionPort # where # is the number of the port. You can use this procedure to turn off packet inspection. the Application Server listens on all IP addresses. if you enter all in the command shown above. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. the packet is not delivered. When this inspection reveals a problem.Configuring the Application Server In the command shown above IP_address is the IP address or host name to which the Application Server should listen. 3 Restart the Application Server. BMC BladeLogic inspects data packets traveling between Network Shell clients and proxy servers. 2 To specify a port used to access the Application Server’s remote execution objects. enter the following: set appserver JMXManagementPort # 4 To specify a port used to access the process spawner’s remote execution objects. If you do not specify an IP address or host name.

as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. the Application Server refuses the connection. minor. 3 Restart the Application Server. 2 Enter the following command: set appserver VersionCompatibilityCheck major|minor|micro|build (In the version number 7. minor — Sets the check to compare the major and minor parts of the version numbers. By default proxy inspection is turned on.125 and the client version is 7. Ensuring version compatibility between Application Server and client To ensure that a connection does not take place when an Application Server and client are at different versions. 2 Enable or disable packet inspection by entering the following: set appserver EnableProxyInspection true | false where false turns off proxy inspection and true turns it on.123. micro — Sets the check to compare the major. you can set up a version compatibility check. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 69 . This check compares the version numbers of the client and the Application Server. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. at a level of detail you specify. If you specify: set appserver VersionCompatibilityCheck micro The check would find that the version numbers are the same and allow the connection.0. and micro parts of the version numbers.Configuring the Application Server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console.0. 7 is the major part. If the version numbers are not the same.5.5. For example. This is the default.5. build — Sets the check to compare all four parts of the version numbers.) major — Sets the check to compare only the major part of the version numbers. 5 is the minor part.0. and so on. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console.125. suppose the Application Server version is 7.

You can use this setting to improve database performance. enter the following: set appserver FileSystemObjectCacheMaxSize # where # is a the maximum number of file system objects that will be stored in the cache. The default value is 5000. 3 Restart the Application Server. Setting a maximum cache size for file system objects The Application Server lets you specify the maximum number of file system objects that are stored in the cache. as the file system object is stored in the cache and can be reused. if you take a snapshot of a directory structure contains multiple instances of the same. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 2 To set a maximum cache size for file system objects. 70 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the Job does not have to write the same file to the database multiple times. For example. 3 Restart the Application Server.Configuring the Application Server If you specify: set appserver VersionCompatibilityCheck build The check would find that the version numbers differ and would refuse the connection.

and server objects in the Configuration Object Dictionary. custom objects. the Application Server Launcher. search groups. and other BMC BladeLogic components as described in the following sections. folders. You can then page through these groups to make working with large numbers of objects more manageable. for example. smart groups. You must choose File => Refresh after changing the default to have the change take effect.Changing the heap size for BMC BladeLogic components Setting the maximum number of items per page The Application Server lets you specify a maximum number of records retrieved from a managed server. select Infrastructure Management. from the Configuration menu. You can adjust this display number by selecting Window => Preferences. These records are used when working with groups. Expand BMC and Paging Options to change the default. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 71 . From the BMC BladeLogic Console 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. TIP In the BMC BladeLogic Console. Changing the heap size for the Application Server You can the heap size for the Application Server from the BMC BladeLogic Console or using the blasadmin utility. Changing the heap size for BMC BladeLogic components You can change the heap size for the Application Server. per page. database assets. by default. enter the following: set appserver MaxPageSize # where # is a the maximum number of items retrieved per page. 3 Restart the Application Server. large numbers of objects are presented in groups of 50. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. The default value is 1000. 2 To set a maximum page size. 2 Expand the hierarchy of the Application Servers node.

2048 MB Changing the heap size for the Application Server Launcher You can also change the heap size for the Application Server Launcher. The Edit Application Server Profile dialog opens. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.1536 MB Solaris .Changing the heap size for BMC BladeLogic components 3 Right-click the Application Server you want to edit and select Edit. 2 Enter the following command: set AppServer MaxHeapSize heapSize For example: set AppServer MaxHeapSize 1024M TIP Assuming that the Application Server has the recommended configuration of 4GB or more of physical memory. change the values for the MaxHeapSize attribute. In a multiApplication Server environment. Application Servers inherit the heap size value from the Application Server Launcher. perform the following steps according to your environment. the recommended Max Heap Size value for each platform is as follows: ■ ■ ■ Windows . Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin utility) To change the heap size for the Application Server using the blasadmin utility. perform the following steps: 1 Start the Application Server Administration console.1024 MB Linux . 4 In the Edit Application Server Profile dialog. update the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\BladeLogic\Operations Manager\Application Server\option1 72 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . by default. To change the heap size for the Application Server Launcher. ■ On Windows platforms.

cfg) file in the br directory. For example. By default.tmpdir=$BLADELOGIC_HOME/tmp……. Changing the heap size for other BMC BladeLogic components To change the heap size for other BMC BladeLogic components. Changing the value to Xmx1G. modify the following line in the corresponding script.. for example. you modify the blasadmin./usr/nsh/br directory: $JAVA_HOME/bin/java -Xss2m -Xmx512M Djava.. Enabling/disabling SOCKS proxy rule evaluation By default.cfg file. you modify the configuration script or file for the component. which is located in the ./usr/nsh/br directory: $JAVA_HOME/bin/java -Xss2m -Xmx512M Djava.tmpdir=$BLADELOGIC_HOME/tmp……. ■ For UNIX and Linux platforms. which is located in the . the BMC BladeLogic system evaluates communication requests to remote servers against routing rules to determine if the communication needs to be routed through a SOCKS Proxy Server. where -Xmx512M specifies a max heap size of 512Mb.io.. the configuration files are located in C:\Program Files\BMC Software\Bladelogic\versionNumber\NSH\br. to change the heap size for the blasadmin utility on Windows. ■ For Windows platforms. If your system does not use SOCKS Proxy Servers to route to remote servers. you modify the blclient script. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 73 .io. you can disable routing rule evaluation. specifies a max heap size of 1GB.Enabling/disabling SOCKS proxy rule evaluation ■ For UNIX and Linux platforms. modify the corresponding configuration (. where -Xmx512M specifies a max heap size of 512Mb. for example. Changing the value to Xmx1G. the format for setting the max heap size is jvm. modify the following line in the blappserv script. specifies a max heap size of 1GB. To change the heap size for the BMC BladeLogic Console on UNIX or Linux.arg=-Xmx1024M.. In the configuration file.

and other types of information that is not easily stored in the database. the system does not evaluate communication requests against routing rules. NOTE Do not limit access to the file server by pushing agent ACLs to the agent on the file server. 2 To enable or disable routing rule evaluation. In addition. enter the following: set RoutingConfig EvaluateSocksProxyRules true|false Where: true — Turns on routing rule evaluation. A file server should meet the following requirements: ■ An RSCD agent should be installed and licensed. you must perform this procedure. false — Turns off routing rule evaluation. 74 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . COM+. BMC BladeLogic uses the file server to store the contents of files included in snapshots. the file server stores registry. All users need to be mapped to the same user on the file server. ■ The file server should have substantial disk space (see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide for exact recommendations). Network Shell scripts. routing rule evaluation is turned on. software packages. For information on setting up communications to remote servers through SOCKS Proxy Servers. 3 Restart the Application Server. Before you can start BMC BladeLogic for the first time after a fresh installation.Configuring the file server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. The system evaluates communication requests against routing rules. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. Configuring the file server To configure a file server you must specify a host and directory where BMC BladeLogic stores content. By default. and metabase values longer than 255 characters. BLPackages.

enter the following: set fileserver name hostname where hostname is the name of the server where data is stored. 4 Restart the Application Server. Updating a file server You can update the status or change the properties of a file server using the Infrastructure Management window.Configuring the file server ■ A user name must be defined on the file server. 1 Select Configuration => Infrastructure Management. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. Use a Network Shell style path to a directory. Setting up the file server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. such as /c/FileServer. Without this mapping a user may not be able to access a file that another user has stored on the file server. such as C:\FileServer. 2 To specify the name of the file server. One way to accomplish the necessary mapping is to create an entry like the following in the exports file on the file server: applicationServer rw. enter the following: set fileserver location directory where directory is the directory on the file server where data is stored. as opposed to a Windows-style path. For more information see “Exports file” on page 240. user=userName where applicationServer is a comma-separated list of Application Server names or IP addresses and userName is the name to which all users are mapped. 2 Right-click the file server and select choose from the following options: Option Update File Server Status Description Contacts the file server to determine current status Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 75 . 3 To specify the location of the file server directory. and all BMC BladeLogic users must be mapped to that user.

2 To specify the name or IP address of the SMTP server. 76 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . you must configure a mail server. enter the following: set emailconfig fromaddress address where address is the address from which mail should be sent. (SMTP stands for simple mail transfer protocol. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. enter the following: set emailconfig smtpserver hostname where hostname is the name or IP address of the host managing email. 5 Restart the Application Server. To enable this capability.Configuring a mail server Option Refresh Properties Description Updates the status of the server Launches the properties dialog. You do not have to configure a mail server if you are not using the system’s ability to generate email. see “Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers” on page 312 Configuring a mail server BMC BladeLogic jobs can generate email upon their completion.) 3 To specify the email address from which system-generated email is sent. where you can modify the host name or the file server root directory. For more information. 4 To display the email address for technical support. enter the following: show emailconfig techsupport NOTE The techsupport parameter is a read-only parameter. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. select the Enable Advanced File Server option. To modify the file server to an advanced file server.

1 Start the Application Server Administration console. To enable SNMP traps.Configuring Perl Configuring Perl The BMC BladeLogic Console and Network Shell both support the Perl scripting language. such as /c/perl/bin/perl. 2 To specify the name or IP address of the SNMP server. Configuring an SNMP server When a BMC BladeLogic job completes. you should configure the Application Server so it knows the location of the Perl executable. enter the following: set snmpconfig snmpport # where # is the port used to contact the SNMP server. enter the following: set snmpconfig snmpserver hostname where hostname is the name or IP address of the host managing SNMP trap notifications. when an Audit Job detects consistent or inconsistent results. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 3 To specify a listening port for the SNMP server. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. 2 Specify the path and name of the Perl executable by entering the following: set perlconfig location pathToPerl where pathToPerl is a Network Shell-style path. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 3 Restart the Application Server. If you are using Perl. 4 Restart the Application Server. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 77 . it can generate an SNMP trap. In addition. it too can generate an SNMP trap.exe. you must configure an SNMP server.

However. enter the following: set database connectionstring string where string is a string that specifies the database type. as described in this procedure. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console.OracleDriver 78 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console”.SelectMethod=cursor When using one of the formats shown above. 2 To specify a connection string for the database. enter the following: set database driverclass class where class is the Java® class used to communicate with the database. Replace DBNAME with the name of the database or replace SID with the Oracle SID. you can define the class with one of the following strings: ■ oracle. you can manually configure the Application Server to communicate with the database.Configuring a database server Configuring a database server BMC BladeLogic works in conjunction with an Oracle® or SQL Server database server. the port the database listens on. The installation program can configure the Application Server to communicate with this database. Replace PORT with the port number the database is listening on. and SQL Server database name or Oracle SID.driver.jdbc.DatabaseName=DBNAME. By default. a BMC BladeLogic installation uses the following database ports: Port Number 1521 1433 ■ ■ Database Type Oracle SQL Server 3 To specify the driver class for the database. The connection string can use one of the following formats: ■ ■ jdbc:oracle:thin:@DBSERVER:PORT:SID jdbc:sqlserver://DBSERVER:PORT. the server running the database. do the following: ■ Replace DBServer with the name or IP address of the server running the database. Depending on the type of database you are using.

microsoft. The Application Server transfers the necessary information to the child process. Primarily. 6 Restart the Application Server. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 79 . When the Application Server needs to spawn a process. A larger commit size means database processes execute more quickly.jdbc. Configuring the process spawner An Application Server can be configured to spawn processes externally to the Application Server process itself.sqlserver. which starts a new child process. it contacts the process spawner. TIP Because Oracle databases can be highly tuned. an Application Server spawns processes for Network Shell Script Jobs and some types of extended objects.SQLServerDriver 4 To specify the user ID and password for the database. you may want to consult your Oracle DBA to achieve best results when defining a commit size. enter the following two commands: set database userid id set database password ****** where id is the user name that the database needs to authenticate your connection and ****** is the password assigned to that user ID. 5 To specify a commit size for an Oracle database. a separate dedicated process (the process spawner) is used only for spawning processes. If you configure an Application Server in this way. but at the same time you run the risk of losing more data should a database process fail.Configuring the process spawner ■ com. Commit size is primarily used when taking snapshots or performing audits in BMC BladeLogic. Spawning processes externally can be beneficial for memory management. enter the following: set database commitsize size where size is the maximum number of rows that can be updated in an Oracle database before you either have to commit your updates or roll them back.

see “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. BMC Software recommends that you run the following command before starting the Application Server service (to avoid ‘connection refused’ failures for any scheduled jobs): ■ ■ run /etc/init. By default. The default port is 1067 and is the port recommended by BMC BladeLogic. NOTE If you set the ProcessSpawner SpawnExternally value to true. See “Configuring an Application Server to use the process spawner”.d/blprocserv start (UNIX) net start “BladeLogic Process Spawner” (Windows) 3 Specify a port for communicating with the process spawner. do the following: 1 Configure the Application Server to use the process spawner. this value is set to false. 80 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 4 Restart the Application Server. Enter the following: set ProcessSpawner SpawnExternally true Setting this value to false indicates the process spawner runs within the Application Server process. Configuring an Application Server to use the process spawner 1 Start the Application Server Administration console for the Application Server that you want to execute the NSH jobs. For example: blasadmin -s JobServer1 For more information on methods for starting this console. See “Configuring the process spawner” on page 81. 2 Configure the process spawner itself. 2 Specify that processes be spawned externally from the Application Server process. Enter the following: set ProcessSpawner RegistryPort # where # is the number of a port.Configuring the process spawner To configure the process spawner.

d/blprocserv restart ■ Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 81 . Right-click BMC BladeLogic Process Spawner and select Restart from the pop-up menu. On a UNIX-style system.Configuring the process spawner Configuring the process spawner 5 Start the Application Server Administration console for the process spawner deployment. Enter the following: set AppServer RegistryPort # where # is the number of a port. blasadmin -s _spawner For more information on methods for starting this console. The default port is 1067 and is the port recommended by BMC BladeLogic. Do one of the following: ■ On Windows. enter the following: /etc/init. from the Start menu. 7 Restart the process spawner. Double-click Administrative Tools. select Settings > Control Panel. and double-click Services. see “Starting the Application Server Administration console”. 6 Set the Registry Port for the process spawner to match the port specified to the when you configured the Application Server to use the process spawner.

Once the credentials expire. Choosing not to cross mount points can substantially increase the speed of snapshots. see “Configuring the process spawner” on page 81. if you want to cross mount points. Processing across mount points Use this procedure to configure the Application Server so snapshots. processing does not cross mount points. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. you can perform a snapshot or audit of / and processing can traverse other volumes such as /home or /usr that may reside under /. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. and packaging of BLPackages. enter the following: set mountconfig SnpAudPkgCrossMounts true|false 82 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . and BLPackages in BMC BladeLogic can be processed across UNIX mount points and network mount points for remote file systems shared through NFS. By default. NOTE If a job exceeds the timeout value in the NshScriptJobCredentialTimeout setting. The NshScriptJobCredentialTimeout setting is a global setting that applies to all jobs. 3 Restart the Application Server. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. The default setting is 96 hours. an error message is written to the Application Server log and the job log. 2 To set a timeout value for the job session credentials. 2 To specify how UNIX mount points are processed. audits.Configuring expiration time for credentials of jobs Configuring expiration time for credentials of jobs Use this procedure to set a timeout value for the session credentials that are passed to jobs. all active client connections are closed. For more on the process spawner. enter the following: set ProcessSpawner NshScriptJobCredentialTimeout # where # is the number of hours (minimum of 24). audits. For example.

Using this procedure can help prevent the Application Server from running out of memory. enter the following: set mountconfig SnpAudPkgNetworkMounts true|false In the command shown above. and in live browsing. Restricting the size of configuration and extended objects Use this procedure to limit the number of records that a server can provide to an Application Server for a single configuration object or extended object. the job fails on that server with a parsing error. the SnpAudPkgCrossMounts option must also be set to true (see step 2). false means that processing does not cross network mount points (this is the default value). particularly when the Application Server processes multiple configuration objects or extended objects on multiple servers simultaneously. 2 To limit the number of records that an Application Server can process for a single configuration object or extended object. Snapshot. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. Setting this value to 0 means no records are processed. enter the following: set AssetThresholds MaxConfigRecords # where # is the maximum number of records to be processed.Restricting the size of configuration and extended objects In the command shown above. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 83 . To set SnpAudPkgNetworkMounts to true. Processing large numbers of records for a configuration object or extended object can consume large quantities of memory. snapshots. 4 Restart the Application Server. true means processing of audits. and BLPackages crosses mount points. snapshots. and BLPackages crosses network mount points.000. If a job targets a server that returns more records for a configuration object or extended object than the limit set in this procedure. Configuration objects and extended objects can be used in component templates. 3 To specify how network mount points are processed. By default this value is set to 50. false means that processing does not cross mount points (this is the default value). true means processing of audits. Audit. 3 Restart the Application Server. and Compliance Jobs.

1 Start the Application Server Administration console. users cannot display no access nodes. which users can always delete. BMC BladeLogic calls these type of objects no access nodes. The following procedures describe the available options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Displaying no access nodes in the BMC BladeLogic Console Deleting groups in the BMC BladeLogic Console Creating properties automatically in the BMC BladeLogic Console Limiting the number of results displayed when browsing Controlling the permissions of copied objects Enabling export and import of property dictionaries and classes Setting temporary group location for update Displaying no access nodes in the BMC BladeLogic Console In the BMC BladeLogic Console. 2 To show or hide no access nodes. Deleting groups in the BMC BladeLogic Console Use this procedure to specify that users of the BMC BladeLogic Console cannot delete groups or folders unless they are empty. BMC BladeLogic users have the option of hiding or displaying no access nodes. true indicates that no access nodes can be shown in the BMC BladeLogic Console. users can potentially see system objects even when those users do not have appropriate permissions to interact with those objects. 3 Restart the Application Server. If you use this procedure to show no access nodes at the Application Server level. false indicates no access nodes are hidden. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 84 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . By default. This setting has no effect on smart groups. enter the following: set ConfigManagerUI ShowNoAccessNodes true|false In the command shown above. If you use this procedure to hide no access nodes.Configuring user interface settings Configuring user interface settings The Application Server Administration console gives you several options for controlling the behavior of the BMC BladeLogic Console and the BLCLI. users can delete groups and folders even when they contain system objects. This procedure lets you globally show or hide no access nodes.

as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.Configuring user interface settings 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. true indicates that groups must be empty before they can be deleted. By default. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 85 . Creating properties automatically in the BMC BladeLogic Console When you import objects into the BMC BladeLogic Console and those objects reference properties not defined on the destination system. 2 To turn the automatic creation of properties on or off. Selecting some nodes while browsing can potentially display large numbers of results. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. This procedure lets you set an arbitrary limit to the number of results that can be displayed during live browse. 3 Restart the Application Server. This procedure lets you specify whether properties should be created automatically during the import process. properties are automatically created. Limiting the number of results displayed when browsing Use this procedure to limit the number of results displayed when a user is browsing in the BMC BladeLogic Console. which can slow your system performance. false indicates properties are not automatically created. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. true indicates that properties are automatically created. 2 To specify whether users can delete groups or folders. 3 Restart the Application Server. enter the following: set ConfigManagerUI AutoCreate true|false In the command shown above. BMC BladeLogic can automatically create properties so you can map them to the properties referenced by the imported object. enter the following: set ConfigManagerUI GroupsMustBeEmpty true|false In the command shown above. false indicates users can delete groups and folders even when they contain objects.

1 Start the Application Server Administration console. 3 Restart the Application Server. 3 Restart the Application Server. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. Normally. and the newly created object has the permissions that are specified for that type of object in the object permissions template defined for the user’s role. when users copy and paste an object. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. users can set a preference that also establishes a limit for results displayed while browsing. Also the user’s role is granted full permission to the object (that is. users can copy and paste an object. Controlling the permissions of copied objects Use this procedure to control the permissions that are assigned to objects during copy and paste operations in the BMC BladeLogic Console. the newly created object is granted a default set of permissions. 2 To enable copying of objects so that the copied objects are assigned a default set of permissions. By default this option is set to 50. After you use blasadmin to perform this procedure.000. the newly created object has the same permissions as those assigned to the object that was copied. By default this option is set to false. enter the following: set AssetThresholds MaxAllowedLiveBrowseResults # where # is the maximum number of results that can be displayed for any node when browsing in the console. the newly created object has the same permissions that were defined for the object that was copied.Configuring user interface settings In the BMC BladeLogic Console. a * authorization). The limit set in the console cannot exceed the limit established with this procedure. 2 To limit the number of live browse results that can be displayed. Setting this number to 0 indicates no results are displayed. true means that when you copy and paste an object. 86 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . enter the following: set ACLCopy UseDefaultAclOnObjectCopy true In the command shown above. false means that when you copy and paste an object.

true indicates that you can export and import the Property Dictionary or custom property classes. 2 To enable or disable the import and export of the Property Dictionary or custom property classes. By default this option is set to false. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. enter the following: set ConfigManagerUI PropertySync true|false In the command shown above. false indicates import/export is disabled.Configuring user interface settings Enabling export and import of property dictionaries and classes Use this procedure to enable or disable the export and import of the entire Property Dictionary or specific custom property classes. 3 Restart the Application Server. By default. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. To enable import/export. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 2 To specify a new location for the temporary group. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. This procedure lets you change this group to another name or location. enter the following: set ConfigManagerUI DefaultImportAndUpdateFolder /path/to/some/folder 3 Restart the Application Server. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 87 . This temporary group is deleted at the end of the update operation. Setting temporary group location for update When you run any of the BLCLI importAndUpdate commands in the Template or BlPackage name spaces. this option must be set to true on both the exporting and the importing Application Server. the import and update process creates a temporary group at the root of the relevant workspace and uses that group to store the imported object. the temporary group is /importAndUpdate.

as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. enter the following: 88 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . ■ ■ 1 Start the Application Server Administration console.Setting SRP login requirements Setting SRP login requirements Use this procedure to configure the Application Server so it forces users logging in via SRP to meet any of the following requirements: ■ Minimum password length—By setting a minimum password length. ■ To specify how long it takes for a password to expire. ■ To specify how many times a user can fail to log in before being locked out. you can require users to change passwords at specified intervals. For more information on RBAC see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. Entering a 0 indicates there is no minimum length for passwords. enter the following: set accountconfig MinPasswordLength # where # is the minimum length for passwords. By default. you can require users specifying passwords to provide a password of minimum length. 2 Do any of the following: ■ To specify a minimum password length. enter the following: set accountconfig AccountLockoutThreshold # where # is the number of failed logins that trigger a lockout. you can specify how many failed logins cause a user to be locked out and how long that lockout lasts. ■ To specify how long a user is locked out when he or she has surpassed the lockout threshold. Account lockout—By setting a threshold and duration for account lockouts. Entering a 0 indicates passwords do not expire. enter the following: set accountconfig MaxPasswordAge # where # is a period of time in days. In RBAC you can specify that passwords never expire no matter what expiration period you specify. Maximum password age—By setting a maximum password age. Entering a 0 indicates that users cannot be locked out because of login failures. there is no minimum length for passwords.

such as eth0 or eth1. a BMC BladeLogic PXE Server listens on the multicast address of 224. Servers being provisioned download bootstrap programs from a TFTP server.0 to 239.2. Use this procedure to provide various parameters needed to run a PXE Server.0. Configuring the PXE Server When provisioning some types of servers. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console and specify the PXE Server deployment (_pxe). 4 Identify the IP address of the multicast group that the PXE server listens on by entering the following: set pxeserver multicast_address address where address is an IP address.255. you might enter the name of a network interface card. which provides instructions for downloading the bootstrap program needed to begin the provisioning process. Multicast addresses must fall in the range 224.1.255.0. For example. Entering a 0 indicates that users can only be unlocked by an administrator using RBAC.Configuring the PXE Server set accountconfig AccountLockoutDuration # where # is the number of minutes the user is locked out. you must set up a PXE Server. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 89 . By default. 3 Identify the address of the TFTP server by entering the following: set pxeserver default_address TFTP_address where TFTP_address is the IP address of the TFTP server.0. Enter the following: blasadmin -s _pxe 2 Identify the type of Ethernet interface that the PXE server uses to listen by entering the following: set pxeserver interface_to_bind interfaceName where interfaceName is the type of Ethernet interface.255. 5 Identify the IP address of a multicast TFTP server by entering the following: set pxeserver mtftp_address MTFTP_address where MTFTP_address is the multicast address that the TFTP listens on.

90 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .Configuring the PXE Server 6 Identify the multicast port that PXE clients should use to communicate with the TFTP server by entering the following: set pxeserver mtftp_client_port port where port is the multicast port that servers being provisioned should use to communicate with the TFTP server. If you enter 0. 11 Specify the amount of time the boot prompt displays before the boot process begins by entering the following: set pxeserver prompt_timeout # where # is the maximum amount of time the boot prompt can display. 8 Identify the PXE Server’s listening port by entering the following: set pxeserver listen_port port where port is the port on which the PXE Server listens for connections from PXE clients. the boot prompt does not display. 10 Specify whether the PXE Server can use a broadcast by entering the following: set pxeserver is_use_broadcast # where # can be one of the following: ■ ■ 0—The PXE Server cannot use a broadcast. By default BMC BladeLogic uses port 1759. 7 Identify the port that the TFTP server should use to listen for traffic from PXE clients by entering the following: set pxeserver mtftp_server_port port where port is the multicast port. By default BMC BladeLogic uses port 1758. 1—The PXE Server can use a multicast. 9 Specify whether the PXE Server uses a multicast by entering the following: set pxeserver is_use_multicast # where # can be one of the following: ■ ■ 0—The PXE Server cannot use a multicast. 1—The PXE Server can use a broadcast.

Use the Licensing command to specify the information required to access the services of the Licensing Portal. 13 Identify the PXE Server’s domain by entering the following: set pxeserver domain domain_name where domain_name is the name of the PXE Server’s domain. 14 Restart the PXE Server. enter: show Licensing ServiceUsername Connecting to the Licensing Portal Use the following parameters for the Licensing command to specify the location of the portal and the credentials the Application Server uses to communicate with the Licensing Portal. to display the user name the Application Server uses to connect to the Licensing Portal. For example.Configuring the Licensing Module 12 Identify the base directory on the TFTP server where operating system bootstrap programs are stored. use the show parameter instead of the set parameter.com/services/LicensingWS set Licensing DeregisterServiceURL https://webapps. TIP To display the value of a parameter you have set previously. Task Set the location of Licensing Portal for registering servers Set the location of Licensing Portal for deregistering servers Command set Licensing LicenseServiceURL http://www.bladelogic.com/ BMCBladelogicLicensingWS/services/BMCBladelogic LicenseService Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 91 . Enter the following: set pxeserver tftpd_base_dir directory where directory is the base directory on the TFTP server for storing bootstrap programs. Configuring the Licensing Module The Application Server communicates with the BMC Software Licensing Portal to register or deregister managed servers.bmc.

it is stored in the database in encrypted form. Asynchronous execution can occur during the Simulate and Commit phases of a Deploy Job as well as during an undo. When you use the show Licensing ServicePassword command. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. the password is displayed in encrypted form. Notes Enter the fully-qualified name of the host machine.Enabling asynchronous execution Task Set the user name and password Command set Licensing ServiceUsername userName set Licensing ServicePassword password Note: While the password is entered in clear text. it is stored in the database in encrypted form. Turning asynchronous execution on or off does not affect the Staging phase of a Deploy Job. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. When you use the show Licensing ProxyPassword command. Connecting to the Licensing Portal using a proxy These optional parameters for the Licensing command specify the system and credentials for the proxy host through which the Application Server communicates with the Licensing Portal. Enabling asynchronous execution Asynchronous execution lets Deploy Jobs run without blocking work item threads for extended periods of time. enter the following: 92 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the password is displayed in encrypted form. This allow an Application Server to process a Deploy Job more efficiently and frees up valuable Application Server resources that can be used by other jobs. 2 To enable or disable asynchronous execution. Task Set the proxy host name Set the proxy port Set the proxy user name and password Command set Licensing ProxyHost hostName set Licensing ProxyPort portNumber set Licensing ProxyUsername userName set Licensing ProxyPassword password While the ProxyPassword is entered in clear text.

The easiest way to achieve this result is to run the Post-Install configuration wizard as the last step of the Application Server installation.) Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 93 . see “Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server” on page 34. (For information. Enabling web services To enable web services. follow these steps: 1 If you have not done so already. Using separate Application Servers in this way. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Web Services Developer Guide. Defining multiple Application Servers also lets you utilize more fixed memory on a host system because the JavaVM heap limit would otherwise restrict a single Application Server to a fixed amount of memory. All Application Servers on the same host must use the same database connection. Configuring multiple Application Servers on the same host BMC BladeLogic lets you run multiple Application Servers on a single host. enter the following: set AppServer enableWebServices true For information about additional web services settings. such as a Configuration Server or a Job Server. the performance of one Application Server does not affect the behavior of another.Enabling web services set appserver EnableAsyncExecution true | false By default this value is set to true. in addition to the Application Server initially installed. You can configure each additional Application Server so it performs one or more distinct functions. install and configure the Application Server on the host machine. 3 Restart the Application Server. To configure multiple application servers on the same host.

94 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The table describes each deployment and the effect of configuration changes on it. About Application Server deployments and profiles The following sections provide an overview of Application Server deployment and the different types of Application Servers. See “Creating additional Application Servers”. based on their Application Server Type and other information you specify. NOTE When you start blasadmin. you must use options to specify the Application Server you are configuring or to specify configuration of all Application Servers on the host. use the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to further configure Application Servers.About Application Server deployments and profiles 2 Use the Infrastructure Management window or the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to create and configure additional Application Servers on the host. See “Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to configure Application Servers” on page 44. The creation process not only creates the additional Application Servers but also gives them an “out-of-the-box” configuration. Application Server deployments A deployment is a directory of services that an Application Server runs. 3 Optionally.

default The deployment for a single Application Server or the initial Application Server when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. See “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. Changes to this deployment affect all new Application Servers created. each Application Server’s profile determines the number and type of services in its deployment. When there are multiple Application Servers configured on the same host. Changes you make using blappconf -s appServerName For more information.About Application Server deployments and profiles Deployment Name _template Description The “master” from which other Application Server deployments are created. See “Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings” on page 39. The following configuration changes affect the default deployment: ■ Changes you make using the Application Server Administration console from the BMC BladeLogic menu or using blasadmin without the -a option or -s option. Configuration changes you make using blasadmin -a affect this deployment. ■ AppServerName The deployment for each Application Server created on the same host (in addition to the default Application Server). See “Starting blasadmin to Configure the Default Application Server” on page 45. Changes you make using the Application Server Configuration Wizard or the blappconf command with no -s option. see “Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings” on page 39. The following configuration changes affect the deployment: ■ Changes you make using blasadmin -s appServerName or blasadmin -a. The start-up process copies the _template deployment to create the default deployment. ■ Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 95 . This deployment is created when a single or initial Application Server is first started. This deployment contains default (“out-of-the-box”) settings and initial configuration settings made with the Post-Install Configuration wizard. This deployment is created during BMC BladeLogic installation.

BMC BladeLogic uses the profile to create and update an Application Server’s deployment (the services that the Application Server runs). An Application Server’s profile is essentially a pre-packaged set of configuration options for an Application Server. The following table lists Application Server types and describes each. and attributes. See “Configuring the PXE Server” on page 89. The deployment for the PXE Server. Executes work items needed to process a job. The deployment for the Application Server Launcher. You specify the Application Server types when you create the Application Server. AppSvcPort) is open. Application Server Type CONFIGURATION Functional Description Handles all requests from the BMC BladeLogic Console and the BLCLI. While a CONFIGURATION server can create jobs and start the execution of jobs. JOB 96 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Each Application Server has a different profile. Application Server types The Application Server Type defines the work that an Application Server performs and services that it runs. Application Server profiles A profile is a definition of an Application Server’s identity: its name. An Application Server profile can include attributes of one or more Application Server types. only a JOB server can run the work items needed to process a job. provided that one or more of the connection ports (for example. A JOB server responds to local connection requests from the BMC BladeLogic Console or the BLCLI. See “The Application Server Launcher” on page 34. A JOB server never responds to remote connection requests. See “Configuring the process spawner” on page 81. The attributes needed for each type are predefined in the profile for the type. type. regardless of settings for the connection ports.About Application Server deployments and profiles Deployment Name _spawner _pxe _launcher Description The deployment for the process spawner.

select Infrastructure Management. JOB. Equivalent to (CONFIGURATION. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 97 . Click Yes to redeploy the unmanaged deployment with the base port and configuration type you specify. Note that you will not preserve the data that was in the previous unmanaged deployment. Then select New Application Server. 2 Expand the Application Server Launchers node and right-click the Application Server Launcher that you want to control the new Application Server. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. Choose one of the following options: ■ Click No to return to the new Application Server dialog. An NSH_PROXY server cannot service requests from the BMC BladeLogic Console or the BLCLI. ALL Creating additional Application Servers You can create additional Application Servers from the BMC BladeLogic Console using the Infrastructure Management window or from the command line using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin). entering the following information for the new Application Server. NSH_PROXY) An Application Server with its type set to ALL performs the functions of all Application Server types. ■ 3 In the New Application Server dialog. you are presented with the option of using the unmanaged deployment or creating a new one.Creating additional Application Servers Application Server Type NSH_PROXY Functional Description Manages traffic between Network Shell clients and remote servers. Creating additional Application Servers from the BMC BladeLogic Console Use this procedure to create Application Servers in addition to the Application Server installed on a host. If there are unmanaged deployments which match this new Application Server request. from the Configuration menu.

_pxe. The number must be between 1000 and 65536. _template. or ALL (a combination of all three types). See “Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile” on page 100. you can change the Display Name. However. Follow these guidelines: ■ Specify a name that is unique on the host. if the default port numbers have a base of 9800 (9836 for Registry Port. _launcher. To generate the numbers. The Application Server Type determines the attributes included in its Application Server profile. Application (Required) Specifies the type of Application Server to create: Server Type(s) CONFIGURATION. Accept the default (All Server Types) or uncheck All Server Types and select one or more types. Do not use the same name as the default Application Server. _util. For example. digits.Creating additional Application Servers Field Application Server Name Description (Required) The name for the new Application Server. _install. Specify a number that makes the new Application Server’s default ports unique on the host. and so on). 4 Click OK. NSH_PROXY. The name can be no more than 200 characters in length. Do not use the following reserved names: default. 5 A prompt appears. the SRP Port to 9929. _postmig ■ ■ ■ You cannot change the Application Server Name after configuration. as well as for the Display Name in the interface. hyphens (-). 9829 for SRP Port. and so on. asking if you want to edit the new Application Server’s profile. For information on each type. The creation process sets the Registry Port to 9936. and underscores (_). you could specify 9900 as the base port for the new Application Server. Used internally within the BMC BladeLogic environment. _old. BMC BladeLogic uses the base port with the last two digits of the default port. (Use Shift + Click to select multiple contiguous types. JOB. use Ctrl-Click to select individual items). _spawner. The name can include letters. The system creates a profile for the new Application Server. Base Port (Required) The number that BMC BladeLogic uses to automatically generate default port numbers for the new Application Server. 98 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . see “Application Server types” on page 96.

see “Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile” on page 100. the offset for the authentication port is 40 by default. You can either start the Application Server or deploy it and start it later. For information on each type. see “Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile” on page 100. click Yes. Creating additional Application Servers from the command line You can also add a new Application Server deployment using the blasadmin Create command. To accept the profile. The Edit Application Server Profile dialog appears.) ■ BMC BladeLogic creates the Application Server. If the base_port is 9500. You can create deployments while executing from a shell or while reading in a file. For guidelines for creating the name. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 99 . see the description of the Application Server Name field in “Creating additional Application Servers from the BMC BladeLogic Console” on page 97. For example. profile_type is a comma separated list of the type of Application Server to create: Configuration. or All (a combination of all three types). click No. (You can always edit the profile later. base_port is a number that is combined with offset values to determine Authentication and Application Server port numbers. Job. NSH_Proxy. To add a new deployment 1 Start blasadmin for the _template deployment by entering the following: blasadmin -s _template 2 Create a new default deployment of a specific type by entering the following: create deployment_name base_port profile_types where deployment_name is the name of the new deployment you are creating. This command provides the ability to set up an environment from the command line. For information. the authentication port would be 9540.Creating additional Application Servers ■ To add or change attributes for the server.

■ To add an attribute to the Application Server’s profile or to change a default value. 3 Start the Application Server on the machine where you are setting up the deployment. and attributes (configuration parameters). clear the field and type the value you want.Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile NOTE For instructions on using blasadmin to create a stand-alone NSH Proxy. The Edit Application Server Profile dialog opens. select Infrastructure Management. from the Configuration menu. 3 Right-click the Application Server you want to edit and select Edit. type a value in the blank field. NOTE Always use the Edit Application Server Profile dialog to add or change the attributes (configuration parameters) in an Application Server’s profile. To change an existing value. add or change values for attributes. ■ ■ 100 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The fields in this dialog are effectively overrides to default values or to previouslyspecified configuration parameters. To remove an attribute from the profile. clear the field. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. type. Do not use the blasadmin utility. 4 In the Edit Application Server Profile dialog. To view an Application Server’s profile or change attribute values. See “Starting Application Servers” on page 41. Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile An Application Server profile is a definition of an Application Server’s identity: its name. see “Setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server” on page 145. use the Edit Application Server Profile dialog. 2 Expand the hierarchy of the Application Servers node.

A ServiceType of Automatic means that the Application Server will be started automatically by the AppServerLauncher. which means that the Application Server can only be started using the Infrastructure Dialog. _template. You do not have to specify a name. follow these guidelines: ■ Specify a name that is unique on the host. You cannot edit this attribute. Do not use the same name as the default Application Server. If you leave this field blank. The name that appears in all user interfaces. _spawner. digits. _old. hyphens (-). as specified during configuration. ■ ■ True — The Application Server uses the default deployment. specified during configuration. _launcher. You cannot edit this attribute. and underscores (_). ■ By default. the Display Name is the same as the Application Server name. _install. see “Editing the list of roles with Application Server Launcher access” on page 113. _pxe. Do not use the following reserved names: default. The following table describes all attributes that a profile can include. _util ■ ■ Default Deployment Shows whether the Application Server uses the default deployment. rather than the Application Server name. the ServiceType is Automatic. The name can include letters. NSH. JOB. See “Application Server types” on page 96. ServiceType Determines if the Application Server should be automatically started by the AppServerLauncher. Server Profile Type(s) The Application Server’s type. If you specify a name. False —The Application Server do not use the default deployment. or ALL. The type can be one or more of the following: CONFIGURATION. ■ A ServiceType of Manual.Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile Attributes listed depend on the Server Profile Type (Application Server Type). You cannot edit this attribute. For information. Attribute Application Server Name Display Name Description The name for the Application Server. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 101 .

AppSvcPort The listening port for the Application Service (the service that accepts client connections). If you set this value to 0. To include this attribute in the profile. you can direct these commands to run on a particular Application Server.bladelogic:blsess://localhost:9841. However. unless the server is also a configuration server (Application Server Type JOB and CONFIGURATION). this port defaults to 0.10. If that Application Server is a JOB type Application Server. For example: service:appsvc. When you create a new Application Server. the Application Server does not run an Authentication Service. service:appsvc.10:9841 Typically. unless the server is also a configuration server (Application Server Type JOB and CONFIGURATION). that service accepts only connections from the local machine. AuthSvcPort The listening port for the Authentication Service (the service that authenticates user identities). the port is disabled.Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile Attribute AppServiceURLs Description The Application Service URLs distributed in the session credentials issued by the Authentication Service. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. When you create a new Application Server. By default BLCLI commands run on the Application Server processing the job. if you want to run Network Shell Script Jobs that include BLCLI commands. it runs a ClientConnectionService.bladelogic:blsess://10. BMC BladeLogic sets this value to the Base Port plus 41. However. If you set this value to 0.10. the default is Base Port plus 40. Note: When you create a job server (Application Server Type JOB). BLCLI commands used for import or export must run on an Application Server with its type set to CONFIGURATION or ALL. Note: When you create a job server (Application Server type JOB). CLRProxyPort The listening port for Network Shell (NSH) communication. you do not need to specify a value for this attribute. In that case. it cannot process BLCLI commands used for import/export. If you set this value to 0. 102 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . specify one or more comma-separated values. the Application Server does not run an Application Service. BMC BladeLogic sets this value to the Base Port plus 40. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host.

Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 103 . LogfileName The name of the log file for the Application Server. specify a name that is unique on the host. This value is usually adequate. You do not need to specify a value for this attribute. If you edit this attribute. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. MaxHeapSize You can specify a value for MaxHeapSize but you are not required to do so.Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile Attribute ConsoleLogfileName Description The name of the console log file for the Application Server. By default. MaxWorkItemThreads The maximum size of the pool of threads that can be used to process BMC BladeLogic Console jobs. For information on recommended maximum Java heap size for Application Servers. The maximum dynamic port number. the Application Server uses the heap size set in the Application Server start-up script or service definition. for example: 1G or 225M. If the value is not valid. JMXManagementPort The port used to access the BMC BladeLogic JConsole. the value for JVMArgs is used instead of MaxHeapSize. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. MinPort The minimum dynamic port number. If you edit this attribute. Specify any argument that can be specified to the Java command line If the MaxHeapSize attribute is set and you specify an -Xmx flag for JVMArgs. the Application Server does not start. BMC BladeLogic sets this value to the Base Port + 50. The default is 20. To specify a value. When you create a new Application Server. this value is set to Base Port + 99. When you create a new Application Server. When you create a new Application Server.log extension. use the standard Java notation. MaxJobs MaxPort The maximum number of jobs the Application Server can execute simultaneously. plus any information logged to the console. see the hardware requirements for the Application Server in the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide. BMC BladeLogic sets this value to the Base Port plus 38. specify a name that is unique on the host. it is assumed to be valid and is used when the Application Server is started. When you create a new Application Server. BMC BladeLogic sets the log file’s name to the Application Server name plus the . This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. JVMArgs Arguments to pass to Java Virtual Machine for this Application Server. If you do not specify a value. The console log file contains all information logged to the Application Server log. BMC BladeLogic sets the console log file’s name to the Application Server name plus “_console”. If you specify a value. Determines how many targets can be processed in parallel. The default is 50.

Usually. you can override the default list by typing a comma-separated list of properties in the field. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. there is no need to change this list. TempDirectoryName The name of the directory that stores the Application Server’s tmp files.bladelogic.bladelogic. the system uses the default URLs. type a comma-separated list in the field.com:9842. If you leave this field blank. SSLPort The listening port for SSL communication. BMC BladeLogic sets this value to the Base Port plus 31.properties In most cases. You must manually define a listening port for the default deployment of an Application Server. If this value is blank. If you leave this field blank.bladelogic:blsess://host2. When you deploy a new Application Server with its type set to NSH_PROXY or ALL. When you create a new Application Server. If you edit this attribute. BMC BladeLogic sets this value to the Base Port plus 36. service:proxysvc.properties sql/streamable_sqlmap.com:9842 ProxySvcPort The listening port for a Network Shell Proxy Service. 104 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .properties sql/reports-sql. the Application Server does not run a Network Shell Proxy Service. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. However.properties sql/blas-sqlmap.Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile Attribute ProxyServiceURLs Description The Network Shell Proxy Service service URLs. the list is: sql/sqlmap. this name is the same as the Application Server Name and its location is: installDirectory/tmp/temporaryDirectoryName When you create a new Application Server. ProxySvcPort is set to 9842 for the default Application Server. RegistryPort The listening port for traffic between Application Servers that cooperate by distributing jobs to each other. For example: service:proxysvc. When you create a new Application Server. You can modify this value if necessary. BMC BladeLogic sets the temporaryDirectoryName to the Application Server Name. SqlFiles The list of SQL properties files used by the Database Service. To override the default URLs. the ProxySvcPort is automatically set to the Base Port plus 42.bladelogic:blsess://host1. specify a name that is unique on the host. Typically. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host.

attributes for these Application Servers cannot have the same values. All other attributes must be unique. regardless of what that value is. its Application Server details shows State = CONFLICT. For information on identifying conflicts in Application Servers’ attributes. The Application Server Launcher automatically detects attribute conflicts among the Application Servers that it controls. ■ ■ Listing conflicting attributes When there are Application Servers on the same host. Typically. Multiple Application Servers can have the same value for MaxJobs. click OK. 7 Start or restart the Application Server to have changes take effect. a conflict occurs because the same port number has been assigned to more than one Application Server. When an Application Server’s profile has a conflicting attributes. expand the hierarchy of the Application Servers node. MaxWorkItemThreads. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 105 . You can also use the List Conflicts operation to identify attributes on an Application Server that conflict with attributes on other Application Servers. 2 In the Infrastructure Management window. Failure to make them unique results in conflicts that can cause a start or restart failure in one or more Application Servers. Rules for defining unique attributes Several rules apply when assigning unique values to attributes: ■ Multiple Application Servers can share any port that is set to 0 if that setting of 0 disables the port. select Infrastructure Management. or SqlFiles. from the Configuration menu. These conflicts prevent an Application Server from starting or restarting if it has conflicts with one or more currently running Application Servers. see “Listing conflicting attributes” on page 105. 6 Click OK on the warning that configuration changes do not take effect until you restart the Application Server. each should have a unique profile.Listing conflicting attributes 5 When you are finished editing the profile. For the most part.

Getting information about Application Servers 3 Right-click an Application Server and select List Conflicts. host (using the same database). This information can be useful for diagnostic purposes. Do the following: A list of Application Servers on the Expand the Application Servers node. General information about an Application Server Click the Application Server’s name in the left pane. 2 Expand the hierarchy of the Application Servers node. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. The right pane shows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Software version Number of jobs running Number of work item threads Database connections Host operating system JVM memory usage 106 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .. the panel shows the attribute name and the name of Application Server that has the same attribute value specified. your role must be granted the BL_Administration.. select Infrastructure Management. Getting information about Application Servers You can display information about an Application Server and the services that it runs. The left pane lists each Application Server’s Display Name and Authorization Port. To display. A Warning panel lists the attributes that conflict with those other Application Servers.Read authorization. 4 Click OK. from the Configuration menu. NOTE To display information about the Application Server. For each attribute.

(The number and type of services vary according to the Application Server’s type.) Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 107 .. stopped. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A list of the services that an Application Server provides Status information about an Application Server service Expand the hierarchy of an Application Server. specified during configuration. Click the service name. on the Application Server The Application Server Launchers node The Application Server Launchers node lists a node for each Application Server Launcher that is configured to use the database and is available. Needs Restart — (True | False) Whether the Application Server has been reconfigured and needs to be restarted. Elapsed Time — The uptime of the Application Server. Status information from the Application Server Launcher. Status — (Ready | Stopped | Starting) Whether the Application Server is ready to perform tasks. (For information.) Expand the hierarchy of the Application Server. scroll down. (This information is displayed if your role has authorization to access the Application Server Launcher. The right pane shows: ■ The Application Server Launcher that controls the Application Server Name — The name for the Application Server.. or starting up. Start Date — The date when the Application Server was started. In the right pane. see “The Application Server Launcher” on page 34. A menu of actions you can perform Right-click the Application Server. ■ ■ Server Type— Application Server Type.) Do the following: Click the Application Server’s name in the left pane.The Application Server Launchers node To display. ServiceType — (Manual | Automatic) Whether the Application Server is automatically started by the AppServerLauncher. State — (VALID | CONFLICTS) Whether the Application Server’s profile has conflicts that can keep the Application Server from starting. Display name— The name that appears in all BMC ■ ■ BladeLogic user interfaces.

Reporting Application Server information The Application Server Launcher lists a node for each Application Server it controls. Through the Application Server Launchers node. Information about the database to which the Application Server is connected. you can get the same information about Application Servers and perform the same operations as with the Application Servers node. 4 On the dialog. 2 In the Infrastructure Management window. C For File Encoding. Create new Application Servers. select the type of character encoding that should be used for the exported data. Edit the list of roles allowed access to the Application Server Launcher. click Export Detail Report . The report includes: ■ General information for each Application Server configured on the host machine (and using the same database) and detailed status information about each Application Server’s services. However. select a subdirectory by double-clicking its name in the panel. 3 On the Export AppServer Details Report dialog. enter the information for the report file: A For Object Name. from the Configuration menu. 5 Click Save. Reporting Application Server information You can generate a report containing information about all of the Application Servers on the host. such as UTF8 or Western (windows-1252). Optionally. select a directory where the report should be stored. ■ ■ 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. General information for each PXE server connected to the database and detailed status information about each PXE Servers services. type a file name for the report. select Infrastructure Management. B For Object Type. from the pull-down menu. select a file format. 108 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . it is only through the Application Server Launcher that you can: ■ ■ ■ Obtain port information for the Application Server Launcher.

you manage the additional Application Servers through the Infrastructure Management window. if it has not been deployed. You can select options for handling the running jobs.Managing multiple Application Servers on the same host Managing multiple Application Servers on the same host When there are multiple Application Servers configured on the same host. 3 Right-click the Application Server and select Start. Stopping a specific Application Server The stop operation ends running jobs and stops the Application Server. select Infrastructure Management. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. 2 Expand the Application Servers node. You can perform any of the following management tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Starting a specific Application Server Stopping a specific Application Server Redeploying a stopped Application Server Terminating a specific Application Server Restarting a specific Application Server Removing an Application Server Adding unmanaged deployments Starting a specific Application Server The start operation starts the Application Server and automatically deploys it. NOTE You cannot use the stop operation on an Application Server to which a BMC BladeLogic Console is connected. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 109 . providing a controlled shutdown. from the Configuration menu.

Redeploying a stopped Application Server You can select a stopped Application Server and then redeploy it with a different profile type. base_port is a number that is combined with offset values to determine Authentication and Application Server port numbers. Application Server Type: select the profile type for this Application Server: ■ CONFIGURATION. from the Configuration menu.Redeploying a stopped Application Server 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. 2 Expand the Application Servers node. 4 On the Redeploy Application Server dialog. enter the following ■ Base port: enter a new base port. JOB. see “Application Server types” on page 96. 4 On the Stop Application Server dialog. from the Configuration menu. 3 Right-click the Application Server and select Redeploy. the offset for the authentication port is 40 by default. or ALL (a combination of all three types). 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. For example. select the method for handling any running jobs: ■ ■ ■ Stop immediately without waiting for running jobs to finish. If the base_port is 9500. 110 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . select Infrastructure Management. Stop when all running jobs finish OR after specified number of minutes. select Infrastructure Management. For information on each type. NOTE This action is only available for stopped Application Servers. 2 Expand the Application Servers node. 5 Click OK. 3 Right-click the Application Server and select Stop. whichever comes first. Stop when all running jobs finish. the authentication port would be 9540. NSH_PROXY.

select Infrastructure Management. 2 Expand the Application Servers node. Use this operation to have configuration changes take effect. 5 Click OK to validate the information you entered and execute the action on the Application Server launcher. You cannot enter a new Application Server name. NOTE You cannot use the terminate operation on an Application Server to which BMC BladeLogic Console is connected. NOTE You cannot use the restart operation on an Application Server to which BMC BladeLogic Console is connected. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 111 . when the Application Server is hung. for example. Terminating a specific Application Server The terminate operation terminates the Application Server process immediately. This selection is useful in cases where Stop does not work. those options are ignored. Restarting a specific Application Server The Restart operation first stops the Application Server and then starts it again. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. 3 Right-click the Application Server and select Terminate. This option automatically migrates any customizations from the existing deployment to the new deployment. In the case where there are options in the customized deployment that do not exist in the new deployment type.Terminating a specific Application Server ■ Preserve Existing Data: Check this box if you want to preserve deployment data from the existing deployment. from the Configuration menu.

3 Right-click the Application Server and select Remove. In addition. this selection removes the Application Server from the BMC BladeLogic environment. and removes references to the Application Server from routing rules. select Infrastructure Management. 2 Expand the Application Servers node. from the Configuration menu. The Application Server is removed from the Application Server Launcher. This selection ensures that the Application Server can still be referenced from routing rules. If you create a new Application Server with the same name. In effect. deletes its database entry. the Application Server still appears under the Application Server Launchers node Removes the Application Server. 3 Right-click the Application Server and select Restart. it uses this deployment directory.Removing an Application Server 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. from the Configuration menu. such as when a system has been decommissioned or repurposed. Removes the Application Server but does not delete the database entry for the Application Server. 4 In the Remove Application Server dialog. 2 Expand the Application Servers node. select Infrastructure Management. Option Preserve deployment Description Removes the Application Server but leaves its deployment directory unchanged. Removes the Application Server and deletes its deployment directory. Delete deployment Preserve server registration Delete server registration 5 Click OK. specify options for handling the Application Server’s deployment directory and the database registration. Removing an Application Server The remove operation removes an Application Server from the Application Server Launcher so the Application Server does not automatically restart when the Application Server Launcher starts. This operation can be useful in situations where an Application Server is “missing” and no longer in use. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. 112 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

4 Under Available Roles. but have had their deployments preserved (using the Preserve deployment option). Then click the right arrow to move the role to the Selected Roles list. select one or more roles you want to have access to the Application Server Launcher. under Selected Roles. 2 On the Add Unmanaged Deployments dialog. Editing the list of roles with Application Server Launcher access At BMC BladeLogic installation time. you can add the deployment back into the system without having to restart the launcher. select one or more roles. The Application Server Launcher added the deployments you selected as managed Server Profiles. from the Configuration menu.Adding unmanaged deployments Adding unmanaged deployments If you have Application Servers which have been removed from the system. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 113 . Users with this role can use the Edit Application Server Launcher Roles dialog to grant or deny authorization to other roles. 3 Click OK. select one or more unmanaged deployments you want to add to the Application Server Launcher. select Infrastructure Management. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. 1 Right-click an Application Server Launcher node and select Add Unmanaged Deployments. 3 Right-click the Application Server Launcher and select Edit Role List. Then click the left arrow. enabling you to manage these deployments as you would any other deployment in the system. only the BLAdmins role is granted authorization to access to the Application Server Launcher. NOTE The option is displayed only if there are unmanaged deployments for this Application Server Launcher. To remove roles from the selected list. 2 Expand the Application Server Launchers node.

2 Run the application server configuration wizard and set the new password on the Database page of the wizard. click OK. use this procedure to update the password on the Application Server.Resetting database passwords for the Application Server 5 When you have finished editing the list. See “Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings” on page 39. 114 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 1 Execute the following command to set the passwords to a blank value. Resetting database passwords for the Application Server In the event that the database user password has been changed.conf_created_on'. update bluser set password = ''. delete from system_property where name = 'tpasswd. commit.

Chapter 4 4 Administering security This chapter describes the approaches to security that are possible with BMC BladeLogic. depending on which system components are communicating. the approaches to security vary. including a discussion of some fundamental security concepts (see “Fundamentals of BMC BladeLogic security” on page 117). Chapter 4 Administering security 115 . In BMC BladeLogic. The following graphic illustrates the various communication legs possible within a BMC BladeLogic system.

116 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .See “Security for different communication legs” on page 130 for a discussion of the security approaches that are possible with each leg and references to any implementation procedures required. This chapter includes links to specialized terms that are defined in the Chapter 9. “Security Glossary”. A discussion of network security requires many technical terms.

509 certificates. Network Shell. BMC BladeLogic employs a twostep process. For more information on single sign-on. he or she must authenticate with the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service (one of the services hosted by a BMC BladeLogic Application Server) prior to establishing a client/server session. On the other hand. or BLCLI) and middle tier applications (Application Server or Network Shell Proxy Server). see “Single sign-on” on page 121. Written into the session credential are service URLs. when a user starts the BMC BladeLogic Console. Often that entity is a user. which are the identities and addresses of the Application Services and Network Shell Proxy Services that can be accessed using the session credential. BMC BladeLogic client applications can cache SSO session credentials obtained from the Authentication Service. First. the user can then exit the console and start a BLCLI session without authenticating again. If the user’s session credential is cached and the credential has not expired. For example.Fundamentals of BMC BladeLogic security Fundamentals of BMC BladeLogic security To implement a secure data center automation system. but in some situations the entity is a service. For any entity that communicates directly with agents—including Network Shell clients that access agents without going through a Network Shell Proxy Server— authentication relies on the TLS protocol’s support for client authentication via clientside X. when an Application Server establishes an authenticated connection with an agent. a user can launch the BMC BladeLogic Console and authenticate. BMC BladeLogic uses different approaches for authentication. Then the client uses that session credential to establish an application session with middle tier services. For communication between most client tier applications (the BMC BladeLogic Console. client users authenticate with the Authentication Service and acquire a BMC BladeLogic single sign-on (SSO) session credential. Chapter 4 Administering security 117 . the identity to be verified is the server hosting the Application Service. In this way a user’s context can easily be passed between BMC BladeLogic client applications. BMC BladeLogic offers the following capabilities: ■ ■ ■ ■ Authentication Session layer security Impersonation and privilege mapping Authorization Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying the identity claimed by a system entity. allowing client users to re-establish new application sessions without re-authenticating. For example. depending on the communication leg.

Application. For the sake of simplicity. which includes the following capabilities: ■ RSA key negotiation 128-bit AES block encryption algorithm CBC (Cipher Block Chaining) block cipher mode SHA1 HMAC construction for integrity protection. this document refers to that state as Network Shell operating in proxy mode. middle tier entities are provisioned with self-signed X. If the user chooses not to trust the self-signed certificate. If the user chooses to trust the self-signed certificate. Communication with middle tier When a BMC BladeLogic client establishes a TLS connection with a middle tier entity (that is. the client must validate a certificate from that entity. the certificate is added to the client’s list of trusted certificates and a secure session is established for the client. see “Securing communication with CA certificates” on page 224. the client establishes a TLS connection with the Application Server hosting the Authentication Service. SSL. this document refers only to TLS. The client cannot recognize the certificate as trusted so the client prompts the user to accept or reject the self-signed certificate. BMC BladeLogic system components employ TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA for the TLS cipher suite. as well as its SHA1 and SHA256 fingerprints. For more information. When Network Shell connects to a Network Shell Proxy Server. the Authentication Service) to authenticate and obtain an SSO credential. the Authentication.509 certificates. you can provision middle tier entities with certificates issued by a CA. At installation. In all contexts (excluding BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation).Session layer security NOTE Be aware of the following documentation conventions: ■ BMC BladeLogic supports both TLS and its predecessor. The client application displays the certificate’s content. 118 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . or Network Shell Proxy Services). ■ Session layer security BMC BladeLogic uses TLS for session layer security across all communications legs.) When a client first accesses a middle tier entity (by necessity. In the course of the TLS handshake. the session is terminated.509 certificate. the client is presented with the Application Server’s self-signed X. (Optionally. ■ ■ ■ The BMC BladeLogic Application Server and all client applications use FIPS 140-2 certified modules for cryptographic operations on all transported data.

Network Shell Proxy Server. settings in the exports. (For details on this process. the user is no longer prompted to trust that certificate when establishing future sessions with any of these other related entities. If your installation employs multiple Application Servers or stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Servers. By default.local configuration files can specify the local user context under which the client’s commands should execute.Impersonation and privilege mapping All client services running on a BMC BladeLogic Application Server (Authentication Service. By default. it is read every time an Application Server. see “How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents” on page 237. they too share the same certificate. However. or Network Shell client—contacts an RSCD agent on a remote server. Chapter 4 Administering security 119 .pem in the directory where the agent is installed. the agent temporarily acquires the privileges that the managed server’s operating system grants to this local user. and Network Shell Proxy Service) share the same certificate. Communication with server tier Self-signed certificates are used to secure communication between entities that communicate directly with agents. These entities could be Application Servers. or Network Shell client establishes a connection with the agent. you must provision agents with the SHA1 fingerprints of trusted clients’ self-signed certificates. Impersonation and privilege mapping Impersonation (on UNIX) and privilege mapping (on Windows) allow a user to assume an effective user identity and a set of user permissions on remote servers. and users. repeater. Application Service. user. Self-signed server-side certificates are used to secure the exchange of TLS session keys between agents and entities that communicate with agents. Once a client application has added the Authentication Service’s certificate to its list of trusted certificates. A client’s list of trusted certificates are stored in a file written in the Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. BMC BladeLogic does not use client-side certificates. In this way BMC BladeLogic takes advantage of the access control mechanisms provided by the remote server’s operating system. but you can modify that location. Network Shell Proxy Servers. the agent creates one. To accomplish this. If this file is present. If this file is not present. BMC BladeLogic generates self-signed certificates when an agent is installed on a server. you can choose to use self-signed client-side certificates for TLS sessions with RSCD agents. This file is known as a keystore. When a client—that is an Application Server.509 certificate is added to or removed from the trusted certificate store. The keystore resides in a default location. or Network Shell clients. repeaters. Client applications re-write the keystore file when a trusted X. Network Shell Proxy Server. The certificate is stored in a file called certificate. as described in “Setting override locations for client SSO files” on page 150.) If entries in the configuration files map the client user to a local user.

Or. user.) For example. If there is no user mapping defined in the exports. which allows the agent to temporarily grant the local user’s group privileges to an unprivileged user account called BladeLogicRSCD. the user will take on the privileges and permissions of the user “joe” on the target server. or ps on certain directories within a group of servers. “Setting up configuration files. if a user authenticates as “joe” and then begins to use Network Shell. Every system object that you manage with the BMC BladeLogic Console has ACLs defined for it. the user is assigned that user’s permissions in the same manner as if there was explicit mapping—that is. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. and those ACLs can grant a range of authorizations to users. On Windows systems the agent performs user privilege mapping. You can also define authorizations for Network Shell users if they are configured to communicate through a Network Shell Proxy Server. users are mapped to an underprivileged account (nobody on UNIX or Anonymous on Windows). or users. BMC BladeLogic supports authorization via a role-based access control (RBAC) model and a set of very granular access control lists (ACLs). the agent fully impersonates a user through a call to the setuid command. on UNIX systems the agent fully impersonates the user through setuid. joe does not exist on the target server as a user). grep. This privilege mapping mechanism allows the agent to acquire the mapped local user’s group privileges without having to access that user’s Windows credentials (user name and password).Authorization If the managed server is a UNIX-style system. If the managed server is a Windows machine. For more on impersonation and privilege mapping. For more on RBAC and authorization in BMC BladeLogic. 120 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . but that same junior administrator cannot make any changes on those servers. see Chapter 5.” Authorization Authorization refers to the process of giving someone access to resources or permissions to perform certain actions. BMC BladeLogic uses a technique called user privilege mapping. If user equivalency is not possible (that is. a Network Shell user with a junior admin role can be permitted to perform read-only Network Shell commands such as ls. (Network Shell users communicating directly with agents do not assume any particular role. For example. the system attempts to match the user ID of the incoming user to a user ID defined on the managed server where the RSCD agent is installed. If there is a match.local configuration files. the BMC BladeLogic Console can allow users with an expert role to create component templates and other users with a junior admin role to check for compliance with these templates.

The session credential cache file can only hold one session credential. client users authenticate with a BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service (one of the services hosted by a BMC BladeLogic Application Server) and acquire an SSO session credential. the command line applications require access to a session credential that was acquired previously. If a client application's credential cache contains an unexpired session credential. Once the TLS session is established. Users can authenticate with blcred and acquire session credential for the command line applications. The BMC BladeLogic Console has user authentication utilities built into it. The two client command line applications (BLCLI and Network Shell) do not. The reports server uses these credentials to authenticate to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. First. the client presents its SSO session credential to the service. To connect to a middle tier server. BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation is a web-based application that uses BMC BladeLogic single sign-on functionality in a different manner than other BMC BladeLogic applications. which validates the credential and uses it to establish the identity of the client user. All BMC BladeLogic client applications except BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation can share the same session credential. BMC BladeLogic Console users can choose whether to cache newly acquired session credentials in a cache file. Then. the client application establishes a TLS session with a middle tier service—either an Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service. BMC BladeLogic provides a command linebased user authentication utility called blcred. having acquired a credential. This constraint will be relaxed in a future release. A reports user logs in by providing the user credentials required for his or her authentication type.Single sign-on Single sign-on BMC BladeLogic employs a two-stage procedure for authenticating client application users to their respective middle-tier servers. SSO session credentials have a finite lifetime and can be cached in the file system of the client host. that credential can be used to establish a new client/server session without requiring the user to re-authenticate. Readers familiar with HTTP cookies may view SSO session credentials as analogous to cookies used to communicate an authenticated identity to a BMC BladeLogic service. Single sign-on functionality supports the following authentication mechanisms: SRP LDAP RSA SecurID PKI Active Directory/Kerberos Domain Authentication Chapter 4 Administering security 121 .

tree-like structure. the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service authenticates client-tier users against a registry of authorized users. the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service connects to an LDAP server to authenticate the user. At that point a BMC BladeLogic client application can use the session credential to establish an authenticated secure session with the Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service identified by the service URLs in the session credential. This type of protocol allows a client-tier user to prove to an Authentication Service that he or she has knowledge of a password without ever revealing that password to the middle-tier service. After successfully authenticating the SRP user.SRP SRP The secure remote password (SRP) protocol is a non-disclosing authentication protocol (also characterized as a zero-knowledge protocol). In BMC BladeLogic. allowing password-based mutual authentication of a client and server. users can set up a list of multiple LDAP servers that provide the same directories of user information. For SRP. Client-tier users are correlated to identities maintained in directories on external LDAP servers. Non-disclosing authentication protocols protect against man-in-the-middle attacks. The Authentication Service authenticates users by contacting the first available LDAP server in the list. Information in the user table is derived from the RBAC utility in the BMC BladeLogic Console. the Authentication Service issues the client a session credential. 122 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . If the LDAP server successfully authenticates the user. a protocol for querying and modifying directory entries that are arranged in a hierarchical. the Authentication Service issues the client a session credential. At that point a BMC BladeLogic client application can use the session credential to establish a secure authenticated session with the Application Service or a Network Shell Proxy Service identified by the service URLs in the session credential. When a BMC BladeLogic client-tier user logs in and provides an LDAP “distinguished name” and password. To take advantage of automatic failover. that registry is a user table in the central Application Server’s database. LDAP BMC BladeLogic authentication can be based on Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).

a BMC BladeLogic client can access the appropriate certificate and private key on the smart card to authenticate the user.RSA SecurID RSA SecurID BMC BladeLogic authentication can incorporate RSA’s Authentication Manager to utilize its two factor authentication mechanism. The current status of a certificate can be verified by contacting an OCSP Responder. When an Active Directory domain user chooses to authenticate using AD/Kerberos. At that point a BMC BladeLogic client application can use the session credential to establish a secure authenticated session with the Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service identified by the service URLs in the session credential. If the information the user enters is valid and the OCSP Responder verifies the validity of the user’s certificate. Client-tier users in BMC BladeLogic are correlated to identities maintained within RSA’s Authentication Manager rather than the central Application Server’s RBAC-based database. AD/Kerberos authentication correlates client-tier users to identities maintained within an Active Directory domain controller rather than the central Application Server’s RBAC-based database. Active Directory/Kerberos Active Directory/Kerberos (AD/Kerberos) authentication integrates BMC BladeLogic with a key distribution center (KDC) to utilize the Kerberos v5 protocol for authenticating client-tier users. At that point a BMC BladeLogic client application can use the session credential to establish a secure authenticated session with the Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service identified by the service URLs in the session credential. Kerberos mediates an authentication exchange between the client (the BMC BladeLogic Console or the blcred utility) and the domain controller as well as between the client and the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. Through middleware. If authentication is successful. the Authentication Service issues the client a session credential. the user must insert a smart card into a card reader and enter a PIN. which is obtained from an RSA SecurID token. After successfully Chapter 4 Administering security 123 . SecurID users authenticate by providing a user name and a passcode. the Authentication Service issues the client a session credential. The passcode consists of a PIN and the current token code. PKI BMC BladeLogic authentication can be based public key infrastructure (PKI) for users who present a type of smart card known as a common access card (CAC). While logging into a BMC BladeLogic client.

domain. A user logging into the BMC BladeLogic Application Server can authenticate with a different user name than the user name used to log into the Windows system hosting the BMC BladeLogic client application. Domain Authentication The Domain Authentication solution integrates BMC BladeLogic with Active Directory without requiring users to obtain a Kerberos ticket—that is. and password (see Domain Authentication). In Domain Authentication. which are collections of information that a BMC BladeLogic client application needs to log into the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. Domain Authentication provides greater flexibility than AD/Kerberos. BMC BladeLogic clients (the BMC BladeLogic Console or the blcred utility) accept a user’s name. and password.COM and then log into BMC BladeLogic as Administrator@DOMAIN. For example. Authentication profiles To facilitate single sign-on. This information is passed to the Authentication Service. a BMC BladeLogic client application can use that session credential to establish an authenticated secure session with the Application Server or a Network Shell Proxy Service identified by the service URLs in the session credential. BMC BladeLogic clients use authentication profiles. a user can log into Windows as Sally@DOMAIN. domain. which delegates user authentication to the Active Directory domain controller. If the domain controller successfully authenticates the user. a Windows user credential. it can authenticate AD/Kerberos users who provide a user name. The BMC BladeLogic client application can then use the session credential to establish an authenticated secure session with the Application Server or a Network Shell Proxy Service identified by the service URLs in the session credential. Although BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation does not support AD/Kerberos authentication.COM. the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service issues the BMC BladeLogic client an SSO session credential.Domain Authentication authenticating the domain user. An authentication profile identifies the following: 124 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the Authentication Service issues the client a session credential. At that point. AD/Kerberos takes advantage of the Windows single-sign on functionality. A user logging into the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service authenticates with the same user credential he or she acquires when the logging into the Windows domain.

SecurID. and one for Development. For example. each pointing to a different instance of BMC BladeLogic. such as the distinguished name template for LDAP. users simply specify an authentication type. If a user wants to connect to all three from the same client application. Using authentication profiles When a user launches a BMC BladeLogic client application (except BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation). In Network Shell or BLCLI. PKI. he or she would need three different authentication profiles. AD/Kerberos. and an authentication mechanism. or Domain Authentication Information specific to individual authentication protocols. the BMC BladeLogic Console prompts the user to log into the Authentication Service identified by the specified authentication profile. Instead. if a user plans to log into the Application Server using various authentication mechanisms. so a user does not have to specify an Application Server or listening port. one for QA. For BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation. when logging on. the port used to access the Authentication Service. Each authentication profile specifies an Application Server hosting an Authentication Service. Each reports server always accesses the same Authentication Service. If the client application does not possess an appropriate session credential. ■ ■ ■ A user can define multiple authentication profiles.Authentication profiles ■ Application Server host name Listening port for the Authentication Service hosted by the Application Server Authentication protocol: SRP. LDAP. the client application establishes a connection to the service listed in the session credential. an organization might employ three instances of BMC BladeLogic—one for Operations. he or she would need an authentication profile for each mechanism. The BLCLI or Network Shell user can use the BMC BladeLogic Console or the blcred utility to obtain and cache the appropriate SSO session credential. users do not define authentication profiles. Chapter 4 Administering security 125 . he or she must specify an authentication profile. establishment of the client/server session is aborted if the session credential cache does not contain a session credential matching the requirements specified in the authentication profile. In another example. If a cached session credential includes information matching these specifications. The client application looks in its cache of session credentials to determine if it holds a current credential that was acquired under the conditions defined by the authentication profile.

The BMC BladeLogic command line applications provide various options for identifying an authentication profile by name. A session credential contains the following information: ■ BMC BladeLogic user name 126 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Note that BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation does not require authentication profiles so it is not listed in the table below. Within that file each authentication profile must have a unique name. The blcred utility also can be used to add or delete authentication profiles.Single sign-on session credentials The BMC BladeLogic Console provides a dialog that allows users to add or delete authentication profiles as well as select an authentication profile for the purpose of logging in. see “Environment variables” on page 129. it issues a session credential to the client application. Single sign-on session credentials When an Authentication Service authenticates a user. The XML file resides at a default location. BMC BladeLogic clients use session credentials to establish secure sessions with Application Servers and Network Shell Proxy Servers. The following table summarizes these options. as described in “Setting override locations for client SSO files” on page 150. but you can modify that location. For more information on using environment variables. The BMC BladeLogic Console lets users choose to cache session credentials. The blcred utility always caches any session credential it obtains from the Authentication Service. see “Using the blcred utility” on page 226. Mechanisms to Identify Authentication Profile environment variable: BL_AUTH_PROFILE_NAME secure file setting: auth_profile BLCLI command line option: -v authenticationProfileName environment variable: BL_AUTH_PROFILE_NAME Takes precedence over environment variable Application Network Shell (in proxy mode) Precedence Takes precedence over secure file setting BMC BladeLogic Console login dialog For more information on setting up authentication profiles for the BMC BladeLogic Console. For more information on using blcred. Authentication profiles are stored in a single XML file. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.

and its port. File system access controls only allow the user for whom the credential was issued to access the credential cache Unlike other BMC BladeLogic system components. verifies the digital signature to ensure the credential’s authenticity and integrity. BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation can automatically renew the user’s session credential without requiring the user to re-authenticate. Each of these URLs specifies the type of service. or Domain Authentication Service URL. AD/Kerberos. The reports server can potentially hold the user’s session credential even after the user’s connection with the reports server terminates. Chapter 4 Administering security 127 . SecurID. The reports server relays this information to the Authentication Service and obtains a session credential for the user. This restriction will be relaxed in a future release. On both Windows and UNIX. BMC BladeLogic relies on system access controls to restrict access to the session credential cache. the reports server does not cache the session credential on the client’s system. LDAP. which identifies the Authentication Service that issued the session credential. Each time a user logs into the reports server from a browser.Single sign-on session credentials ■ Protocol used to authenticate user: SRP. and its port. This allows users to schedule recurring report jobs. but you can modify that location. its host address. its host address. The session credential cache file resides at a default location. Expiration time for session credential Maximum lifetime for session credential Client system’s IP address Authorized roles for user Service URLs of BMC BladeLogic services that the credential can be used to access. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Session credentials are digitally signed by the issuing Authentication Service. A BMC BladeLogic service. upon being presented with a session credential. the credential cache can hold a maximum of one session credential at any time. such as Application Services and Network Shell Proxy Services. the user provides data required for authentication. SSO session credentials are cached in a file on the client host. as described in “Setting override locations for client SSO files” on page 150.

access to keytab files should be tightly controlled. Network Shell also provides a command called chrole. When using Network Shell or BLCLI. the role may be specified through an environment variable. Because of their sensitive nature. a user must be assigned to an RBAC role. The SRP keytab file is called user_info. Procedures for the AD/Kerberos implementation explain the use of a keytab file in that context. RBAC role selection When a session is established. When a user is authorized for multiple roles. see “Generating a user information file” on page 230. the user can interactively select a role while logging into a BMC BladeLogic client application. if multiple roles are defined interactive prompts from command line dialog command line option: -r roleName environment variable: BL_RBAC_ROLE Network Shell (in proxy mode) interactive prompts from command line dialog environment variable: BL_RBAC_ROLE Takes precedence over environment variable 128 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . BMC BladeLogic command line applications can specify a role using a command line option or an environment variable. Application BMC BladeLogic Console BLCLI Mechanisms to Specify a Role Precedence GUI dialog. he or she is assigned to that role after logging into an application. In this release. If a user is authorized for only one role.dat. BMC BladeLogic only supports a keytab file for SRP authentication. The following table summarizes the options available to specifying a role.dat. Keytab files provide the blcred utility with long-term user credentials that can be used to authenticate a user. keytab files are useful when running unattended automation scripts that make use of Network Shell proxy services or make calls to the BLCLI. For instructions on setting up user_info. Note that BMC BladeLogic also employs a keytab file for its AD/Kerberos implementation. for single sign-on.Keytab files Keytab files If you are using SRP authentication. If a user is authorized for multiple roles. which lets you change roles after a Network Shell session is established.

Environment variables Environment variables BMC BladeLogic provides environment variables that can be used to pass configuration data to the command line client applications (BLCLI and Network Shell) and the blcred utility. Environment Variable BL_SSO_TRUSTED_CERT_ KEYSTORE_FILE BL_RBAC_ROLE Description Specifies location of file storing trusted certificates Specifies RBAC role For More Information: “Trusted keystore” on page 151 “RBAC role selection” on page 128 BL_SSO_CRED_CACHE_FILE Specifies location of session “Session credential cache file” credential cache file on page 151 BL_AUTH_PROFILES_FILE Provides location of file containing authentication profile definitions Identifies authentication profile to use when authenticating “Authentication profile file” on page 151 “Using authentication profiles” on page 125 BL_AUTH_PROFILE_NAME Chapter 4 Administering security 129 . To set an environment variable. The command line options take precedence over environment variable settings. use a procedure like the following: % BL_SSO_CRED_CACHE_FILE=userHomeDirectory\bladelogic_alt\bl_sesscc % export BL_SSO_CRED_CACHE_FILE The following table details the environment variables that can be used with single sign-on functionality. BLCLI and blcred also provide command line options for providing the same data.

For implementation details. BMC BladeLogic relies on TLS to secure communication between client and server and single sign-on credentials to authenticate client users. authentication can be configured differently for the various communication legs. Implementation A default BMC BladeLogic installation sets up a single sign-on system using SRP authentication and TLS session layer security. The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service supports many authentication mechanisms. Client users obtain single sign-on credentials by authenticating themselves to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. privilege mapping. BLCLI to Application Server For traffic between BLCLI and an Application Server. The following sections describe security for the following communication legs in BMC BladeLogic: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ BMC BladeLogic Console to Application Server BLCLI to Application Server Network Shell to Network Shell Proxy Server Reports client to reports server Application Server to agent or repeater Network Shell to agent Repeater to agent BMC BladeLogic Console to Application Server For traffic between the BMC BladeLogic Console and an Application Server. 130 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . see “Implementing single sign-on” on page 135.Security for different communication legs Security for different communication legs Although some aspects of security—session layer security. BMC BladeLogic relies on TLS to secure communication between client and server and single sign-on credentials to authenticate client users. Additional configuration is necessary if you want to customize the default behavior or use other authentication protocols. and authorization—are consistent throughout BMC BladeLogic. SRP is the default user authentication mechanism.

Alternatively. to authenticate themselves to an Authentication Service and acquire a SSO session credential. ■ Network Shell to Network Shell Proxy Server For traffic between a Network Shell client and a Network Shell Proxy Server. Additional configuration is necessary if you want to customize the default behavior or use other authentication protocols.Network Shell to Network Shell Proxy Server BLCLI users obtain single sign-on credentials by authenticating themselves to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. or customize SSO behavior. implement any authentication mechanism other than SRP. For implementation details. BLCLI users can use a separate user authentication command line utility. to authenticate themselves to an Authentication Service and acquire a SSO session credential. The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service supports many user authentication mechanisms. blcred. For implementation details. BMC BladeLogic relies on TLS to secure communication between client and server and single sign-on credentials to authenticate client users. Additional configuration is necessary to set up a Network Shell Proxy Service. SRP is the default user authentication mechanism. Alternatively. SRP is the default user authentication mechanism. see “Implementing single sign-on” on page 135. Users can acquire and cache a SSO session credential through the BMC BladeLogic Console and the BLCLI can use that credential. Implementation ■ A default BMC BladeLogic installation sets up a single sign-on system using SRP authentication and TLS session layer security. blcred. Network Shell users obtain single sign-on credentials by authenticating themselves to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. Network Shell does not have a built-in authentication utility. Users can acquire and cache a SSO session credential through the BMC BladeLogic Console. see “Implementing single sign-on” on page 135. The BLCLI does not have a built-in authentication utility. see “Using the blcred utility” on page 226. Network Shell can use that credential. Network Shell users can use a separate user authentication command line utility. The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service supports many user authentication mechanisms. For information on using the blcred utility to obtain session credentials. Implementation ■ A default BMC BladeLogic installation sets up a single sign-on system using SRP authentication and TLS session layer security. Chapter 4 Administering security 131 .

For traffic between the reports client and the reports server. you can use a tool such as OpenSSL. Server-side certificates are used during the TLS handshake to establish session keys for encrypting traffic between the web browser and the reports server. Organizations that want Kerberos-based authentication for BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation can use the Domain Authentication protocol. The reports server accesses the BMC SARA Authentication Service to authenticate a user and acquire SSO credentials in the name of the authenticated user. but you can replace it with a custom certificate. BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation data is packaged using Cognos Reports. they are granted session credentials. Users authenticate themselves to the reports server over the HTTPS session. Once a user on the reports client is authenticated. Reports client to reports server A BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation client is a web browser that connects to the reports server. Server-side certificates The TLS communication protocol automatically negotiates an encryption algorithm to secure data. see “Using the blcred utility” on page 226. the reports server obtains data for reports from the reports data warehouse.Reports client to reports server ■ For information on using the blcred utility to obtain session credentials. By default 132 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Implementation A default installation of BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation sets up a BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service called BMC SARA Authentication. After users are authenticated. and password. Authentication For BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation. domain. BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation supports all BMC BladeLogic authentication protocols except AD/Kerberos. By default the reports server uses a self-signed certificate. user authentication functions much like authentication for other BMC BladeLogic applications. which can authenticate AD/Kerberos users when they provide their user name. BMC BladeLogic relies on the HTTPS protocol (HTTP over TLS) to secure communication between the browser and reports server. To generate a new certificate.

■ No authentication—By default. see “Exports file” on page 240. BMC BladeLogic relies on TLS to secure communication and the following options for authenticating the Network Shell client to the agent: Chapter 4 Administering security 133 . Implementation A default installation of BMC BladeLogic provides no authentication for this communication leg. For all implementation details. For more information. use these procedures as well. see “TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server” on page 202 or “TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIXbased Application Server” on page 206. modify the exports file on each agent or repeater. To accomplish this. Implementation For implementation details. Application Server to agent or repeater For traffic between an Application Server and an agent or repeater. no authentication occurs. ■ IP address—Limits incoming traffic for an agent or repeater to IP addresses of specific Application Servers.Application Server to agent or repeater only SRP authentication is enabled on the BMC SARA Authentication Service. Additional configuration is necessary if you want to use an Authentication Server that is not located on the same machine as the reports server. Network Shell to agent For traffic between a Network Shell client and an agent. agents and repeaters are provisioned with the SHA1 fingerprints of the Application Servers’ self-signed certificates. see the BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation User Guide. Implementation To implement this approach. The procedure is identical. BMC BladeLogic relies on TLS to secure communication and the following options for authenticating the Application Server host to the repeater or agent: ■ Self-signed certificates—Enables agents or repeaters to authenticate Application Servers. when an Application Server connects to an agent or repeater. If you want to set up self-signed certificates for a Network Shell Proxy Server.

) Implementation To implement this approach. To accomplish this. no authentication occurs other than the authentication provided by the underlying operating system of the host where Network Shell is running when a Network Shell user logs in. this configuration relies on the host operating system of the Network Shell client to authenticate a user. Implementation A default installation of BMC BladeLogic provides no authentication. agents are provisioned with SHA1 fingerprints of repeaters’ selfsigned certificates. (If necessary. ■ IP address—Limits an agent’s incoming traffic to IP addresses of specific Network Shell clients. To accomplish this. ■ No authentication—By default. Application Servers can also be specified in the same way. For more information. 134 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . agents are provisioned with SHA1 fingerprints of Network Shell clients’ self-signed certificates. client-side certs—Enables agents to authenticate repeaters.Repeater to agent ■ Self-signed. Implementation For implementation details. client-side certs—Enables agents to authenticate Network Shell clients. see “Exports file” on page 240. Instead. see “TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client” on page 212. Repeater to agent For traffic between a repeater and an agent. when a Network Shell client connects to an agent. BMC BladeLogic relies on TLS to secure communication and the following options for authenticating the repeater host to the agent: ■ Self signed. modify the exports file on each agent. Implementation For implementation details. see “Implementing Security – Repeater to agent” on page 217.

All communication with the Application Service occurs over TLS. Chapter 4 Administering security 135 ■ ■ . SRP authentication is supported by default for all BMC BladeLogic applications. Implementation A default installation of BMC BladeLogic provides no authentication for this communication leg. A standard installation of the Application Server sets up the Application Service. All communication with the Network Shell Proxy Service occurs over TLS. A client application (the BMC BladeLogic Console or the BLCLI) presents the session credential to the Application Service to establish a secure session with one of the targeted services listed within the session credential. A standard installation of the Application Server includes an Authentication Service. Application Servers and specific clients can be specified in the same way.) Implementation To implement this approach. The Authentication Service processes all user authentication requests—that is. A Network Shell client presents the session credential to the Network Shell Proxy Service to establish a secure session with the Network Shell Proxy Server. all requests from the BMC BladeLogic Console or the blcred utility. Network Shell Proxy Service—Used for accessing the functionality of a Network Shell Proxy Server. ■ No authentication—By default.Implementing single sign-on ■ IP address—Limits an agent’s incoming traffic to IP addresses of specific repeaters. A standard installation of BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation sets up a stand-alone Authentication Server for reports users. when a repeater connects to an agent. the client application is issued a session credential. modify the exports file on each agent. After a client user authenticates. Application Service—Used for accessing the functionality of the BMC BladeLogic Application Server. Implementing single sign-on To implement the BMC BladeLogic single sign-on system. Some configuration is necessary to set up a Network Shell Proxy Service. no authentication occurs. For more information. (If necessary. see “Exports file” on page 240. All communication with the Authentication Service occurs over TLS. you need the following services: ■ Authentication Service—Used for authenticating user identities and issuing session credentials to authenticated users. After a client user authenticates. the client application is issued a session credential.

OCSP verification is only enabled by default for PKI authentication. see “Configuring the Application Service” on page 140. A default installation of a BMC BladeLogic Application Server sets up an Authentication Service to support single sign-on for BMC BladeLogic client applications. you can instruct a client application to use different files. 1 If you want to modify the default behavior of an Authentication Service. 5 If you want to set up OCSP verification of certificates. 2 If you want to modify the default behavior of the Application Service. see “Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service” on page 142. If necessary. 6 If you want the SSO system to support any authentication protocol other than SRP. Each of the steps in this procedure references a section that describes another procedure. A default installation of a BMC BladeLogic Application Server sets up an Application Service to support single sign-on. 4 If you want to modify the location of any SSO files used by any BMC BladeLogic client application. You can optionally use OCSP verification for Application Servers provisioned with custom certificates. 3 If you want to use a Network Shell Proxy Server. see any of the following: Implementing LDAP authentication Implementing RSA SecurID authentication Implementing PKI authentication Implementing Active Directory/Kerberos authentication Implementing Domain Authentication 136 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The files used by the SSO system reside at default locations. see “Configuring the Authentication Service” on page 137.Implementing single sign-on Use the following master procedure to implement the single sign-on system. see “Setting up certificate verification using OCSP” on page 153. see “Setting override locations for client SSO files” on page 150. Currently.

■ To enable or disable SecurID authentication. There are various options for modifying the standard behavior of an Authentication Service. this value is set to false. By default. ■ To enable or disable LDAP authentication. the session credential lifetime is 600 minutes (10 hours). enter the following: set AuthServer IsLdapAuthEnabled true|false By default. 2 To specify a listening port other than 9840 for the Authentication Service. enter the following: set AuthServer IsSRPAuthEnabled true|false By default this value is set to true. of issued session credentials. Additional configuration is necessary to support other authentication protocols. in minutes. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console (that is. enter the following: set AuthServer SessionCredentialLifetime # where # is the lifetime. Use the following procedure to set any of those options. 4 To specify the types of authentication mechanisms that are enabled. The Authentication Service runs on the same machine as the Application Server. the blasadmin utility). 3 To specify the duration of session credentials that the Authentication Service issues. do any of the following: ■ To enable or disable SRP authentication. enter the following: set AuthServer IsSecurIdAuthEnabled true|false Chapter 4 Administering security 137 . enter the following: set AuthServer AuthSvcPort # where # is the number of the port. Setting AuthSvcPort to 0 turns off the Authentication Service.Configuring the Authentication Service Configuring the Authentication Service A default installation of a BMC BladeLogic Application Server sets up an Authentication Service to support single sign-on and SRP authentication. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.

enter the following: set AuthServer AppServiceURLs " " Note the blank space between the quotation marks.serviceURL where serviceURL. enter the following: set AuthServer IsADKAuthEnabled true|false By default. BLCLI commands used for import or export must run on an Application Server with its type set to CONFIGURATION or ALL.. this value is set to false. do any of the following: ■ To override the default Application Service URL. you can direct these commands to run on a particular Application Server..bladelogic. bladelogic:blsess://host2. ■ To enable or disable AD/Kerberos authentication.. If that Application Server is a JOB type Application Server. 5 To write non-default destination service URLs into a session credential. ■ To enable or disable Domain Authentication.. However. For example: set AuthServer AppServiceURLs service:appsvc.service:appsvc. By default BLCLI commands run on the Application Server processing the job..Configuring the Authentication Service By default.. enter the following: set PkiAuth IsEnabled true|false By default. 138 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . enter the following: set AuthServer IsDomainAuthEnabled true|false By default. enter the following: set AuthServer AppServiceURLs serviceURL. it cannot process BLCLI commands used for import/export.bladelogic: blsess://host1. this value is set to false. if you want to run Network Shell Script Jobs that include BLCLI commands.bladelogic. ■ To configure the Authentication Service so it does not write any Application Service service URLs into the session credential it issues.serviceURL is a list of alternative Application Service’s service URLs.. you do not need to change the default Application Server URL.com:9841 Typically.com:9841. this value is set to false. ■ To enable or disable PKI authentication.. this value is set to false.

you must identify the URL for the stand-alone server’s Network Shell Proxy Service service URL. For more information on setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. enter the following: set AuthServer AppServiceURLs "" Note that there is no blank space between the quotation marks. ■ To configure the Authentication Service so it does not write any Network Shell Proxy Service service URLs into the session credential it issues.com:9842 If you are setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server.Configuring the Authentication Service ■ To configure the Authentication Service so it reverts to its default behavior of writing the service URL of the local Application Service into session credentials.com:9842.bladelogic: blsess://host1. enter the following: set AuthServer ProxyServiceURLs serviceURL.service:proxysvc. set AuthServer ProxyServiceURLs service:proxysvc. enter the following: set AuthServer ProxyServiceURLs " " Note the blank space between the quotation marks. For example. bladelogic:blsess://host2. Chapter 4 Administering security 139 .serviceURL where serviceURL. see “Setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server” on page 145.bladelogic. then any Network Shell commands run by jobs on this Application Server are routed to the Network Shell Proxy Servers identified by ProxyServiceURLs. ■ To override the default Network Shell Proxy Service service URL. ■ To configure the Authentication Service so it reverts to its default behavior of writing the service URL of the local Network Shell Proxy Service into session credentials (assuming the local proxy service is enabled). NOTE If you provide a value for ProxyServiceURLs on an Application Server that is defined as type ALL.serviceURL is a list of alternative Network Shell Proxy Service’s service URLs.bladelogic. enter the following: set AuthServer ProxyServiceURLs "" Note that there is no blank space between the quotation marks.

enter the following: set AuthServer AuthSvcSocketTimeout # where # is the maximum number of minutes to wait for a response from a worker thread. By default the Authentication Service creates a session credential that only includes the service URL for the local Application Service. 7 To specify a time-out for responses from Authentication Service worker threads. Use the following procedure to set any of those options. enter the following: set AuthServer MaxAuthSvcThreads # where # is the maximum number of threads that can process requests from clients. 140 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . a client cannot use it to access an Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service. Overriding the defaults and specifying empty service URLs results in session credentials with no destination service URLs. the Authentication Service will. If the local Network Shell Proxy Service is enabled. Typically.Configuring the Application Service Providing service URLs lets you specify alternative addresses (in the form of service URLs) for an Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service. a firewall) that requires address translations. By default the maximum is 1. the connection times out. There are various options for modifying the standard behavior of an Application Service. no additional configuration is necessary. by default. Once the maximum is exceeded. Configuring the Application Service A default installation of BMC BladeLogic sets up an Application Service to support single sign-on. the maximum is 5. When a session credential has no destination service URL. This is particularly useful when your installation has a network configuration (for example. include its service URL in the session credential it issues. 8 Restart the Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111). By default. 6 To specify the maximum number of worker threads used for authentication.

3 To specify whether the client’s IP address included in a session credential should be compared to the IP address of the client that is presenting the credential. ■ false means the IP address of the client does not have to match the client’s IP address included in the session credential. By default. Set this value to false only if you are using a network load balancer for your Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers. 4 To specify whether the service URL of the Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service specified in a client’s service request should be compared to the actual service URL of that service. and a client can access any one of many Application Servers when establishing a session connection. this option is set to true.Configuring the Application Service 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. Chapter 4 Administering security 141 . Setting AppSvcPort to 0 turns off the Application Service. 2 To specify a listening port other than 9841 for the Application Service. enter the following: set appserver ValidateRequestURL true|false In the command shown above: ■ true means the service URL of the Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service handling the request must match the service URL to which the request was addressed. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. the client is denied access. By default. this option is set to true. enter the following: set appserver AppSvcPort # where # is the number of the port. ■ false means the receiving service’s URL does not have to match the service URL to which the request is addressed. you are not using a load balancer for the Authentication Service. If the IP addresses do not match. enter the following: set appserver ValidateClientIpAddress true|false In the command shown above: ■ true means the IP address of the client must match the client’s IP address included in the session credential.

Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service Use this procedure to set up a Network Shell Proxy Server that manages traffic from Network Shell clients. 142 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . See “Setting Up a Network Shell Proxy Server” on page 142. Setting up an Application Server that functions exclusively as a Network Shell Proxy Server. See “Setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server” on page 145. 5 Restart the Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111). Setting up an Application Server that serves as a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. ■ ■ This section also includes a description of how to set up Network Shell Proxy Services for Application Servers that process jobs (see “Setting up Network Shell Proxy Services for Windows user mapping” on page 149). and a client can access any one of many Application Servers when establishing a session connection.Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service Always set this value to false if you are using a network load balancer for your Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers. a Network Shell Proxy Server can accommodate all authentication protocols that BMC BladeLogic supports. A default installation of a BMC BladeLogic Application Server does not set up a Network Shell Proxy Server. Setting Up a Network Shell Proxy Server Use this procedure to configure an Application Server so that it either functions as an Application Server that also manages traffic from Network Shell clients or it only manages Network Shell traffic. A stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server cannot access the BMC BladeLogic database. When setting up a Network Shell Proxy Server. See “Setting Up a Network Shell Proxy Server” on page 142. If an Application Server experiences high traffic loads that include Network Shell activity. This procedure is only necessary if you want to use Windows user mapping to run jobs that act on Windows target servers. you have the following options: ■ Setting up an Application Server that performs many functions including that of Network Shell Proxy Server. Using this configuration. you may want to reduce overall traffic loads by setting up an Application Server that functions exclusively as a Network Shell Proxy Server. which means it only manages Network Shell traffic and performs no other Application Server functionality. It can relieve the overall workload by processing all Network Shell traffic.

Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service 1 Start the Network Shell Proxy Server using an application server profile with its Type set so it includes one of the following: ■ ALL—The Application Server performs many functions including Network Shell Proxy Server. If a value is not set for ProxySvcPort. However. modify the listening port for the Network Shell Proxy Server by entering the following: set appserver ProxySvcPort # where # is the number of the port on the Application Server that listens for Network Shell traffic. 3 If necessary. Increasing the maximum number of proxy threads can improve performance for Network Shell users. enter the following: set appserver MaxNshProxyThreads # where # is the maximum number of threads. 5 To adjust the performance of proxy threads processing Network Shell client connections. 4 To specify the maximum number of threads that are available to process Network Shell client connections. By default this value is set to 5. 2 Start the Application Server Administration console. ■ For more information on application server profiles. you do not have to set a value for ProxySvcPort. If this value is acceptable. To accomplish this. see “Configuring multiple Application Servers on the same host” on page 93. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. using an excessive number of threads can potentially degrade the performance of a Network Shell Proxy Server. NSH_PROXY—The Application Server functions exclusively as a Network Shell Proxy Server. By default the Network Shell Proxy Server listens for traffic on port equal to Base Port plus 42. enter the following: set appserver NshProxyMaxThreadIdleTime # where # can be any of the following: Chapter 4 Administering security 143 . Each proxy thread can accommodate multiple Network Shell client connections by switching between connections when there is no traffic on a particular connection. specify a maximum idle time for thread processing. the Application Server does not run a Network Shell proxy service.

8 To specify the timeout settings for NSH proxy socket reads. 144 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . By default this value is set to 7200 seconds. >0 – Provides a compromise between the two settings described above. While the thread is idle it continues to serve the current connection. enter the following: set appserver NshProxySocketConnectTimeout # where # is a value in seconds. When there is no traffic over the connection between a Network Shell client and its proxy for this period of time. enter the following: set appserver IdleNshProxyPruneTime # where # is a value in minutes. 6 To specify the maximum idle time for a connection with a Network Shell client. When the specified period expires. By default this value is set to 60 seconds. Each thread is dedicated to a single connection so the thread never switches connections. enter the following: set appserver NshProxySocketOperationTimeout # where # is a value in seconds. that a thread should remain idle. the connection is automatically closed. -1 – Provides the fastest performance for a particular connection. A value greater than zero specifies a period. This value specifies the number of seconds for NSH proxy socket reads before the socket times out. The longer you instruct a thread to be idle.Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service 0 – Provides the best thread switching performance. 7 To specify the timeout settings for obtaining a NSH proxy socket connection to the Application Server. A thread is always available to serve another connection after traffic ends on the current connection. 9 Restart the Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111). the thread can switch to another connection. By default this value is set to 0. in milliseconds. which means the connection is never closed. By default NshProxyMaxThreadIdleTime is set to 500 ms. the harder it is for that thread to process more than one connection. This value specifies the number of seconds for obtaining a NSH proxy socket connection to the Application Server.

On the Network Shell Proxy Server. NOTE You cannot use Windows user mapping to grant permissions to a user on a managed server when that user is running a Network Shell client to access a managed server through a standalone Network Shell Proxy Server. Setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server Use this procedure to configure a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. To perform this procedure.keystore file. a deployment of an Application Server is configured to function only as a Network Shell Proxy Server. blasadmin) to create a new deployment of type NSH_PROXY and configure it as a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. search for all instances of bladelogic. It cannot even access the BMC BladeLogic database. perform the following steps: A Start blasadmin for the _template deployment by entering the following: blasadmin -s _template Chapter 4 Administering security 145 . provide the same password for the Application Server’s certificate that you entered when installing the central Application Server.Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service 10 Set up a client for Network Shell users. 3 On the Network Shell Proxy Server. such as the _template and _launcher directories. A stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server can perform no other Application Server functionality. and you must perform some configuration on the central Application Server. When installing. See “Setting up a Network Shell Client to run in proxy mode” on page 147. 2 Copy the bladelogic. In this configuration. you can find bladelogic. use the Application Server Administration console (that is. On the central Application Server.keystore at installDirectory/br/deployments/_template/bladelogic. Using the copied bladelogic.keystore that may exist within installDirectory/br/deployments or any of its subdirectories.keystore. you must create a Network Shell Proxy Server deployment using the blasadmin utility. You must repeat this step for every Network Shell client that should communicate with the Network Shell Proxy Server. Do not run the Post-Install Configuration wizard. 11 Assign the NSH_PROXY.keystore file from the central Application Server. To accomplish this.Connect authorization to any role that should be used to connect to a Network Shell Proxy Server. 1 Install an Application Server on the machine where you want to create a standalone Network Shell Proxy Server. replace all occurrences of bladelogic.keystore on the Application Server where you are setting up a Network Shell Proxy Server.

you do not have to set a value for ProxySvcPort. the authentication port would be 9540. select the central Application Server. See “Starting Application Servers” on page 41. the Network Shell Proxy Server listens for traffic on a port equal to Base Port plus 42. enter the following: 146 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . base_port is a number that is combined with offset values to determine Authentication and Application Server port numbers.Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service B Create a new default deployment of a Network Shell Proxy Server by entering the following: create new_proxy base_port NSH_PROXY new_proxy is the name of the new Network Shell Proxy Server you are creating. If the base_port is 9500. right-click. For example. If a value is not set for ProxySvcPort. the offset for the authentication port is 40 by default. and select Edit. for ProxyServiceURLs. C Switch to the newly created deployment by entering the following: switch new_proxy D If necessary. configure the central Application Server by doing the following: A Select Configuration => Infrastructure Management. E Indicate that the Network Shell Proxy Server should not contact the BMC BladeLogic database by entering the following command: set appserver PwdStore file 4 Start the Application Server on the machine where you are setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. modify the listening port for the Network Shell Proxy Server by entering the following: set appserver ProxySvcPort # where # is the number of the port on the Application Server that listens for Network Shell traffic. the Application Server does not run a Network Shell Proxy Service. B Expand Application Servers. C On the Edit Application Server Profile. For new deployments of an Application Server. 5 Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. If this value is acceptable.

Additionally. You must repeat this step for every Network Shell client that communicates with the Network Shell Proxy Server.Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service service:proxysvc. 7 Set up a client for Network Shell users.bladelogic:blsess://NSH_proxy_server_host:proxy_svc_port In this entry NSH_proxy_server_host is the host where you have set up the Network Shell Proxy Server and proxy_svc_port is the port number you defined in step D above (under step 3). see the blcred man page. Authentication profiles are defined in the authentication profiles file. See “Setting up a Network Shell Client to run in proxy mode” on page 147. where authProfile is the name of the authentication profile that holds a description of the Authentication Service from which the required session credential should be issued and the authentication mechanism that was used to authenticate the user when the session credential was acquired. Primarily this procedure consists of some settings you must add to the secure file for a client installation.Connect authorization to any role that should be used to connect to a Network Shell Proxy Server. you must have the BMC BladeLogic Console installed. You can use the blcred utility to authenticate a user and acquire a new session credential. if you plan to run Network Shell and BLCLI scripts unattended on this client machine. NOTE To use the blcred utility. For a complete description of blcred. this procedure includes steps to ensure that the scripts have access to valid SSO session credentials. Setting up a Network Shell Client to run in proxy mode Use this procedure to configure a Network Shell client so it can run in proxy mode— that is. Chapter 4 Administering security 147 . 6 Restart the central Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111). so it can communicate with servers via a Network Shell Proxy Server. The value used for authProfile must match the name of an authentication profile included in that file. Note that the BL_AUTH_PROFILE_NAME environment variable can override the value of this secure file setting. 1 Start Network Shell for a client installation and use the secadmin utility to create an entry in the secure file that specifies the following: ■ auth_profile=authProfile. 8 Assign the NSH_PROXY.

For more information on secadmin. do the following: A Provide an authentication profile name that can be used to generate an SSO session credential. see “Secure file” on page 253.Connect authorization to any role that should be used to connect to a Network Shell Proxy Server. where fileName is the Network Shell-style path to the XML file containing authentication profile definitions. 2 Assign the NSH_PROXY. enter the following from Network Shell: secadmin -m default -p 5 -auth_profile QAProfile -auth_profiles_file "/c/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br /authenticationProfiles.xml from a machine where the console is installed and authentication profiles have already been created. ■ appserver_protocol=ssoproxy For example.xml. To create the authenticationProfiles. See the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide for information on using the BMC BladeLogic Console to set up authentication profiles. such as /c/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/authenticationProfiles.xml: appserver_protocol=ssoproxy:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption= tls To use the secadmin utility to generate the default entry shown above. You can create an authentication profile using blcred or you can create one beforehand using theBMC BladeLogic Console. 3 To run Network Shell and BLCLI scripts unattended from this client machine. or you can copy authenticationProfiles.xml file. see “Using the secadmin utility” on page 258. the following is a default entry in the secure file on a client machine running Network Shell: default:protocol=5:auth_profile=QAProfile: auth_profiles_file=/c/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/ version/NSH/br/ authenticationProfiles. 148 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Note that the BL_AUTH_PROFILES_FILE environment variable can override the value of the auth_profiles_file setting in the secure file. You can provide an authentication profile name using a command line option for blcred or by defining the BL_AUTH_PROFILE_NAME environment variable.xml" -appserver_protocol ssoproxy -T encryption_only -e tls For more information on the secure file. you can use the BMC BladeLogic Console to generate authentication profiles on this client machine (see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide for details).Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service ■ auth_profiles_file=fileName.

and other information required for the authentication mechanism. 1 Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. Chapter 4 Administering security 149 . — Provide a BLCLI command line option that specifies the user’s role. If Application Servers are not correctly configured. Setting up Network Shell Proxy Services for Windows user mapping If you are using automation principals to implement Windows user mapping. make a role selection by doing one of the following: — Define the BL_RBAC_ROLE environment variable. C If the user is authorized for multiple roles. The following procedure configures an Application Server so that Network Shell traffic will be routed through a Network Shell Proxy Service for any Application Server that is processing jobs. provide a value for ProxyServiceURLs. or the job may not run at all. and role. which stores a user name. — For SRP authentication. password. This procedure also requires you to modify the secure file on the Application Server. 2 Expand the Application Servers node. Right-click the Application Server you want to modify and select Edit.dat. password. and other information required for the authentication mechanism. jobs acting on target servers may not use Windows user mapping and instead may operate using user privilege mapping. password. select Configuration => Infrastructure Management. set up a keytab file called user_info. This procedure is only necessary for Application Servers that handle jobs and are defined as type ALL or JOB.dat.Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service B Provide user information required for the authentication mechanism specified in the authentication profile by doing any of the following: — Enter command line options to blcred that provide a user name. — Let the Network Shell client (operating in proxy mode) and the BLCLI prompt the user to make a role selection after establishing an SSO session. your Application Server environment must meet certain criteria. For information on setting up user_info. see “Generating a user information file” on page 230. 3 On the Edit Application Server Profile dialog. — Let the blcred utility prompt for a user name.

The following procedures let you define override locations for SSO files for the different BMC BladeLogic client applications: ■ ■ Setting SSO file locations for BLCLI Setting SSO file locations for Network Shell 150 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . provide values for other Application Server attributes. By default. For more information. Setting override locations for client SSO files The BMC BladeLogic system of single sign-on stores SSO user information in the following files: Authentication profile file Session credential cache file Trusted keystore Each of these SSO files resides at a default location. 7 Configure the secure file on the Application Server so the appserver_protocol option is set to ssoproxy. portNumber is the value provided for ProxySvcPort on that Network Shell Proxy Server. nshProxyServerHost is the fully qualified name of the host where a Network Shell Proxy Server is running. 6 Restart the Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111). you can instruct a client application to use a file in a different location.bladelogic:blsess://nshProxyServerHost:portNumber In the value shown above.Setting override locations for client SSO files This value should identify a Network Shell Proxy Service running in the Application Server’s environment. For more information. 4 If necessary. 5 Click OK. If necessary. The value you provide should have the format service:proxysvc. see “Secure file” on page 253. ProxySvcPort is set to Base Port plus 42. see “Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile” on page 100.

resides in a default location. BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation does not need an authentication profile to authenticate users. The user is asked to trust the certificate.bladelogic/bl_sesscc where userHomeDirectory is the home directory of the user running the client application C:\Documents and Settings\WindowsUserName\ Application Data\BladeLogic\bl_sesscc Trusted keystore When a BMC BladeLogic client first accesses a middle tier entity (by necessity. or you can copy the authenticationProfiles.xml file. When authenticating with the blcred utility. Session credential cache file When an Authentication Service authenticates a user. you can use the BMC BladeLogic Console to generate authentication profiles in their default location (see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide for details).Setting override locations for client SSO files Authentication profile file Authentication profiles are collections of information that a BMC BladeLogic client application needs to log into the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. which is known as a keystore. This list. Within that file each authentication profile must have a unique name. Platform Solaris Linux AIX HP-UX Windows Default Location userHomeDirectory/. By default. If the user does. the Authentication Service) to authenticate and obtain an SSO credential. To create the authenticationProfiles. All authentication profiles are stored within a single XML file. that XML file resides at installDirectory/br/authenticationProfiles.509 certificate. the certificate is added to the client’s list of trusted certificates. In the course of the TLS handshake. the client is presented with the Authentication Server’s self-signed X. session credentials are automatically cached. A standard BMC BladeLogic installation uses a default location for caching session credentials. BMC BladeLogic clients use session credentials to establish secure sessions with Application Servers and Network Shell Proxy Servers. BMC BladeLogic Console users can choose to cache session credentials. as described below. the client establishes a TLS connection with that entity.xml file from a client machine where the console is installed and authentication profiles have already been created.xml. it issues a session credential. as described below: Chapter 4 Administering security 151 .

A location provided in a command line option takes precedence over a location provided with an environment variable. you can define environment variables or make settings in the client’s secure file.pkcs12.bladelogic/client_keystore. HP-UX Windows Default Location userHomeDirectory/. Mechanisms to Identify Location command line option: -f credentialCacheFileName environment variable: BL_SSO_CRED_CACHE_FILE Authentication profile definitions command line option: -w authenticationProfilesFile environment variable: BL_AUTH_PROFILES_FILE Keystore for trusted X. see “Environment variables” on page 129. 152 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .pkcs12.Setting override locations for client SSO files Platform Solaris Linux AIX. The following table identifies SSO file locations you can specify for BLCLI and the mechanisms available to provide that information. Setting SSO file locations for Network Shell To specify alternative locations for SSO files used by Network Shell operating in proxy mode. see the BLCLI Help. you can either provide command line arguments or define environment variables. For more information on setting environment variables. A location provided in an environment variable takes precedence over a secure file setting.pem where userHomeDirectory is the home directory of the user running the client application C:\Documents and Settings\WindowsUserName\ Application Data\BladeLogic\client_keystore.509 certificates command line option: -x certificateStore environment variable: BL_SSO_TRUSTED_CERT_KE YSTORE_FILE Takes precedence over environment variable Takes precedence over environment variable SSO File SSO session credentials Precedence Takes precedence over environment variable For more information on using command line options in BLCLI. The following table identifies SSO file locations you can specify and the mechanisms available to provide that information.pem Setting SSO file locations for BLCLI To specify alternative locations for SSO files used by the BLCLI.

BMC BladeLogic will contact that URL to verify the certificate. You want failover capability that tries a second OCSP Responder in situations when the first OCSP Responder fails. Chapter 4 Administering security 153 ■ ■ . it can also be used to further secure communication between components of the BMC BladeLogic system. OCSP can determine the revocation status of customer-provisioned certificates for Application Servers (see “Securing communication with CA certificates” on page 224). When a BMC BladeLogic Authentication Server uses this type of verification. For example. see “Environment variables” on page 129. there is no URL for the OCSP Responder. it sends a message over HTTP to an OCSP Responder.509 certificates environment variable: BL_SSO_TRUSTED_CERT_KE YSTORE_FILE For more information on defining settings in the secure file. You will need to perform additional configuration for OCSP if any of the following conditions are true: ■ In the smart card certificate. In response.Setting up certificate verification using OCSP SSO File SSO session credentials Authentication profile definitions Mechanisms to Identify Location environment variable: BL_SSO_CRED_CACHE_FILE environment variable: BL_AUTH_PROFILES_FILE secure file setting: auth_profiles_file Precedence Takes precedence over secure file setting Keystore for trusted X. Setting up certificate verification using OCSP The Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) is an Internet standard used to verify the revocation status of X. Not only is OCSP checking enabled by default for PKI authentication. You want to override the URL for the OCSP responder in the smart card certificate.509 certificates. this default approach is sufficient and users do not have to perform any additional configuration for OCSP checking. Typically. an Authentication Server uses the information in a certificate to determine which OCSP Responder to access when verifying a certificate. OCSP checking can be used to improve the security of the overall BMC BladeLogic system. For more information on setting environment variables. For almost all situations. the OCSP Responder sends back a signed message indicating the certificate’s revocation status. If the certificate includes a valid URL for an OCSP Responder. see “Secure file” on page 253.

The response BMC BladeLogic receives is signed either by the CA that issued the certificate or a responder designated by the CA. No additional configuration is needed to validate responses sent by the OCSP Responder. To enhance the security of communication with an OCSP Responder. identified within the BMC BladeLogic system. an organization can use the BMC BladeLogic system to designate another OCSP Responder (see “Configuring an additional OCSP responder” on page 155). Designating another OCSP responder In some circumstances an organization may want to designate an OSCP Responder. When you use BMC BladeLogic to designate an OCSP Responder. the Authentication Server encloses a unique value in an OCSP request message. in some situations. the Authentication Server can then contact a secondary responder. For more information on this capability.Setting up certificate verification using OCSP ■ Your OCSP Responder signs OCSP responses with a private key that is unrelated to the Certificate Authority that issued your smart card certificates. In a typical configuration. However. you must create a trust store used specifically for validating communication with the trusted responder. Enabling or disabling nonce support Use this procedure to enable or disable nonce support when contacting OCSP Responders. Using nonce helps to thwart replay attacks. you can set up a failover capability (see “Configuring failover to an OCSP responder” on page 155). The Authentication Server expects that same value will be returned in the response message from the OCSP Responder. see “Enabling or disabling nonce support” on page 154. In such a situation. The Authentication Server can first attempt to contact the OCSP Responder identified within a certificate. you may need to set up a trust store so the OCSP responses can be validated (see “Setting up a trust store for an OCSP trusted responder” on page 156). the Authentication Server contacts the OCSP Responder identified within a certificate. The response from that trusted responder may be using a certificate that was not issued by the CA that originally signed the certificate being verified. Trusting the response from an OCSP responder If you have used the BMC BladeLogic system to designate an OCSP Responder. either because a certificate does not include a URL for an OSCP Responder or conditions prevent users from contacting that responder. In this situation. you may want to enable the OCSP “PKCS” extension. the Authentication Server may be contacting a trusted responder specified within the BMC BladeLogic system. 154 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . When nonce is enabled. If that attempt fails.

If you set responderURL to an empty string (""). 3 Restart the Application Server. enter the following command: set OCSP IsNonceEnabled true|false By default nonce support is disabled. Configuring failover to an OCSP responder Use this procedure to set up failover capability between OCSP Responders. the blasadmin utility). start the Application Server Administration console (that is. With failover. the blasadmin utility). enter the following command: Chapter 4 Administering security 155 . the Authentication Server only contacts the responder identified in this procedure unless you have defined a failover capability (see “Configuring failover to an OCSP responder” on page 155). Configuring an additional OCSP responder Use this procedure to define an OCSP Responder other than the responder specified in a certificate. 1 On the Authentication Server. Once you perform this procedure to define an OCSP Responder. By default this value is set to an empty string. 2 To enable failover between OCSP Responders. 3 Restart the Application Server. the only URL used to find an OCSP Responder is the URL obtained from the certificate. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. 1 On the Authentication Server. 2 Specify the additional responder by entering the following command: set OCSP ResponderUrl responderURL where responderURL is the URL of the additional responder.Setting up certificate verification using OCSP 1 On the Authentication Server. the blasadmin utility). a second OCSP Responder can be contacted in the event that the first fails for any reason. 2 To enable or disable nonce support. This procedure enables the Authentication Server to send the OCSP request to the specified URL. start the Application Server Administration console (that is.

1 Obtain certificates for all OCSP trusted responders from a certificate authority. NOTE The Application Server only reads its certificate store when it starts up. Typically. in some circumstances an OCSP trusted responder may sign its response with a key derived from some other entity.Setting up certificate verification using OCSP set OCSP IsFailoverEnabled true By default this value is set to false and failover is not enabled. enter the following command: set OCSP UseCustomResponder true|false In this command. Setting up a trust store for an OCSP trusted responder Use this procedure to import a certificate and set up a trust store that is used to verify messages from an OCSP trusted responder. To establish secure communication with an OCSP trusted responder. No additional configuration is required. The trust store must contain a certificate that allows the Authentication Server to trust messages from the OCSP Responder. a trust store may be necessary in some unusual circumstances. when the Authentication Server contacts an OCSP Responder. If you change the certificate trust store. the response is signed with the private key that was also used to sign the certificate being verified. Setting this value to false means the Authentication Server first contacts the OCSP Responder defined in the certificate. you must set up a trust store used exclusively for validating communication with the OCSP trusted responder. true means the Authentication Server first contacts the additional responder you have defined using the BMC BladeLogic system (see “Configuring an additional OCSP responder” on page 155). be sure to restart the Application Server. 4 Restart the Application Server. 2 Import the certificates into a trust store file on the Authentication Server. 3 To specify which OCSP Responder the Authentication Server should contact first. 156 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . However. In this situation. The certificate to be added to the OCSP trust store must be the same certificate that the OCSP Responder inserted into OCSP response messages or the certificate used to issue the certificate that was inserted into OCSP response messages.

which is available on any machine where the Authentication Server is installed. For example. pkcs12—Trust store uses the PKCS12 format. Currently. it displays in encoded text. Chapter 4 Administering security 157 . 5 Provide the password needed to decrypt the certificate by entering the following command: set OCSP TruststorePassword ****** When you enter the password. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. If you attempt to view this password later using the show command. Enabling or disabling OCSP Use this procedure to enable or disable OCSP support. 3 On the Authentication Server. OCSP verification is enabled by default for PKI authentication only. One approach is to use Java’s keytool utility. if you are importing certificates with the Authentication Server’s version of keytool. ■ 7 Restart the Application Server. the blasadmin utility).Setting up certificate verification using OCSP There are many methods for importing a certificate.cer -alias ocspt where -keystore identifies the trust store you are setting up. it is displayed in clear text. you might enter a command like the following: installDirectory/jre/bin/keytool -import -keystore PkiOcspTruststore. -storepass provides the password for accessing the trust store.jks -storepass ****** -file DODOcspCert. and -alias is the name you are assigning to the certificate you are adding to the trust store. 6 Specify the type of OCSP trust store by entering the following command: set OCSP TruststoreType trustStoreType In this command trustStoreType can be either of the following: ■ jks—Trust store uses the “JKS” format. -file identifies the certificate you are importing. 4 Make the OCSP trust store available to the Authentication Server by entering the following command: set OCSP TruststorePathname certificateStore where certificateStore is the local path to the OCSP trust store.

see step 3 on page 161 in “Configuring LDAP authentication” on page 161. For details on how to configure the Authentication Server to use a trust store for certificates. to connect to an LDAP server and authenticate a user. 2 Provision the Authentication Server with trusted certificates for all LDAP servers. including any servers used for high availability purposes. 2 To enable or disable OCSP support. To accomplish this. 3 Define a distinguished name template. the Authentication Service uses the LDAP Service. the Authentication Service issues a session credential with the user’s distinguished name. Overview of LDAP configuration tasks This section provides an overview of the concepts you should understand and the tasks you must perform to set up LDAP-based authentication. 1 Specify the LDAP servers. When a user logs in and provides an LDAP distinguished name and password. 3 Restart the Application Server. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. For more information on high availability. For details on how to specify LDAP servers to the Authentication Server. see step 2 on page 161 in “Configuring LDAP authentication” on page 161. 158 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .Implementing LDAP authentication 1 On the Authentication Server. If the bind is successful. see “High availability configurations” on page 159. see “Certificate trust store” on page 159. See “Configuring LDAP authentication” on page 161 for a step-by-step procedure describing how to set up LDAP authentication. enter the following command: set OCSP IsEnabled true|false By default OCSP is enabled. Implementing LDAP authentication The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service can authenticate users defined in an LDAP registry. For more information. the blasadmin utility). the service uses that information to bind to an external LDAP server—that is.

LDAP connects to the first functional LDAP server in the list. LDAP servers are authenticated via X. High availability configurations When the Authentication Service needs to authenticate a user by connecting to an LDAP server. Certificate trust store The Authentication Service uses TLS to encrypt its connection to the LDAP Server. Chapter 4 Administering security 159 . you can use one of the following approaches: ■ Install certificates for all LDAP servers. see step 4 on page 162 in “Configuring LDAP authentication” on page 161. You must repeat this procedure each time an LDAP server’s certificate is updated. see “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. you must identify a file that contains trusted X. Listing multiple servers helps to ensure high availability and failover capability. For details on how to set up a distinguished name template for the Authentication Server. you may want to provide a list of LDAP servers that it can potentially contact. 5 Cross-register LDAP users with the users in the RBAC user database. For more information. When configuring LDAP. When provisioning X. For more information. see “Distinguished names” on page 160 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. B Set up an authentication profile for LDAP authentication. For more information. This file is the trust store. if necessary. see “Distinguished names” on page 160.509 certificates.509 certificates that LDAP servers provide during the TLS handshake.High availability configurations For more information. see “Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 160. The Authentication Service sends the user’s credential to the LDAP Server only if it can validate the LDAP server’s certificate. When a list of multiple LDAP servers is available.509 certificates for the Authentication Server’s trust store. 4 On the BMC BladeLogic client: A Set up a distinguished name template.

For more information. DC=com. For information on adding users to RBAC. For example. DC=bladelogic. CN=Users. Rather than entering a full DN. Distinguished names LDAP users are uniquely identified by distinguished names (DN). The two templates can be used together or by themselves. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. be sure to also set IsHostValidationEnabled to True. users only have to enter the part of a DN that is unique to their accounts. For example. To authenticate a user. Only users authorized to use BMC BladeLogic should be entered into the BMC BladeLogic database. Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database Users must be registered in both LDAP registries and BMC BladeLogic’s RBAC-based user database. 160 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The name the user provides is transformed to a full DN by the use of a distinguished name template. ou=dev. There it is transformed into CN=admin.509 certificates to the Authentication Server’s trust store. CN=Users. DC=sub1. o=bladelogic. use the blcred utility. which replaces the {0} substring. To add X. Consequently. DC=sub1. When cross-registering users. If the common names (CN) specified in the issued certificates are set to the directory server’s fully qualified domain names. be sure to enter the users full distinguished name in both RBAC and the LDAP registry. which is replaced with the name the user provides when logging in. the profile template transforms the name to CN=admin. the authentication profile DN template might be CN={0}. DC=bladelogic. the Authentication Service requires a full DN and a corresponding password. A DN template is a static string containing a {0} substring. the user only enters a string such as “qatest3”. and the Authentication Service DN template might be {0}. ou=dev. with a DN template of CN={0}. o=bladelogic. the user’s DN becomes CN=qatest3. DC=com before it is used to contact the LDAP server. such as CN=admin. Use RBAC to add users to the BMC BladeLogic database. see the blcred man page. CN=sub1 before sending it to the Authentication Service. o=bladelogic. Since all CA-issued certificates are trusted.Distinguished names ■ Install the certificate of the trusted Certificate Authority that issued certificates to the LDAP servers. however. If the user enters “admin” as a user name when logging in. CN=Users. Cross-registration allows users to be authorized for RBAC roles. ou=dev. all current and future LDAP certificates are automatically trusted. DN templates can be defined in two places: the Authentication Service and LDAP authentication profiles (described in the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide).

either by adding certificates from individual LDAP servers or by importing a certificate from a PEM file. enter the following: set Ldap LdapServerURLs serverList where serverList is a list of one or more URLs. 1 On the Authentication Server. do the following: A To specify URLs of LDAP servers. enter the following: set Ldap ConnectionTimeoutMs # where # is the number of milliseconds to wait. this is the amount of time the service waits for a response from one URL before trying the next URL in the list you provided in step A. B To specify the amount of time to wait for an LDAP server to respond before terminating the connection. C To check that the certificate’s common name matches the LDAP server’s fully qualified name. To provision a trust store. 3 To set up a trust store for X. 2 To identify LDAP servers. including any servers used for high availability configurations. B To identify the trust store containing trusted certificates. For more information on high availability configurations in LDAP. do the following: A Provision a trust store with X.509 certificates. enter the following: set Ldap TrustStore certificateStore where certificateStore is the local path to a trust store. URLs must point to LDAPv3 servers that support the StartTLS extension. the blasadmin utility). Separate URLs with commas or other delimiters (see “Specifying multiple values for a parameter” on page 50). see “High availability configurations” on page 159.Configuring LDAP authentication Configuring LDAP authentication Use this procedure to configure the Authentication Service so it can perform LDAP authentication. use the blcred utility. In a high availability configuration.509 certificates. enter the following: set Ldap IsHostValidationEnabled true Chapter 4 Administering security 161 . start the Application Server Administration console (that is.

6 Restart the Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111). 162 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . NOTE The Application Server only reads its certificate store when it starts up. NOTE The blasadmin utility provides two additional commands for the Ldap component that are not documented here: DefaultUser and DefaultPassword. For more information on X. enter the following: set AuthServer IsLdapAuthEnabled true By default LDAP authentication is not turned on. see “Certificate trust store” on page 159. 7 Cross-register LDAP users with the users in the RBAC user database.509 certificates if the LDAP server’s fully qualified domain name (FQDN) is not contained in one of the alternative names or the common name (CN). 4 To define an LDAP distinguished name template. These commands are only used by BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation. See “Crossregistering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 166.509 certificates and setting up trust stores. See “Certificate trust store” on page 159 for more information on using this option. enter the following: set AuthServer LdapUserDnTemplate "text {0} text" where text represents any distinguished name objects that should be included in the template.Configuring LDAP authentication Setting this value to true causes the Authentication Server to reject X. 8 Set up authentication profiles using LDAP authentication on the BMC BladeLogic client. be sure to restart the Application Server. See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. See “Distinguished names” on page 160 for more information on using a distinguished name template. 5 To enable LDAP authentication. If you change the certificate trust store.

rec file to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Server. In that situation you do not have to perform the following procedure. Users might choose to install an RSA Authentication Agent to help troubleshoot SecurID. 1 Log in to RSA Authentication Manager and define an Authentication Agent Host using the Application Server’s name or IP address. In some situations the user may be prompted for a new PIN before authentication can occur. Configuring SecurID authentication Use this procedure to configure the Authentication Server so it can perform SecurID authentication. The following sections describe those requirements. If the information the user enters is valid. RSA Authentication Agents are used to protect computers and other resources. If an RSA Authentication Agent is installed. BMC BladeLogic’s integration with SecurID requires the presence of a host configuration file called sdconf.rec. that user can authenticate by providing his or her user name and passcode. Configuring a BMC BladeLogic system to support SecurID authentication requires configuration beyond the default setup. Configuring RSA Authentication Manager BMC BladeLogic assumes you have installed RSA Authentication Manager and are familiar with its functionality. the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service can share that agent’s configuration file. This file provides the address of the RSA Authentication Manager Server and other parameters needed to contact it. In addition. which consists of a PIN and the current token code displayed on an RSA SecurID Token. you must configure a client to use an authentication profile set up for SecurID authentication.rec) for the newly created agent. BMC BladeLogic does not require one to be installed on the Application Server. 2 Copy the sdconf. If a user is registered in the RBAC system. Chapter 4 Administering security 163 . See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide for more information on authentication profiles. Then generate a configuration file (sdconf. the Authentication Service issues a session credential to the user.Implementing RSA SecurID authentication Implementing RSA SecurID authentication The BMC BladeLogic Application Server can authenticate users by means of RSA SecurID.

all SecurID login attempts are rejected. 5 Do any of the following to set additional configuration options for SecurID: ■ To instruct the RSA Authentication Agent which IP address to use if the Authentication Server has multiple IP addresses. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. 2 To enable SecurID authentication. if you change the SecurID configuration. you do not have to restart the Authentication Server if you are making changes to SecurID configuration. you must wait the amount of time specified by ReadConfigInterval (described below) until the new configuration values are read. 4 Provide the path to the RSA Authentication Manager’s configuration file (sdconf. ■ To specify the path to the RSA Authentication Manager’s optional configuration file (sdopts. However. The valid range is 0-86400 (24 hours). enter the following: set SecurID ReadConfigInterval interval where interval is the interval in seconds for reloading the configuration file. a new file is created in BMC BladeLogic’s /br directory. 1 On the Authentication Server.1. The default file name is JAStatus.Configuring SecurID authentication When you perform this procedure.rec) by entering the following: set SecurID ConfigFilePath filePath where filePath provides a local path to the sdconf. enter the following: set SecurID AgentHost iPAddress ■ To specify the interval at which SecurID settings are read. The default is 600 seconds.rec file. When set to false. enter the following: 164 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . ■ To specify the path to the RSA Authentication Manager’s server status file. enter the following: set AuthServer IsSecurIDAuthEnabled true By default SecurID authentication is not turned on. 3 Restart the Authentication Server. enter the following: set SecurID StatusFilePath filePath where filePath is a local path to that file. the blasadmin utility).rec). If you do not provide a path.

The default file name is securid. they should all use the same node secret file. If you do not define a path. By default this option is set to false. This file is created automatically the first time the Authentication Service successfully connects to the RSA Authentication Manager. On UNIX. Other applications may have similar access requirements. the RSA SecurID module creates log entries in the file specified by the LogFilePath option. on Windows you must grant permission to SYSTEM. ■ To specify the path to the SecurID log file. enter the following: set SecurID NodeSecretFilePath filePath where filePath is a local path to that file. ■ To set the logging level. they may need to share the same node secret file that the Application Server is using. When multiple applications share a node secret file. enter the following: set SecurID LogFilePath filePath where filePathis local path to the log file. ■ To turn on logging. you must grant permission to the bladmin user. the file is automatically created in BMC BladeLogic’s /br directory. ■ To specify the path to the RSA Authentication Manager’s node secret file. If you are running other applications that also use RSA authentication. enter the following: set SecurID LogLevel OFF | DEBUG | INFO | WARN | ERROR | FATAL By default this option is set to OFF. If multiple Application Servers are running on the same host. you must ensure that the Application Server can access the node secret file by granting the appropriate operating system-level permissions to the file. Chapter 4 Administering security 165 . This configuration file is used to configure a manual authentication load balancing policy. enter the following: set SecurID LogToFile true | false If set to true.Configuring SecurID authentication set SecurID OptionsFilePath filePath> where filePath is a local path to that file.

Refer to RSA’s product documentation for a more complete description of supported settings. Implementing PKI authentication The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Server can use public key infrastructure (PKI) to authenticate users who present a type of smart card known as a common access card (CAC). To verify whether a certificate is currently valid. Through ActiveClient middleware. such as RSA_ENABLE_DEBUG=YES. For information on adding users to RBAC. see “Setting up certificate verification using OCSP” on page 153. the Authentication Server can access an OCSP Responder. a BMC BladeLogic client can access the appropriate certificate and private key on the smart card to authenticate the user. Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database Users must be registered in both the SecurID user registry and the BMC BladeLogic RBAC-based user database. For more information on setting up OCSP. the Authentication Service issues the client a session credential. BMC BladeLogic documentation assumes you know how to add users to the SecurID user registry. the user must insert a smart card into a card reader and enter a PIN. 7 Set up authentication profiles using SecurID authentication on the BMC BladeLogic client. Only users authorized to use BMC BladeLogic should be entered into the BMC BladeLogic database. You can manually edit this file to specify additional debug options. Use RBAC to add users to the database.Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database NOTE SecurID configuration settings are stored in installDirectory/br/deployments/ deploymentName/options/securid-options. 166 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . If the information the user enters is valid and the OCSP Responder verifies the validity of the user’s certificate. See “Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 166. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. Cross-registration allows users to be authorized for RBAC roles. By default. See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. 6 Cross-register users in both the SecurID user registry and the RBAC user data base. While logging into a BMC BladeLogic client. OCSP verification is enabled for PKI authentication.properties.

3 To register users by the common name portion of the subject name within a user’s certificate. 1 On the Authentication Server. see “Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 166. Chapter 4 Administering security 167 . Configuring PKI authentication Use this procedure to configure the Authentication Server so it can perform PKIbased authentication. If you choose to cross-register users by their common name. You must choose between the common name or the distinguished name approach. 4 Set up a trust store for a PKI certificate. NOTE In this release. Note that many steps in this procedure reference a sub-section that describes another procedure. 2 To enable PKI authentication. the blasadmin utility). you must obtain certificates yourself from a CA. enter the following: set PkiAuth IsEnabled true By default PKI authentication is not turned on. If you are implementing PKI. users must be cross-registered according their full distinguished name (DN). For more information on registering users.Configuring PKI authentication BMC BladeLogic does not provide a default set of trusted CA certificates for use with PKI authentication. all PKI-based login attempts are rejected. you cannot also crossregister users by their distinguished name. PKI authentication is not supported for Windows 64-bit platforms. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. When set to false. See “Setting up a trust store for PKI authentication”. enter the following: set PkiAuth useCommonName true By default cross-registration by common name is not turned on.

cer where -keystore identifies the trust store you are setting up. you might enter a command like the following: installDirectory/jre/bin/keytool -import -keystore PkiTruststore. OCSP verification is enabled for PKI authentication and no additional configuration is necessary. obtain the certificate for the certificate authority that issued the certificates on the smart card. which is available on any machine where the Authentication Server is installed. be sure to restart the Application Server. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. If you change the certificate trust store. In most situations. See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. 2 Import the certificate into a trust store file on the Authentication Server. See “Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 169. There are many methods for importing a certificate.jks -storepass ****** -file DODJITCCA_19. Setting up a trust store for PKI authentication Use this procedure to import a certificate into a trust store and then make that trust store available to the Authentication Server. 4 Make the trust store available to the Authentication Server by entering the following command: set PkiAuth TruststorePathname certificateStore 168 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . -storepass provides the password for accessing the trust store (needed later in step 5). if you are importing a certificate with the Authentication Server’s version of keytool. the blasadmin utility). 3 On the Authentication Server. and -file identifies the certificate you are importing. 6 Cross-register users in both the user registry maintained for smart card holders and the RBAC user data base. For example.Configuring PKI authentication 5 To configure certificate verification using an OCSP Responder. One approach is to use Java’s keytool utility. see “Setting up certificate verification using OCSP” on page 153. 7 Set up authentication profiles using PKI authentication on the BMC BladeLogic client. NOTE The Application Server only reads its certificate store when it starts up. 1 If you haven’t already done so.

BMC BladeLogic documentation assumes you know how to add users to the registry of smart card holders. Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database Users must be registered in both the registry maintained for smart card holders and the BMC BladeLogic RBAC-based user database. Cross-registration allows users to be authorized for RBAC roles. 6 Specify the type of trust store by entering the following command: set PkiAuth TruststoreType trustStoreType In this command trustStoreType can be either of the following: ■ jks—Trust store uses the “JKS” format. users are registered by their full distinguished name.Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database where certificateStore is the local path to the trust store. For information on adding users to RBAC. The Application Server Administration console encodes the password that is displayed. Only users authorized to use BMC BladeLogic should be entered into the BMC BladeLogic database. Use RBAC to add users to the database. By default. ■ 7 Restart the Application Server. pkcs12—Trust store uses the PKCS12 format. 5 Provide the password needed to decrypt the certificate by entering the following command: set PkiAuth TruststorePassword ****** Enter the password using clear text. For details on this option. see “Configuring PKI authentication” on page 167. users can be registered by just the common name portion of the subject name within their certificate. Optionally. Chapter 4 Administering security 169 . see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.

170 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . which relies on the Active Directory registry to store the names and passwords of registered users within its Kerberos realm. and password. The following sections provide instructions for setting up Domain Authentication at installations where AD/Kerberos authentication is not already being used for BMC BladeLogic. In Windows. a Kerberos realm is an Active Directory domain. Users provide a user name. See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide for more information on authentication profiles.Implementing Domain Authentication Implementing Domain Authentication The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service can authenticate users via Windows Active Directory user credentials. see “Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication” on page 171. domain. you must configure a client to use an authentication profile set up for Domain Authentication. Configuring a BMC BladeLogic system to support Domain Authentication requires configuration beyond the default setup. The Authentication Service uses that information to authenticate the user to the Active Directory KDC. After you configure BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication. If you have already set up AD/Kerberos authentication for BMC BladeLogic. use your existing Kerberos configuration files and modify as necessary based on the descriptions in this section. For details on this process.

This is an example. NOTE When you specify a domain name in any of the following steps. and password. domain. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure. Chapter 4 Administering security 171 .Sample domain structure Sample domain structure The following diagram shows a sample domain structure containing a parent domain and two child sub-domains. you must use UPPER CASE LETTERS. Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication Use this procedure to configure BMC BladeLogic so users can authenticate to the Authentication Service by providing an AD/Kerberos user name. The following is a master procedure. The sample names shown in this example are used in many procedures that relate to the Domain Authentication and AD/Kerberos solutions. Your domain structure may be simpler or more complex. You may want to review the diagram in “Sample domain structure” on page 171 for an overview of the domain names and host names used in the examples in this section.

_tcp. 4 Configure the Authentication Service to support Domain Authentication. If multiple realms are used.COM nslookup -type=srv _kerberos. See “Defining Authentication Service settings for Domain Authentication” on page 175. See “Locating Active Directory KDCs”.DEV. 3 Create the blappserv_login._tcp. 2 Create the blappserv_krb5.DEV. From a command line. See “Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 176.sub2.dev.SUB1. such as SUB1._tcp.conf file.com 172 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .COM The Active Directory KDC’s host name is reported as the value of service (UNIX) or svr hostname (Windows). See “Creating the blappserv_krb5. enter the following: nslookup -type=srv _kerberos.MYCOMPANY. See “Logging on using default users and roles” on page 177. See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.mycompany.MYCOMPANY.conf file.Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication 1 Obtain the host names for Active Directory KDCs. 5 Add user names based on Kerberos naming conventions to the RBAC user database.COM.COM). also look up the KDC for the parent realm (DEV. you will need these host names._tcp. For example: nslookup -type=srv _kerberos. For example: service = 0 100 88 kdc.SUB2. 7 Set up authentication profiles using Domain Authentication on the BMC BladeLogic client.COM and SUB2. Later in the configuration process.REALM where REALM is a Windows domain name.DEV.MYCOMPANY. 6 Add users to built-in roles.DEV.DEV.MYCOMPANY. which defines Active Directory domains and servers. Look up the KDCs for each realm against which users authenticate.conf file” on page 174. See “Creating the blappserv_login. which provides necessary authentication information.MYCOMPANY.COM nslookup -type=srv _kerberos.conf file” on page 173. Locating Active Directory KDCs Use this procedure to obtain the host names for Active Directory KDCs.MYCOMPANY.

COM .MYCOMPANY. NOTE When identifying servers in the blappserv_krb5.mycompany.USERS_DOMAIN = USERS_REALM USERS_REALM is the realm where users are defined. list all of those KDCs. A period before a DNS name indicates you are mapping every system with a DNS name ending with that value to a corresponding Kerberos realm.conf file. 1 Create a text file and add the following content to it: [libdefaults] ticket_lifetime = 6000 default_realm = USERS_REALM [realms] USERS_REALM = { kdc = USERS_REALM_KDC:88 } [domain_realm] . USERS_DOMAIN provides DNS names. create a separate stanza for each realm. use the nslookup command. When Domain Authentication users log in and they do not provide a fully qualified user name. USERS_REALM_KDC is the host name for the KDC servicing that realm.com = SUB1.mycompany.dev. This file configures Kerberos so it can communicate with the Active Directory server or servers.Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication Ignore the numbers before the host name.DEV. Creating the blappserv_krb5.conf file. you must define a default realm. they are authenticated as members of the default realm.com = SUB2.mycompany. If multiple KDCs are running.MYCOMPANY. as described in “Locating Active Directory KDCs” on page 172. do not use IP addresses.com = DEV. Chapter 4 Administering security 173 .sub1. When you create a blappserv_krb5.conf file Use this procedure to create a blappserv_krb5.DEV.MYCOMPANY. In the “domain_realm” section.conf.COM To obtain host names for any of the KDCs listed in this file. The Application Server must be able to resolve DNS names of Active Directory servers. If users are defined in multiple realms.dev. For example: .COM .sub2.dev.

if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. For example.conf ■ On Windows. the file should be located as follows: 174 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .ADKerberosPasswordLogin { com.conf For example.conf ■ On Windows. For example. 1 Create a text file and add the text shown below to this file.conf file You must create a blappserv_login. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. save the file to the InstallDirectory/NSH/br directory with the name: blappserv_krb5. if the Authentication Server is installed in the default location. save the file to the InstallDirectory\NSH\br directory with the name: blappserv_krb5.conf Creating the blappserv_login.auth. the file should be located as follows: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blappserv_krb5.Krb5LoginModule required doNotPrompt=false useTicketCache=false debug=false. the file should be located as follows: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blappserv_krb5.conf.conf file. save the file to the InstallDirectory/NSH/br directory with the name blappserv_login.conf. if the Authentication Server is installed in the default location. save the file to the InstallDirectory\NSH\br directory with the name blappserv_login.bladelogic.conf For example.sun.auth. com. 2 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system.security.module. the file should be located as follows: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blappserv_login.service. This files provides necessary Kerberos authentication information. }.Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication 2 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system.

By default AuthSvcKrb5Config is set to a value of blappserv_krb5. To perform this procedure. This file is essential for supporting Kerberos. select Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Utilities => Application Server Administration. You can skip this step unless you choose to use a different file name.bat Both options run the same command. enter the following: set AuthServer AuthSvcKrb5Config fileName where fileName is the name of the blappserv_krb5.conf file. enter the following: .conf Defining Authentication Service settings for Domain Authentication Use this procedure to define settings for the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service so it can use the Kerberos configurations you set up in previous procedures. do one of the following: — From the Start menu. enter the following: set AuthServer isDomainAuthEnabled true By default this value is set to false.Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blappserv_login. enter the following: set AuthServer AuthSvcKrb5LoginConfig fileName Chapter 4 Administering security 175 . 3 To enable the blappserv_krb5.conf file. from the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. — From the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. 4 To enable the blappserv_login.conf. you must use the Application Server Administration console. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console by doing one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system./bin/blasadmin ■ On Windows. enter the following: \bin\blasadmin. 2 To allow users to log in using Domain Authentication.conf file.

The user’s BMC BladeLogic user name must match the user’s fully qualified Active Directory user name. You can skip this step unless you choose to use a different file name.Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication where fileName is the name of the blappserv_login.DEV. Requirements for User Names When using AD/Kerberos to authenticate end users.COM.MYCOMPANY. Cross-registration allows users to be authorized for RBAC roles. This file is essential for supporting Kerberos. Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database Users must be registered in both Active Directory and BMC BladeLogic’s RBACbased user database. By default AuthSvcKrb5LoginConfig is set to a value of blappserv_login. For information on adding users to RBAC. 5 Restart the Application Server.conf file. Only users authorized to use BMC BladeLogic should be entered into the BMC BladeLogic database. BMC BladeLogic documentation assumes you know how to add users to Active Directory.COM rather than filling in the name field with a value such as: mary Note that the user name mary@SUB1. you must ensure that domain user names stored in RBAC are fully qualified and that those names match the user names stored in the Active Directory.DEV. For example.DEV. Use RBAC to add users to the BMC BladeLogic database. Each BMC BladeLogic user name must be in the form: USER@DOMAIN where DOMAIN is the domain the user is registered in.MYCOMPANY. you would fill in the name field with a value such as: mary@SUB1.MYCOMPANY. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. 176 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .COM is a different user name than than mary or mary@SUB3.conf. if you are using RBAC or the bladduser utility to add a new BMC BladeLogic user.

that you can use to synchronize group information in Active Directory with role information in RBAC. These default users are assigned to the default roles RBACAdmins and BLAdmins. then. which has built-in authorizations to see data for all BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics sites. If you are using that default setup. In this example. Implementing Active Directory/Kerberos authentication The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service can authenticate users via Windows Active Directory single sign-on credentials or. To allow a user to log into the GlobalReportViewers role. the RBACAdmins role has the authorizations necessary to manage users and roles. For more information on this command. the user would also have to be registered in the Active Directory user registry for the domain SUB2. Otherwise.Implementing Active Directory/Kerberos authentication BMC BladeLogic provides a BLCLI command.MYCOMPANY. Logging on using default users and roles The BMC BladeLogic user database comes pre-provisioned with two default SRP users: RBACAdmin and BLAdmin. equivalently. you must use RBAC to add a fully qualified user name to the GlobalReportAdmins role. To allow a user to log into the BLAdmins role. see the BLCLI help. no user will be able to access the built-in roles. which has built-in authorizations to change permissions for all system objects in BMC BladeLogic. Windows single sign-on is based on the Kerberos authentication protocol. BLAdmins. a Kerberos user’s ticket granting ticket (TGT). If the BMC BladeLogic administrator intends to support AD/Kerberos authentication exclusively and disable SRP user authentication.DEV. and the GlobalReportViewers role.DEV. To allow a user to log into the GlobalReportAdmins role. RBACAdmin_ADK@SUB2. and GlobalReportAdmins—has at least one registered domain user assigned to that role. Windows Server 2003/2008 implements a Kerberos Key Chapter 4 Administering security 177 . respectively. when SRP authentication is disabled.MYCOMPANY. RBACRole:syncUsers. In a default installation. you must use RBAC to add a fully qualified user name to the BLAdmins role. you must use RBAC to add a fully qualified name to the GlobalReportViewers role. the administrator should log in as a user authorized for the RBACAdmins role and ensure that each of the four built-in roles—RBACAdmins.COM. The same issue applies to the BLAdmins role. the GlobalReportAdmins role. you can simply assign a fully qualified domain user name (for example. which has read access to all reports at all sites in a BMC BladeLogic installation. GlobalReportViewers.COM) to the RBACAdmins role. prior to disabling SRP.

In the context of Active Directory. the Kerberos TGT is also referred to as the domain user credential. Give this file and the SPN to the administrator of the Application Server hosting the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. The following sections describe those configuration tasks. In Windows single sign-on. The keying material used to generate and verify the request is derived from the user’s password. When a BMC BladeLogic authentication user interface (either the authentication user interface built into the BMC BladeLogic Console or the blcred utility) selects an AD/Kerberos authentication profile. the Authentication Service issues the authentication user interface a single sign-on credential.Overview of AD/Kerberos configuration tasks Distribution Center (KDC) as one of its default domain services. which the client stores in a local credential cache. relies on the Active Directory registry to store the names and passwords of registered users within its Kerberos realm. B Export the blauthsvc. the login client sends a request to the Active Directory KDC for a Kerberos Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT). Upon successful Kerberos authentication of the end user. it employs the end user's AD/Kerberos credentials to conduct a Kerberos protocol exchange with the Authentication Service. When a registered domain user logs into a client platform (Windows or UNIX). The request carries encrypted material that allows the KDC to authenticate the request. referred to as the Active Directory KDC. This Windows Server KDC. Configuring BMC BladeLogic authentication user interfaces and the Authentication Service to support AD/Kerberos authentication requires additional configuration beyond the default configuration of clients and servers. the Active Directory KDC responds by sending the client a limited-lifetime (typically 10 hours) user credential. the Active Directory domain controller or Kerberos KDC mediates the authentication of the end user to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. a Kerberos realm is an Active Directory domain.keytab file. In this exchange. BMC BladeLogic end users can use their AD/Kerberos credentials to authenticate themselves to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. This credential consists of a service ticket to the ticket granting service (the Ticket Granting Ticket) and an associated ticket granting service session key. Overview of AD/Kerberos configuration tasks This section provides a quick overview of the tasks you must perform to set up a BMC BladeLogic environment that supports user authentication via AD/Kerberos user credentials: 1 On the Active Directory KDC: A Create a user account for the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. 178 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . which BMC BladeLogic clients can use to establish secure sessions with the BMC BladeLogic Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service. After validating the request.

B Locate the Active Directory KDC for the service principal’s realm.conf file. making sure each user name includes the user’s Active Directory domain (user@DOMAIN.conf file. D Create a blclient_krb5. 3 On the BMC BladeLogic client: A Windows only: Update the Kerberos Registry Settings. C Create the blappserv_krb5. F UNIX only: Obtain a ticket granting ticket (TGT) for the client. These tasks are described in detail in “Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication” on page 184.Overview of AD/Kerberos configuration tasks These tasks are described in detail in “Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain” on page 180.conf file.conf file. G If you are using Network Shell to communicate directly with agents. 2 On the BMC BladeLogic Application Server: A Put the blauthsvc. E Define Authentication Service settings to support AD/Kerberos. F Add users to the BMC BladeLogic RBAC user database. D Create the blappserv_login.keytab file in the correct directory. These tasks are described in detail in “Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication” on page 194. B Create the blclient_login. Chapter 4 Administering security 179 . C Locate the Active Directory KDC for the client’s realm. set up a Network Shell Proxy Server. G Create an authentication profile using AD/Kerberos authentication. E Update the config.properties file.COM).

Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain

Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain
This section provides procedures that an administrator of an Active Directory KDC can use to register the Authentication Service associated with a BMC BladeLogic Application Server in an Active Directory domain. Refer to this section only if you want to employ AD/Kerberos user credentials to authenticate BMC BladeLogic end users to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. The following is a master procedure. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure.

NOTE
When you specify a domain name in any of the following steps, you must use UPPER CASE LETTERS. You may want to review the diagram in “Sample domain structure” on page 171 for an overview of the domain names and host names used in the examples in this section.

1 Review the required utilities that must be installed on the Active Directory server.
For more information, see “Requirements for the Active Directory server” on page 180.

2 Create an Active Directory user account for the Authentication Service associated
with an Application Server. For more information, see “Creating a user account in the domain of the Application Server” on page 181.

3 Export the user account and SPN information into a keytab file. After you create
the keytab file, you must give this file and the SPN to the administrator of the Application Server. For more information, see “Exporting the keytab file” on page 181.

Requirements for the Active Directory server
The following utilities must be installed on the Active Directory server:
■ ■

ktpass.exe (BMC BladeLogic recommends using version 5.2.3790.2732) setspn.exe

For Windows 2003, both of these utilities are provided as part of the Support Tools Service Pack 1. For Windows 2008 these utilities are provided as part of the core operating system.

180

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain

Creating a user account in the domain of the Application Server
Use this procedure to create a user account for the Authentication Service in the domain (that is, the Kerberos realm) where the BMC BladeLogic Application Server is running.

1 On a Windows 2003 or 2008 Server, from the Start menu, select Programs =>
Administrative Tools => Active Directory Users and Computers. The Active Directory Users and Computers window displays.

2 In the left column, expand the domain name for the BMC BladeLogic Application
Server so that it displays the Users folder.

3 Right click the Users folder and select New => User. The New Object – User wizard
displays.

4 For First name, enter a name, such as blauthsvc. For User logon name, enter the name
again. In this example, you would enter blauthsvc again.

5 Click Next. The second screen of the wizard displays, requesting password
information.

6 For Password, set the password to whatever you want. Be sure to use a password
that conforms to the Active Directory password policy. Then check Password never
expires.

7 Click Next. The final summary page of the wizard displays. 8 Click Finish to dismiss the wizard.

Exporting the keytab file
Use this procedure to export a keytab file from the Active Directory server. You must give the keytab file to the administrator of the BMC BladeLogic Application Server. The Application Server needs a keytab file because it holds keying material used for decrypting and validating the service ticket that the domain controller (that is, the KDC) issues to the client. When requesting a service ticket from the KDC, the client identifies the targeted server (that is, the Application Server) by the SPN. Because Kerberos employs mediated authentication for the mutual authentication of both the client and server, both the client and server must be registered with the KDC. The user is registered under a domain user name. The server is registered under an SPN.

Chapter 4

Administering security

181

Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain

The procedure varies depending on what version of Windows and what service pack you are using. If you are using a Windows 2008 without Service Pack 2, you must work around a Microsoft defect by using a different setup. This defect is corrected in Service Pack 2 for Windows 2008, and it does not affect Windows 2003.

Windows 2003 and Windows 2008 with Service Pack 2 1 Use the ktpass command-line utility to export the keytab file using the command
shown below. Run this utility in a directory suitable for writing a file with sensitive data.
ktpass -out blauthsvc.keytab -princ blauthsvc/instance@DOMAIN -mapuser blauthsvc@DOMAIN +rndPass -minPass 33

In this command, instance is the instance of this Application Server (typically a host name) and DOMAIN is the realm where the Application Server is running. (This is the realm/domain that appeared next to the User logon name when you created the blauthsvc user.) For example, if you used the example names shown in “Sample domain structure” on page 171, you would enter:
ktpass -out blauthsvc.keytab -princ blauthsvc/app4@SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM -mapuser blauthsvc@SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM +rndPass -minPass 33

2 Give the following to the administrator of the Application Server:

The newly created blauthsvc.keytab file. The blauthsvc.keytab file contains key material, so transfer it between systems with care. The Authentication Service needs this keytab to allow users to authenticate. The service principal name used in the keytab file. For example:
blauthsvc/app4

The name of the domain (that is, the Kerberos realm) for the Application Server. For example:
SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM

182

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain

Windows 2008 without Service Pack 2 1 On the command line, use the setspn utility to create a service principal name for
the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service by entering the following command:
setspn -A blauthsvc/instance blauthsvc

In this command, instance is the instance of this Application Server (typically a host name). For example, you can enter the following command:
setspn -A blauthsvc/app4 blauthsvc

2 Use the ktpass command-line utility to export the keytab file using the command
shown below. Run this utility in a directory suitable for writing a file with sensitive data.
ktpass -out blauthsvc.keytab -princ blauthsvc@DOMAIN -mapuser blauthsvc@DOMAIN +rndPass -minPass 33

For example, if you used the example names shown in “Sample domain structure” on page 171, you would enter:
ktpass -out blauthsvc.keytab -princ blauthsvc@SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM -mapuser blauthsvc@SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM +rndPass -minPass 33

Note that the -princ parameter identifies a user principal (blauthsvc) rather than a service principal name.

3 Give the following to the administrator of the Application Server:

The newly created blauthsvc.keytab file. The blauthsvc.keytab file contains key material, so transfer it between systems with care. The Authentication Service needs this keytab to allow users to authenticate. The user principal name used in the keytab file. For example:
blauthsvc

NOTE
The remainder of this guide assumes you are using a service principal name when setting up AD/Kerberos authentication. When this guide provides examples of a service principal name, it uses blauthsvc/app4. However, if you are using Windows 2008 without Service Pack 2, you must work around the Microsoft defect by using a user principal name instead of a service principal name. In that case, you should use blauthsvc instead of blauthsvc/app4.

Chapter 4

Administering security

183

Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication

The name of the domain (that is, the Kerberos realm) for the Application Server. For example:
SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM

Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication
Use this procedure to configure a BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service so BMC BladeLogic users can authenticate using the AD/Kerberos user credentials. The following is a master procedure. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure.

NOTE
When you specify a domain name in any of the following steps, you must use UPPER CASE LETTERS. You may want to review the diagram in “Sample domain structure” on page 171 for an overview of the domain names and host names used in the examples in this section.

1 If you have not done so already, perform the following prerequisite procedure:
“Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain” on page 180.

2 Review the information that is needed to perform subsequent steps. See “Required
information” on page 185.

3 Copy the keytab file to the Application Server. See “Copying the keytab file” on
page 185.

4 Obtain the host name of an Active Directory KDC for the service principal’s realm.
See “Locating the Active Directory KDC for the service principal’s domain” on page 186.

5 Create the blappserv_krb5.conf file, which provides essential configuration
information. See “Creating the blappserv_krb5.conf file” on page 186.

6 Create the blappserv_login.conf file, which provides the location of the keytab file.
See “Creating the blappserv_login.conf file” on page 188.

7 Configure the Authentication Service to support Kerberos. See “Defining
Authentication Service settings for AD/Kerberos” on page 191.

184

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication

8 Add user names based on Kerberos naming conventions to the RBAC user
database. See “Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 192.

9 If you are using Network Shell to communicate directly with agents, set up a
Network Shell Proxy Server to manage that traffic. See “Setting up a Network Shell Proxy Server” on page 193.

10 Add users to built-in roles. See “Logging on using default users and roles” on
page 194.

Required information
Before you start configuring an Authentication Service, you must obtain the following from the administrator of the Active Directory KDC:

The blauthsvc.keytab file. The service principal name used for the keytab file. For example:
blauthsvc/app4

The name of the service principal’s domain (Kerberos realm). For example:
SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM

For information about creating a user account, service principal name, and keytab file on the Active Directory KDC, see “Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain” on page 180.

Copying the keytab file
Use this procedure to copy the blauthsvc.keytab file you obtained from the Active Directory administrator to the correct location on the Application Server hosting the Authentication Service. For the Authentication Service to authenticate users through the AD/Kerberos user credentials, the Authentication Service must be able to accept KDC service tickets. To accept service tickets, the Authentication Service needs the service key in the blauthsvc.keytab file.

1 Locate the blauthsvc.keytab file that was exported from the Active Directory KDC. 2 Do one of the following:

On a UNIX-style system, copy the file to the /NSH/br directory.

Chapter 4

Administering security

185

Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication

For example, if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location, the file should be located here:
/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blauthsvc.keytab

On Windows, copy the file to the \NSH\br directory. For example, if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location, the file should be located here:
C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blauthsvc.keytab

Locating the Active Directory KDC for the service principal’s domain
Use this procedure to obtain the host name for the Active Directory KDC that is running in the realm where the keytab file for the service principal was created. Later in the configuration process, you will need this host name. From a command line, enter the following:
nslookup -type=srv _kerberos._tcp.SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN

In this command, SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN is the domain of the service principal. For example:
nslookup -type=srv _kerberos._tcp.SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM

The Active Directory KDC’s host name is reported as the value of service (UNIX) or svr hostname (Windows). For example:
service = 0 100 88 kdc.sub2.dev.mycompany.com

Ignore the numbers before the host name.

Creating the blappserv_krb5.conf file
Use this procedure to create a blappserv_krb5.conf file. This file provides necessary Kerberos configuration information.

NOTE
When identifying servers in the blappserv_krb5.conf file, do not use IP addresses. The Application Server must be able to resolve DNS names of Active Directory servers.

186

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

as described in “Locating the Active Directory KDC for the service principal’s domain” on page 186.MYCOMPANY. For example: SUB2.DEV.COM This is the value you got when you ran the nslookup command. For example: kdc.MYCOMPANY. In the “domain_realm” section.mycompany.MYCOMPANY.SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN = SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM In this text file: SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM is the realm where the keytab file was created.DEV.SUB2.dev.mycompany.mycompany.COM 2 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system. save the file to the /NSH/br directory with the name: blappserv_krb5.com = SUB2.com = DEV.COM .Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication 1 Create a text file like the following: [libdefaults] ticket_lifetime = 6000 default_realm = SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM [realms] SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM = { kdc = SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM_KDC:88 } [domain_realm] .dev. SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN provides DNS names.DEV.MYCOMPANY.MYCOMPANY.COM .com = SUB1.DEV.sub1.conf Chapter 4 Administering security 187 .sub2.COM SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM_KDC is the host name for the Active Directory KDC for the realm where the keytab file was created. For example: . A period before a DNS name indicates you are mapping every system with a DNS name ending with that value to a corresponding Kerberos realm.dev.

jgss. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.conf file to find the location of the keytab file. The Application Server looks in the blappserv_login.conf Creating the blappserv_login.sun. In this text file.conf file You must create a blappserv_login. the file should be located as follows: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blappserv_krb5. keyTab is the location of the blauthsvc. 1 Create a text file and add the following content to it: com. save the file to the \NSH\br directory with the name: blappserv_krb5. assuming BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. the file should be located as follows: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blappserv_krb5.keytab file on your system.security.conf For example.module.keytab" ■ On Windows.security. assuming BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.accept { com. the keyTab line would look like this: keyTab="/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blauthsvc.Krb5LoginModule required useKeyTab=true keyTab="keytabFileLocation" storeKey=true principal="blauthsvc/instance@DOMAIN" doNotPrompt=true debug=false.conf ■ On Windows. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. }.auth.conf file.sun. ■ On a UNIX-style system.Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication For example. the keyTab line would look like this: keyTab="C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blauthsvc.keytab" Be sure to use the double backslash syntax shown above. 188 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication In the text file.COM" If you do not have the service principal name and the Application Server’s realm.conf. save the file to the /NSH/br directory with the name: blappserv_login.COM" If you are using Windows 2008 without Service Pack 2. principal is the service principal name for the Authentication Service.DEV.conf ■ On Windows. For example: principal="blauthsvc/app4@SUB2. For example: principal="blauthsvc4@SUB2. followed by the Application Server’s domain.MYCOMPANY.conf Using klist to read the keytab file You can use the klist utility to read the keytab file and display the name and realm of the service principal. followed by the @ sign.DEV. the file should be located as follows: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blappserv_login. 2 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system. enter the following: Chapter 4 Administering security 189 . For example. In other words. save the file to the \NSH\br directory with the name blappserv_login. See “Using klist to read the keytab file” on page 189. use blauthsvc instead of blauthsvc/app4. you can use the klist utility to display them. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. you should enter a user principal name rather than a service principal name.MYCOMPANY. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. the file should be located as follows: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blappserv_login.conf. For example. You obtained the service principal name from the Active Directory administrator. 1 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system.

see “Creating the blappserv_krb5. enter the following: "C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\jre\bin\klist" -t -k "C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blauthsvc.keytab" 2 The klist utility displays output similar to the following: Service principal: blauthsvc/app4@SUB2. If you do not have klist installed on a UNIX system. but BMC BladeLogic recommends performing this step to confirm that you have successfully set up authentication based on AD/Kerberos. There are many online sources for Kerberos utilities such as klist.DEV.keytab In this command. Verifying a keytab file Use this procedure to verify that the keytab file you have generated can be used to authenticate. 2 Identify the service account name from the keytab file by entering one of the following: ■ Windows: installDirectory\jre\bin\klist -k -t keytabFile UNIX: utilityPath/klist -k -t keytabFile ■ 190 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .DEV. you must first obtain it.COM. This procedure is not essential.conf file you set up for the Authentication Server to one of the following locations: ■ Windows: %WINDIR%\krb5. 1 Copy the blappserv_krb5.MYCOMPANY.COM The service principal name is blauthsvc/app4@SUB2.Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication utilityPath/klist -t -k /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blauthsvc. ■ On Windows.MYCOMPANY.conf file. utilityPath provides the path to the klist utility.conf ■ ■ For more information on the blappserv_krb5.conf All UNIX platforms except Solaris: /etc/krb5. assuming that BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.conf file” on page 186.ini Solaris: /etc/krb5/krb5.

For example. There are many online sources for Kerberos utilities such as klist.conf is correct. from the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. you must first obtain it. keytabFile is set to installDirectory/br. The variable keytabFile identifies the location of the keytab file you are generating.DEV. 3 Using the results of the previous step. you must first obtain it./bin/blasadmin Chapter 4 Administering security 191 . enter the following: . To perform this procedure. Typically. Defining Authentication Service settings for AD/Kerberos Use this procedure to define settings for the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service so it can use the Kerberos configurations you set up in previous procedures.COM.MYCOMPANY. If the command does not succeed. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console by doing one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system. utilityPath provides the path to the kinit utility. if you used the example names shown in “Sample domain structure” on page 171.keytab Running the klist command generates output that identifies the service principal. If you do not have klist installed on a UNIX system. the keytab file for Windows would be C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\blauthsvc. For example. you must use the Application Server Administration console. utilityPath provides the path to the klist utility. this command might identify a service principal called blauthsvc/ app4@SUB2. you should be able to authenticate with AD/ Kerberos. verify that the default_realm you have set up in blappserv_krb5. If this command runs successfully.Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication In this command. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. authenticate to Active Directory by entering one of the following: ■ Windows: installDirectory\jre\bin\kinit -k -t keytabFile servicePrincipal UNIX: utilityPath/kinit -k -t keytabFile servicePrincipal ■ In this command. If you do not have kinit installed on a UNIX system. The variable keytabFile identifies the location of the keytab file and servicePrincipal is the entity identified in the previous step.

3 To enable the blappserv_krb5. By default AuthSvcKrb5Config is set to a value of blappserv_krb5. This file is essential for supporting Kerberos. enter the following: set AuthServer AuthSvcKrb5Config fileName where fileName is the name of the blappserv_krb5.conf. select Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Utilities => Application Server Administration.conf file.conf file. Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database Users must be registered in both Active Directory and BMC BladeLogic’s RBACbased user database.conf file. enter the following: set AuthServer AuthSvcKrb5LoginConfig fileName where fileName is the name of the blappserv_login.conf. You can skip this step unless you choose to use a different file name.conf file. 5 Restart the Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111). By default AuthSvcKrb5LoginConfig is set to a value of blappserv_login. 2 To enable Active Directory/Kerberos authentication. Cross-registration allows users to be authorized for RBAC roles. 4 To enable the blappserv_login. enter the following: set AuthServer IsADKAuthEnabled true By default Active Directory/Kerberos authentication is not turned on. You can skip this step unless you choose to use a different file name. 192 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . — From the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. enter the following: \bin\blasadmin. do one of the following: — From the Start menu. This file is essential for supporting Kerberos.exe Both options run the same command.Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication ■ On Windows.

that you can use to synchronize group information in Active Directory with role information in RBAC.DEV. Setting up a Network Shell Proxy Server If you cross-register users in Active Directory and RBAC and then you run an ACL Push Job on a server. you must ensure that domain user names stored in RBAC are fully qualified and that those names match the user names stored in the Active Directory.DEV. For information on adding users to RBAC. The user’s BMC BladeLogic user name must match the user’s fully qualified Active Directory user name. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. see the BLCLI help.COM). you would fill in the name field with a value such as: mary@SUB1.MYCOMPANY.MYCOMPANY.MYCOMPANY. BMC BladeLogic provides a BLCLI command. For more information on this command.DEV.COM. RBACRole:syncUsers. Network Shell user names do not include domain information. if you are using RBAC or the bladduser utility to add a new BMC BladeLogic user.MYCOMPANY.COM is a different user name than than mary or mary@SUB3.COM rather than filling in the name field with a value such as: mary Note that the user name mary@SUB1. For example. BMC BladeLogic documentation assumes you know how to add users to Active Directory.Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication Only users authorized to use BMC BladeLogic should be entered into the BMC BladeLogic database.DEV. Use RBAC to add users to the BMC BladeLogic database. Each BMC BladeLogic user name must be in the form: USER@DOMAIN where DOMAIN is the domain the user is registered in. Chapter 4 Administering security 193 . Requirements for User Names When using AD/Kerberos to authenticate end users. Network Shell users may not be able to communicate directly with the agent on that server because the agent will expect user names to include domain information (such as mary@SUB1.

To allow a user to log into the GlobalReportAdmins role. see “Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service” on page 142. respectively.COM. The same issue applies to the BLAdmins role. you must use RBAC to add a fully qualified user name to the BLAdmins role. the user would also have to be registered in the Active Directory user registry for the domain SUB2. you must use RBAC to add a fully qualified name to the GlobalReportViewers role.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication To avoid this problem and maintain communication with agents via Network Shell. which has read access to all reports at all sites in a BMC BladeLogic installation.MYCOMPANY. then.DEV. In this example. no user will be able to access the built-in roles. These default users are assigned to the default roles RBACAdmins and BLAdmins. and GlobalReportAdmins—has at least one registered domain user assigned to that role. prior to disabling SRP. To allow a user to log into the BLAdmins role. For more information. Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication This section describes how to configure a BMC BladeLogic client (the BMC BladeLogic Console or the blcred utility) to authenticate with a BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service using AD/Kerberos user credentials. RBACAdmin_ADK@SUB2. you can simply assign a fully qualified domain user name (for example. 194 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . BLAdmins. which has built-in authorizations to see data for all BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics sites. Logging on using default users and roles The BMC BladeLogic user database comes pre-provisioned with two default SRP users: RBACAdmin and BLAdmin. In a default installation. and the GlobalReportViewers role.COM) to the RBACAdmins role. If you are using that default setup.MYCOMPANY. when SRP authentication is disabled.DEV. the GlobalReportAdmins role. To allow a user to log into the GlobalReportViewers role. the RBACAdmins role has the authorizations necessary to manage users and roles. which has built-in authorizations to change permissions for all system objects in BMC BladeLogic. Otherwise. GlobalReportViewers. set up a Network Shell Proxy Server. If the BMC BladeLogic administrator intends to support AD/Kerberos authentication exclusively and disable SRP user authentication. the administrator should log in as a user authorized for the RBACAdmins role and ensure that each of the four built-in roles—RBACAdmins. you must use RBAC to add a fully qualified user name to the GlobalReportAdmins role.

See “Creating the blclient_krb5. See “Performing Windows-only client configuration tasks” on page 196. update registry settings and perform other configuration tasks. The following is a master procedure. This step provides information that is needed for subsequent steps in this procedure. See “Locating the Active Directory KDC for the client’s domain” on page 197.conf file. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.properties file. For UNIX environments.properties file” on page 200. 1 If you have not done so already. perform the following prerequisite procedures: ■ “Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain” on page 180 “Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication” on page 184 ■ 2 For Windows clients. You may want to review the diagram in “Sample domain structure” on page 171 for an overview of the domain names and host names used in the examples in this section. When a Windows user logs into the Active Directory. the equivalent of a “kinit” is performed automatically. 3 Create the blclient_login. which provides essential configuration data. 7 For UNIX clients. each user must manually perform a kinit to obtain a ticketgranting ticket (TGT). a user must also define an authentication profile that calls for AD/Kerberos authentication. For more information on defining authentication profiles. See “Updating the config.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication In addition to the procedures described here. See “Creating the blclient_login. 5 Create a blclient_krb5. you must use UPPER CASE LETTERS. Chapter 4 Administering security 195 . 8 Set up authentication profiles using AD/Kerberos authentication on the BMC BladeLogic client. 6 Update the BMC BladeLogic config.conf file” on page 196. See “Obtaining a TGT for a BMC BladeLogic client (UNIX only)” on page 201. See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. 4 Locate the Active Directory KDC for the client’s realm. skip this step.conf file. NOTE When you specify a domain name in any of the following steps. which provides essential Kerberos configuration information. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure.conf file” on page 198.

3. Open the Windows Registry Editor. Reboot the workstation. 4. It should be named allowtgtsessionkey and it should have a value of 1. 3. 2. 4. Create a new registry value of type REG_DWORD. 5. skip this section. Open the Windows Registry Editor. Navigate to \HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Lsa\Kerberos. 3. Open the Windows Registry Editor.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication Performing Windows-only client configuration tasks Use this procedure to modify registry settings and perform other configuration tasks on Windows client machines. If you are configuring a UNIX-style system. Disable User Account Control (UAC). 2. 2. 196 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Navigate to \HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Lsa\Kerberos\ Parameters. Create a new registry value of type REG_DWORD. Navigate to \HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Lsa\Kerberos\ Parameters. Do one of the following: Platform Windows 2003 and 2008 Actions 1. This file provides necessary configuration information. Create a new registry value of type REG_DWORD. Windows XP 1. Creating the blclient_login. This procedure is only necessary in Windows environments.conf file Use this procedure to create the blclient_login.conf file. Reboot the server. Windows Vista 1. It should be named allowtgtsessionkey and it should have a value of 1. It should be named allowtgtsessionkey and it should have a value of 1.

enter the following: nslookup -type=srv _kerberos. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.MYCOMPANY.sun.conf ■ On Windows. From a command line.conf.sun.initiate { com. 2 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system._tcp. For example: nslookup -type=srv _kerberos. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.auth.Krb5LoginModule required doNotPrompt=true Debug=false useTicketCache=true. }.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication 1 Create a text file and add the following content to it: com._tcp.conf Locating the Active Directory KDC for the client’s domain Use this procedure to obtain the host name for the Active Directory KDC that is running in the domain that includes the client machine.DEV. save the file to the /NSH/br directory with the name: blclient_login.CLIENT_DOMAIN where CLIENT_DOMAIN is the domain containing the user’s workstation where the client is running.jgss.SUB1. For example. For example.security. You will need this host name later in the configuration process. the file should be located as follows: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blclient_login. the file should be located as follows: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blclient_login.security.COM Chapter 4 Administering security 197 .conf.module. save the file to the \NSH\br directory with the name: blclient_login.

conf file Use this procedure to create the blclient_krb5. This file provides necessary Kerberos configuration information.COM 198 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . For example: service = 0 100 88 kdc.PARENT_DOMAIN = PARENT_REALM In this text file: CLIENT_DOMAIN is the realm containing the user’s workstation.sub1.CLIENT_DOMAIN = CLIENT_REALM .COM CLIENT_DOMAIN_KDC is the host name where the Active Directory server is running in your client’s realm.MYCOMPANY.DEV. where the BMC BladeLogic client is running.MYCOMPANY.com Ignore the numbers before the host name.SUB1.conf file. For example: kdc.DEV. 1 Create a text file like the following: [libdefaults] ticket_lifetime = 6000 default_realm = CLIENT_DOMAIN [realms] CLIENT_DOMAIN = { kdc = CLIENT_DOMAIN_KDC:88 } SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN = { kdc = SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN_KDC:88 } PARENT_DOMAIN = { kdc = PARENT_DOMAIN_KDC:88 } [domain_realm] . Creating the blclient_krb5. For example: SUB1.dev.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication The Active Directory KDC’s host name is reported as the value of svr host name (Windows) or service (UNIX).SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN = SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM .mycompany.

conf. For example: SUB2. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.dev. A period before a DNS name indicates you are mapping every system with a DNS name ending with that value to a corresponding Kerberos realm. save the file to the /NSH/br directory with the name: blclient_krb5.DEV.com = SUB1. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. For example: .MYCOMPANY.COM . the file should be located as follows: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blclient_krb5.DEV.MYCOMPANY.mycompany.COM 2 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system.MYCOMPANY.dev. save the file to the \NSH\br directory with the name blclient_krb5. SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN provides DNS names.com = SUB2.conf ■ On Windows.dev. the file should be located as follows: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blclient_krb5. In the “domain_realm” section. For example.mycompany.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication This is the value you obtained when you ran the nslookup command.conf Chapter 4 Administering security 199 .sub1.COM .DEV.MYCOMPANY.DEV. as described in “Locating the Active Directory KDC for the service principal’s domain” on page 186. SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN is the realm where the keytab file was created.MYCOMPANY.conf.com = DEV. For example. For example: kdc.COM SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN_KDC is the host name where the Active Directory server is running in the realm where the keytab file was created.mycompany.SUB2. as described in “Locating the Active Directory KDC for the client’s domain” on page 197.COM This is the value you obtained when you ran the nslookup command.sub2.

By default.DEV. a copy of config. the [realms] section would look something like this: [realms] SUB1.DEV.DEV. 1 Open the config.MYCOMPANY. you must add additional DOMAINS to the [realms] section of the blclient_krb5.COM:88 } DEV.DEV.conf file.COM:88 } SUB2.MYCOMPANY.COM = { kdc = kdc.COM = { kdc = kdc.COM:88 } Updating the config.MYCOMPANY. In this case.COM and SUB2. assume that there is no direct trust between the child domains SUB1. These additional DOMAINS specify the explicit path you need to traverse from the first child domain.COM.properties ■ Windows systems: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ config.MYCOMPANY.properties file on the BMC BladeLogic client.DEV.MYCOMPANY.properties file.MYCOMPANY.MYCOMPANY.COM = { kdc = kdc. up the tree to the root domain and back down to the other child domain.SUB1.properties When a user runs the console for the first time.SUB2.MYCOMPANY. using the examples in “Sample domain structure” on page 171. this file is initially stored in the following location: ■ UNIX-style systems: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/config.properties file Use this procedure to modify the config.properties 200 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .DEV. For example.DEV.bladelogic/config.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication NOTE If there is no direct trust between the two child domains.properties is placed in the following user-specific location: ■ UNIX-style systems: userHomeDirectory /.

conf= javax. you can use a backslash as a path separator but you must escape it with another backslash (such as.conf In this entry.krb5. you can use a backslash as a path separator but you must escape it with another backslash (such as. java. path/blclient_krb5. 2 Set the following entries to the values shown below. C\:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blclient_login. For Windows paths.conf).security. use forward slashes as path delimiters (such as. Note that in either case you must use a backslash to escape the colon and backslash after the drive letter. C\:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blclient_krb5.conf).security. Alternatively.conf file. C\:\Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/ version/NSH/br/blclient_login.conf file. C\:\Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/ version/NSH/br/blclient_krb5. this procedure is not necessary.security. If an entry does not already exist in the config. add it at the end of the file. Entry java.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication ■ Windows systems: userHomeDirectory\Application Data\BladeLogic\config. The TGT is the AD/Kerberos user credential that domain users need to authenticate with the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. If a user already has a valid TGT.properties If you are setting up an AD/Kerberos environment that many users are sharing (for example.properties in both locations—its initial location and in your own user-specific location.login.auth. path is the full path to the blclient_login.properties file.conf In this entry.config= Value path/blclient_login. you should modify config. This procedure must be performed every time a user needs a TGT on a UNIX client. For Windows paths. use forward slashes as path delimiters (such as.useSubjectCredsOnly= false Obtaining a TGT for a BMC BladeLogic client (UNIX only) Users of the BMC BladeLogic Console and the blcred utility running on a UNIX-style host must manually run a kinit to obtain a ticket-gathering ticket (TGT). Chapter 4 Administering security 201 . a terminal server) and you have already run the BMC BladeLogic Console. Alternatively. Note that in either case you must use a backslash to escape the colon and backslash after the drive letter.conf).auth. typically a TGT is valid for 10 hours.conf). Although the life span of a TGT is configurable. path is the full path to the blclient_krb5.

provision all targeted agents or repeaters with an SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate.conf. you should repeat this procedure for each Application Server.conf to /etc/krb5.conf file. 2 To obtain a TGT.conf. then you must integrate the contents of blclient_krb5. The name you provide is associated with the client’s realm. If you are using a Windows client. Implementing security – Application Server to agents or repeaters This section provides the following procedures to secure access between the BMC BladeLogic Application Server and RSCD agents or repeaters by employing TLS client authentication: ■ ■ TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server Use this procedure to generate a self-signed. If you are not already using krb5.Implementing security – Application Server to agents or repeaters This procedure is only necessary in UNIX-style environments. identified when you created the client’s blclient_krb5. If you do not have kinit installed.conf with the contents of krb5. The user name you provide for the kinit command does not have to be fully qualified. you can replace the existing version of krb5. 202 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .conf. If your environment includes multiple Application Servers. utilityPath provides the path to the kinit utility.conf by renaming the copy of blclient_krb5. 1 Copy blclient_krb5.conf. you must first obtain it. skip this procedure. client-side certificate for a Windows Application Server. If you already use krb5. run the following command: utilityPath/kinit userName In this command.conf. and configure those agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests using client-side certificates. There are many online sources for Kerberos utilities such as kinit.

client-side certificate on the Windows Application Server. 3 Configure all targeted agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests using client-side certificates. In the path shown above. generate a self-signed Application Server certificate by entering the following: Chapter 4 Administering security 203 . see “TLS with client-side certs – Discontinuing use of client-side certificates” on page 210. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure. The procedure for a Network Shell Proxy Server is identical to the procedure for an Application Server. See “Provisioning agents and repeaters with a SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate” on page 204. WINDIR is typically winnt (on a Windows 2000 server) or windows. See “Configuring agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates” on page 206. 3 Using a command line. Then add the passphrase used to encrypt the private key to the securecert file on the Application Server. Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the Application Server Use this procedure to create a file called id. 1 Log into a Windows Application Server as Administrator.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server Note that in the context of this section. which contains the self-signed certificate for the Application Server and the private key associated with the certificate. You can use this procedure to use TLS with client-side certificates to secure communication between a Windows-based Network Shell Proxy Server and agents or repeaters. See “Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the Application Server” on page 203. a “client” refers to an Application Server that is attempting to establish contact with the server hosting an agent. Then add the passphrase for that certificate to the securecert file. 2 Provision all targeted agents or repeaters with an SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate. If you want to stop using self-signed. The following is a master procedure. client-side certificates. 2 Create a directory called C:\WINDIR\rsc\certs\SYSTEM. in BMC BladeLogic documentation a “client” refers to a host running the BMC BladeLogic Console or Network Shell.pem. Generally. 1 Create a self-signed.

or update. If additional instances of BMC BladeLogic are installed. you are prompted to provide and then confirm a passphrase. the contents of the securecert file are updated to something like the following. To accomplish this. 1 Ensure that the secure file on all managed servers is configured so that tls_mode=encryption_only. generate this setting by running the following secadmin command on each agent: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Before you can provision a managed server with the fingerprint of the Application Server’s certificate.pem file is created in the C:\WINDIR\rsc\certs\SYSTEM directory. This file contains the SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate. The secure file (located in the C:\WINDIR\rsc directory on a Windows server and in /usr/lib/rsc on a UNIX-style server) must have the rscd entry set to the following when deploying the certificate fingerprint: 204 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . [default] SYSTEM=FCUVOMLNGLVRZNOO For the initial installation of BMC BladeLogic. you must ensure that the secure file on the agent or repeater is configured correctly. If necessary.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server bl_gen_ssl -appcert After you enter the command.pem file. use the command line to enter the following: secadmin -m default -cu SYSTEM -cp passPhrase After issuing this command. Provisioning agents and repeaters with a SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate Use this procedure to create. This passphrase is used to encrypt the private key in the id. you can find the securecert file in the C:\WINDIR\rsc directory. the default location for the second instance of BMC BladeLogic would be C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic2\version\NSH. The id. the agent or repeater will refuse the incoming connection because it will not have the SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed cert. The encoded passphrase will vary. you can find securecert in installDirectoryN\version\NSH\conf\securecert. 4 Update the securecert file to include an encoded copy of the passphrase. An agent or repeater uses this fingerprint to validate the selfsigned certificate received from the Application Server in the course of the TLS handshake. If you prematurely set the rscd entry in a secure file so that tls_mode=encrytion_and_auth. on each managed server and repeater a file named SYSTEM. For example.

agentN where agent1. This command creates or updates a fingerprint file on each targeted agent or repeater. such as the IP address or host name of the Application Server. 2 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent.. on a UNIX machine. 4 Push the SHA1 fingerprint to managed servers by entering the following command: putcert SYSTEM id. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator. you should replace the host wildcard (“*”) with a more restrictive setting.. you must have root or Administrator privileges on the server hosting the agent.pem agent1. the fingerprint file for a Windows Application Server is /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/certs/SYSTEM. so in most situations there is no need to perform this step. Chapter 4 Administering security 205 . Performing this procedure for each of those Application Servers generates multiple fingerprints in the SYSTEM file.agentN is a space-delimited list of the host names or IP addresses of the managed servers hosting agents or repeaters. the fingerprint file for a Window Application Server is C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\RSCD\certs\ SYSTEM. you should provision each Application Server with its own self-signed certificate. To provision an agent or repeater with the SHA1 fingerprint of an Application Server’s certificate.user=root To be safe. 3 Using a command line on the Application Server. In environments where multiple Application Servers communicate with agents. the directory containing the id. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw.. To grant this privilege. cd to C:\WINDIR\rsc\certs\ SYSTEM. 5 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping.. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw.user=Administrator On a UNIX server. On a Windows machine.pem file. Otherwise.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls This is the default setting after a fresh installation of an agent.

The procedure for a Network Shell Proxy Server is identical to the procedure for an Application Server. the secure files on those agents must be updated so tls_mode=encryption_and_auth. a “client” refers to an Application Server that is attempting to establish contact with the server hosting an agent. You can use this procedure to use TLS with client-side certificates to secure communication between a UNIX-based Network Shell Proxy Server and agents or repeaters. use Network Shell to enter the following secadmin command: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_and_auth -e tls This procedure is also necessary if you are configuring a repeater to authenticate incoming requests from an Application Server. see “TLS with client-side certs – Discontinuing use of client-side certificates” on page 210. If you want to stop using self-signed. The following is a master procedure. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure. and configure those agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests using client-side certificates. TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server Use this procedure to generate a self-signed.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server Configuring agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates Use this procedure to update the rscd entry in each agent's secure file so it reads as follows: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_and_auth:encryption=tls After agents are provisioned with the SHA1 fingerprint of an Application Server’s self-signed certificate. Generally. To modify the rscd entry in the secure file on each targeted agent. client-side certificates. client-side certificate for a UNIX-based Application Server. This section is intended for administrators of BMC BladeLogic Application Servers. in BMC BladeLogic documentation a “client” refers to a host running the BMC BladeLogic Console or Network Shell. Note that in the context of this section. This setting requires client authentication via clientside certificates. provision all targeted agents or repeaters with an SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate. 206 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

bladelogic directory.pem.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server 1 Create a self-signed client-side certificate on the UNIX Application Server. See “Configuring agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates” on page 209. See “Creating a selfsigned client-side certificate on the Application Server” on page 207. Then add the passphrase used to encrypt the private key to the securecert file on the Application Server.pem file is generated.pem file is created in the bladminUserHome/. The id. Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the Application Server Use this procedure to create a file called id. In UNIX the Application Server runs as the bladmin user.pem file or the . This passphrase is used to encrypt the private key in the id. you are prompted to provide and then confirm a passphrase. and then enter the following command: su . 3 Enter exit to revert back to the root user. 3 Configure all targeted agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests using client-side certificates. where the id. 2 Provision all targeted agents or repeaters with an SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate. use Network Shell to enter the following: secadmin -m default -cu bladmin -cp passPhrase Chapter 4 Administering security 207 .bladelogic directory. BMC BladeLogic will not load the certificate if group or world permissions are set for the id.pem file. Then add the passphrase for that certificate to the securecert file. To accomplish this.bladmin This command logs you in as the bladmin user. which contains the self-signed certificate for the Application Server and the private key associated with the certificate. 2 Enter the following command: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/bin/bl_gen_ssl After entering the command. See “Provisioning agents and repeaters with a SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate” on page 208. 4 Update the securecert file (contained in the /usr/lib/rsc directory) to contain an encoded copy of the passphrase. 1 Log into the UNIX system on the Application Server as root.

generate this setting by running the following secadmin command on each agent: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Before you can provision a managed server with the fingerprint of the Application Server’s certificate. the agent or repeater will refuse the incoming connection because it will not have the SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed cert. or update. The secure file (located in the C:\WINDIR\rsc directory on a Windows server and in /usr/lib/rsc on a UNIX-style server) must have the rscd entry set to the following when deploying the certificate fingerprint: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls This is the default setting after a fresh installation of an agent. 208 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . [default] bladmin=FCUVOMLNGLVRZNOO 5 Ensure that access is restricted to the id.pem Provisioning agents and repeaters with a SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate Use this procedure to create. you must ensure that the secure file on the agent or repeater is configured correctly.bladelogic chmod 600 /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/. If you prematurely set the rscd entry in a secure file so that tls_mode=encrytion_and_auth. the contents of the securecert file are updated to something like the following. 2 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent.bladelogic/id. 1 Ensure that the secure file on all managed servers is configured so that tls_mode=encryption_only. If necessary. This file contains the SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate.bladelogic directory by running the following commands: chmod 700 /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server After issuing this command. so in most situations there is no need to perform this step. on each managed server or repeater a file named bladmin.pem file and the . An agent or repeater uses this fingerprint to validate the selfsigned certificate received from the Application Server in the course of the TLS handshake. The encoded passphrase will vary.

the fingerprint file for a Window Application Server is C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\RSCD\certs\ bladmin. on a UNIX machine. 5 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw. Configuring agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates Use this procedure to update the rscd entry in each agent's secure file so it reads as follows: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_and_auth:encryption=tls Chapter 4 Administering security 209 . you should provision each Application Server with its own self-signed certificate. 4 Push the SHA1 fingerprint to managed servers by entering the following command: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/sbin/putcert bladmin id. the directory containing the id.user=root To be safe.. you should replace the host wildcard (“*”) with a more restrictive setting.pem agent1.agentN where agent1.. cd to /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/ NSH/br/.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server To provision an agent or repeater with the SHA1 fingerprint of an Application Server’s certificate.. In environments where multiple Application Servers communicate with agents. Otherwise. 3 Using a command line on the Application Server. This command creates or updates a fingerprint file on each targeted agent or repeater.. the fingerprint file for a Windows Application Server is /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/certs/bladmin. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator.pem file.bladelogic. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw. such as the IP address or host name of the Application Server. Performing this procedure for each of those Application Servers generates multiple fingerprints in the bladmin file.agentN is a space-separated list of the host names or IP addresses of the managed servers hosting agents or repeaters. you must have root or Administrator privileges on the server hosting the agent. On a Windows machine.user=Administrator On a UNIX server. To grant this privilege.

user=root To be safe. To grant this privilege.user=Administrator On a UNIX server. 1 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent or repeater. you must have root or Administrator privileges on any servers hosting agents or repeaters where you want to discontinue use of clientside certificates..agentN where SYSTEM|bladmin is SYSTEM for a Windows Application Server or bladmin for a UNIX Application Server and agent1. use Network Shell to enter the following secadmin command: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_and_auth -e tls This procedure is also necessary if you are configuring a repeater to authenticate incoming requests from an Application Server... update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw. 2 Remove the SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate from managed servers by entering the following command: nukecert SYSTEM|bladmin agent1.agentN is a space-delimited list of the names or IP addresses of the servers where you want to stop using the Application Server’s self-signed certificate. you may want to replace the host wildcard (“*”) with the IP address or host name of the Network Shell client. the secure files on those agents must be updated so tls_mode=encryption_and_auth. To perform this procedure.. 210 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . TLS with client-side certs – Discontinuing use of client-side certificates Use this procedure to stop using client-side certificates that secure access between Application Servers and agents or repeaters. This setting requires client authentication via clientside certificates. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw. To modify the rscd entry in the secure file on each targeted agent.TLS with client-side certs – Discontinuing use of client-side certificates After agents are provisioned with the SHA1 fingerprint of an Application Server’s self-signed certificate.

Implementing security – Network Shell to agent This section provides procedures to secure access between Network Shell clients and servers hosting RSCD agents.bladelogic directory for UNIX Application Servers. the bladmin directory can be found at /opt/bmc/ BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/. Typically administrators use the exports file to limit Network Shell client access to agents by restricting access to certain client IP addresses. For UNIX Application Servers. see “Exports file” on page 240. The following options are available: ■ ■ No authentication – Using a default installation TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client No authentication – Using a default installation A standard installation of BMC BladeLogic requires no user authentication between Network Shell clients and servers hosting agents.Implementing security – Network Shell to agent 3 Configure the secure file on all agents or repeaters where you want to stop using certificates by using Network Shell to run the following secadmin command: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Running this command generates an rscd entry in the secure file like the following: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls 4 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator. Chapter 4 Administering security 211 .bladelogic. Otherwise. 5 Remove certificates from Application Servers by deleting the SYSTEM directory for Windows Application Servers or the . For more information on using the exports file. the SYSTEM directory can be found at C:\ WINDIR\rsc\certs\SYSTEM. For Windows Application Servers.

see “Discontinuing use of client-side certificates” on page 216. That file contains the client’s digital certificate and the corresponding private key. which is encrypted using a password supplied when the self-signed certificate is created. BMC BladeLogic will not load the certificate if group or world permissions are set for the id. If necessary. The SHA1 fingerprint is written into fingerprint files on the agents. On UNIX machines running Network Shell clients. 1 Ensure that the secure file is configured correctly on all agents where you want to set up secure access. During the TLS handshake. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.pem.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client Use this procedure to generate a self-signed. The BMC BladeLogic installation program for the Application Server tests whether a machine has the capability to generate random numbers. This procedure creates a file on the client called id. where the id.pem file (certificate and corresponding private key) and the agents uses the SHA1 fingerprint.bladelogic directory. At this point in the procedure the rscd entry in the secure file should be set to tls_mode=encryption_only. 212 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . For more information. client-side certificates. the client uses the contents of the id. client-side certificate for a Windows Network Shell client. NOTE The machine where you are creating a certificate must have the capability to generate random numbers. Then this procedure calculates the SHA1 fingerprint of the client certificate and pushes it to targeted agents using the putcert utility.pem file or the . The installation program also allows you to install a daemon or create a random number seed that BMC BladeLogic uses for generating random numbers. generate this setting by running the following secadmin command on each agent: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls This is the default setting after a fresh installation of an agent. provision all targeted agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the self-signed certificate. Later in this procedure you will change the tls_mode setting. If you want to stop using self-signed. so in many situations there is no need to perform this step.pem file is generated. 2 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent. and configure those agents to authenticate incoming requests using client-side certificates.

BMC BladeLogic generates a self-signed certificate in a file named id. In Windows.user=Administrator On a UNIX server. you must have root or Administrator privileges on the server hosting the agent. you should replace the host wildcard (“*”) with the IP address or host name of the Network Shell client. To grant this privilege.pem is stored in /userHomeDirectory /.bladelogic directory by running the following commands: chmod 700 /home/userName/. 3 Using a command line on the Network Shell client. where userHomeDirectory is the user’s home directory.pem. id. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw. id. agentN where userName is the name of the user who created the certificate and agent1 .. 5 Cd to the directory where id. Chapter 4 Administering security 213 . where userProfileDirectory specifies a path such as /Documents and Settings/userName. ensure that access is restricted to the id. generate a self-signed certificate by entering the following: bl_gen_ssl 4 Enter a passphrase.pem agent1 . such as /home/userName.. Then confirm the passphrase by entering it again.pem 7 Push the SHA1 fingerprint of the self-signed certificate to managed servers by entering the following command: putcert userName id. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw.bladelogic chmod 600 /home/userName/..bladelogic/id.. In UNIX.bladelogic.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client To provision an agent with the SHA1 fingerprint of a client’s certificate.user=root To be safe. The passphrase is used to encrypt the private key in the id.pem file and the . 6 For UNIX machines running Network Shell clients.pem file. agentN is a space-delimited list of the names or IP addresses of the servers to which you want to push the certificate.pem is stored.pem is stored in /userProfileDirectory/Application Data /BladeLogic.

The procedure is the same as the procedure for Application Servers. Network Shell decrypts and caches your private key. see “Caching private keys” on page 214. BMC BladeLogic provides a password mechanism. BMC BladeLogic provides a private key cache so users do not have to retype their passwords every time they start a new Network Shell session. anyone gaining access to the file can assume the identity of the user named in the certificate. You can also use these procedures to set up client-side certificates on Network Shell Proxy Servers. Otherwise. 8 Modify the rscd entry in the secure file on each targeted agent by entering the following secadmin command: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_and_auth -e tls NOTE Performing this step could have implications for Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers when they communicate with the same targeted agents. Once you provide the password. Caching private keys A client certificate and its associated private key (that is. 214 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . For more information. When an id. On a UNIX agent.pem file) constitute a user credential that the holder of the credential can use to assume the identity of the user named within the credential.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client This command creates or updates a fingerprint file on each targeted agent. To keep private keys safe. The procedure for activating the private key cache varies for Windows and UNIX-style systems. the private key is encrypted using the password you provide when you run the bl_gen_ssl utility. For information on setting up client-side certificates on these entities. the contents of the id. the system prompts you for your private key password. see “TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server” on page 202 or “TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server” on page 206. C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\RSCD\certs \userName is the fingerprint file. 10 If you plan to use Network Shell to run non-interactive tools such as the BLCLI. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator. If the private key in the id.pem file is not password-protected. On a Windows agent. 9 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping. you should cache your private key for your client-side certificate.pem file is generated. When you start Network Shell. /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/ NSH/certs/userName is the fingerprint file. which means these agents will require Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers to also use client-side certificates. making it available to any command running under the shell. This step sets tls_mode=encryption_and_auth on the targeted agents. Because each Network Shell session requires knowledge of the private key password.

Network Shell prompts you for a password every time you issue a command during that session. and then start Network Shell again. The system generates a message like the following: set BL_X509_KEY to xy to reuse this private key where xy is the hexadecimal value of the location of the shared memory segment. indicating the private key password is shared. enter the following command: bltray -blkey A dialog prompts for your private key password. The BMC BladeLogic icon displays in the system tray on the task bar. exit Network Shell. right-click the BMC BladeLogic icon in the system tray and select Exit from the pop-up menu.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client TIP If you are already running Network Shell and you create a certificate. enter the following command. To avoid this. create the certificate. 2 Enter the password. 2 Enter the password and click OK. 3 To stop sharing the password. Activating the private key cache in UNIX 1 On the Network Shell client. NOTE This command must be run in the foreground because it prompts for a password. Network Shell only prompts for the password when you start the new session. The command will spawn a new process that will remain in the background to cache the password in a shared memory segment. Chapter 4 Administering security 215 . bl_ssl_agent --background The system prompts for your private key password. Activating the private key cache in Windows 1 From a Windows command line.

user=root To be safe. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw..user=Administrator On a UNIX server. To grant this privilege.agentN where userName is the name of the user who created the certificate and agent1.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client After entering your password. self-signed certificate from managed servers by entering the following command: nukecert userName agent1.. bl_ssl_agent runs in the background with the password cached in a shared memory segment. 3 Configure the secure file on all agents where you want to stop using certificates by using Network Shell to run the following secadmin command: 216 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . set the BL_X509_KEY environment variable by entering the following command: BL_X509_KEY=xy 4 Export the BL_X509_KEY environment variable by issuing the following command: export BL_X509_KEY The bl_ssl_agent program remains in the background holding the private key password cached in a shared memory segment until you kill it. To perform this procedure. you may want to replace the host wildcard (“*”) with the IP address or host name of the Network Shell client.. Discontinuing use of client-side certificates Use this procedure to stop using client-side certificates that secure access between Network Shell clients and agents. 3 To reuse this shared memory segment with Network Shell.agentN is a space-delimited list of the names or IP addresses of the servers where you want to stop using certificates. 1 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent. you must have root or Administrator privileges on any servers hosting agents where you want to discontinue use of client-side certificates. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw. 2 Remove the SHA1 fingerprint of a client-side. This shared memory segment is only usable by the person who ran bl_ssl_agent..

pem is stored in /userProfileDirectory/Application Data /BladeLogic. On UNIX repeaters. client-side certificates.pem is stored in /userHomeDirectory /. where userProfileDirectory specifies a path such as /Documents and Settings/userName. where userHomeDirectory> is the user’s home directory. On Windows. users are mapped to root but mapping to other user names is possible. and configure those agents to authenticate incoming requests using clientside certificates.pem file. such as /home/userName. The following is a master procedure. Typically. id. provision all targeted agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate. If you want to stop using self-signed. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure. you must perform this procedure for the BladeLogicRSCD user.Implementing Security – Repeater to agent secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Running this command generates an rscd entry in the secure file like the following: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls NOTE Performing this step could have implications for Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers when they communicate with the same targeted agents. client-side certificate for a repeater. Otherwise. In Windows. see “Discontinuing use of client-side certificates” on page 222. In UNIX. Implementing Security – Repeater to agent Use this procedure to generate a self-signed. you must perform this procedure for every user to whom connecting users are mapped. This step sets tls_mode=encryption_only on the targeted agents. 5 Remove certificates from clients by deleting the id. Chapter 4 Administering security 217 . id. 4 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping.bladelogic. which means these agents will not require Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers to also use client-side certificates. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator.

On UNIX repeaters. 4 Using a command line. See “Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the repeater” on page 218. WINDIR is typically winnt (on a Windows 2000 server) or windows. Then confirm the passphrase by entering it again. C. Then.bladelogic directory. 218 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . See “Configuring agents to authenticate incoming requests with clientside certificates” on page 221. Log into the Application Server as Administrator. Create a directory called C:\WINDIR\rsc\certs\BladeLogicRSCD. B. 3 Configure all targeted agents to authenticate incoming requests using client-side certificates. In the path shown above.pem file is generated. BMC BladeLogic will not load the certificate if group or world permissions are set for the id. client-side certificate on the repeater. and then add the passphrase for that certificate to the securecert file.Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the repeater 1 Create a self-signed. 2 Provision all targeted agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate. issue the following command for generating a certificate: bl_gen_ssl ■ On Windows. log into the repeater as a user to whom connecting users are mapped (typically root).pem file or the . Enter the following command for generating a certificate: bl_gen_ssl -repeatcert 5 Enter a passphrase for the private key to the certificate. do the following: A. where the id. generate a self-signed certificate by doing one of the following: ■ On UNIX-style systems. See “Provisioning agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate” on page 219. Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the repeater Use this procedure to create a self-signed certificate for the repeater and then add the passphrase for that certificate to the securecert file on the repeater.

Enter the password in clear text.pem Provisioning agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate Use this procedure to provision managed servers with the SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate. After issuing this command.pem. the contents of the securecert file are updated to include an entry for your current user name.bladelogic directory by running the following commands: chmod 700 /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/.Provisioning agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate BMC BladeLogic generates a certificate in a file named id.bladelogic/id.bladelogic. if you are logged in as root. For example. the file is created in WINDIR\rsc\certs\BladeLogicRSCD. where userHomeDirectory is the user’s home directory. where WINDIR is typically windows or winnt. (The encoded passphrase will vary. the file is created in userHomeDirectory /. On Windows.pem. this command might create an entry like the following. Using Network Shell. Chapter 4 Administering security 219 .) [default] BladeLogicRSCD=FCUVOMLNGLVRZNOO 7 For UNIX repeaters. id. The secadmin utility encrypts the password..pem is created in /root/.bladelogic chmod 600 /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/. such as root or BladeLogicRSCD.bladelogic/id. enter the following: secadmin -m default -cu user -cp password where user is BladeLogicRSCD for Windows repeaters and the user who created the certificate (such as root) for UNIX-style repeaters. 6 Update the securecert file to contain an encoded copy of the passphrase. ensure that access is restricted to the id. On UNIX. An agent uses this fingerprint to validate the selfsigned certificate received from the repeater in the course of the TLS handshake.pem file and the . For example.

On Windows. where userHomeDirectory is the user’s home directory. id. generate this setting by running the following secadmin command on each agent: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Before you can provision an agent with the fingerprint of the repeater’s certificate. The secure file (located in the C:\WINDIR\rsc directory on a Windows server and in / usr/lib/rsc on a UNIX-style server) must have the rscd entry set to the following when deploying the certificate fingerprint: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls This is the default setting after a fresh installation of an agent. If you prematurely set the rscd entry in an agent's secure file so that tls_mode=encrytion_and_auth.pem is stored. To grant this privilege.bladelogic.bladelogic/id. so in most situations there is no need to perform this step.pem resides in userHomeDirectory/. On UNIX-style servers. you must ensure the secure file on the agent is configured correctly. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw. If necessary.user=root To be safe. you may want to replace the host wildcard (“*”) with the IP address or host name of the Application Server.Provisioning agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate 1 Ensure that the secure file on all managed servers is configured so that tls_mode=encryption_only. you must have root or Administrator privileges on the server hosting the agent. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw. 3 Cd to the directory on the repeater where id.pem is created at /root/. For example. id. 220 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . id.pem resides in WINDIR\rsc\certs\BladeLogicRSCD. if you are logged in as root. where WINDIR is typically windows or winnt.pem.. 2 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent. To provision an agent with the SHA1 fingerprint of an Application Server’s certificate. the agent will refuse the incoming connection because it will not have the SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed cert.user=Administrator On a UNIX server.

the secure files on those agents must be updated so tls_mode=encryption_and_auth. Configuring agents to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates Use this procedure to update the rscd entry in each agent's secure file so it reads as follows: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_and_auth:encryption=tls After agents are provisioned with the SHA1 fingerprint of an Application Server’s self-signed certificate. It places the SHA1 fingerprint of the id.. Otherwise. agent1. user is either the name of the UNIX user you were logged in as when you created the certificate or BladeLogicRSCD if the repeater is on a Windows platform. To accomplish this.agentN where. BMC BladeLogic places the SHA1 fingerprint of the id..Configuring agents to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates 4 Push the SHA1 fingerprint for the repeater’s certificate to managed servers that communicate with the repeater. To modify the rscd entry in the secure file on each targeted agent. When you issue the putcert command. This setting requires client authentication via clientside certificates.. The file resides in the /nsh/certs directory on UNIX-style servers and in \rsc\certs on Windows.. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator. use Network Shell to enter the following secadmin command: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_and_auth -e tls Chapter 4 Administering security 221 .pem agent1.agentN is a space-separated list of the host names or IP addresses of the managed servers hosting agents. 5 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping.pem file for BladeLogicRSCD in a file called BladeLogicRSCD.pem file for root in a file called root. use Network Shell to enter the following: putcert user id.

222 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . such as the IP address or host name of the Network Shell client. To accomplish this.Discontinuing use of client-side certificates Discontinuing use of client-side certificates Use this procedure to stop using client-side certificates that secure access between repeaters and agents.. If other UNIX users have fingerprints on the agent. 2 Remove the SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate from managed servers. In the command shown above agent1. you should replace the host wildcard (“*”) with a more restrictive setting..agentN where user is BladeLogicRSCD for a Windows repeater and typically root for a UNIX repeater. This step sets tls_mode=encryption_only on the targeted agents. which means these agents will not require Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers to also use client-side certificates. you must remove those user names as well. use Network Shell to enter the following: nukecert user agent1. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw. 3 Configure the secure file on all agents where you want to stop using certificates by using Network Shell to run the following secadmin command: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Running this command generates an rscd entry in the secure file like the following: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls NOTE Performing this step could have implications for Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers when they communicate with the same targeted agents. 1 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent.user=root To be safe. you must have root or Administrator privileges on any servers hosting agents where you want to discontinue use of client-side certificates.agentN is a space-delimited list of the names or IP addresses of the servers where you want to stop using the repeater’s self-signed certificate. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw... To grant this privilege. To perform this procedure.user=Administrator On a UNIX server.

5 Remove certificates from repeaters by deleting the id. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator. see “Generating a selfsigned certificate for an Application Server” on page 223. In some situations. For more information on that procedure.pem. For example. 1 From installDirectory/bin.pem file resides in WINDIR\rsc\certs\BladeLogicRSCD. the id. However.bladelogic/id. where userHomeDirectory is the user’s home directory. see “Securing communication with CA certificates” on page 224. On UNIX-style servers.pem file resides in userHomeDirectory/. For more information on that procedure. enter the following command: blmkcert CN=hostname jksFileName password The command shown above has the following parameters: ■ hostname—Typically set to the host name where you are generating the certificate.Using certificates to secure communication between clients and Application Servers 4 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping. The certificate will be valid for three years.pem resides in /root/. the id. id. Otherwise.. and it will be stored under the “blade” alias. if you are logged in as root. where WINDIR is typically windows or winnt. you may need to manually generate a self signed certificate for an Application Server.bladelogic. Generating a self-signed certificate for an Application Server Performing this procedure generates a 2048-bit RSA key and a self-signed certificate for an Application Server. you may choose to provision Application Servers with a CA-issued certificate or certificate chain. Chapter 4 Administering security 223 . On Windows.pem file storing the certificate. Using certificates to secure communication between clients and Application Servers Typically BMC BladeLogic uses self-signed certificates to secure communication between clients and Application Servers.

Securing communication with CA certificates When you install an Application Server. 1 Obtain a certificate chain from a certificate authority. see “Synchronizing keystore files of multiple Application Servers” on page 58. copy the JKS file you generated in step 1 from this Application Server to all cooperating Application Servers. you set up a keystore that takes the place of the bladelogic. For more information on that procedure. This file should be stored in the /deployments directory for the Application Server that is being updated. After you provision Application Servers with CA-issued certificates. you might enter a command like the following: blmkcert CN=winappserver1 "C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\ NSH\br\deployments\_template\bladelogic. see “Importing CA-issued certificates into clients” on page 226. 224 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . such as installDirectory/br/deployments/_template. ■ For example. some organizations may choose to use a CA-issued certificate or certificate chain rather than the default selfsigned certificate. For information on this process.keystore" ******** 2 If you are using a multi-Application Server environment.keystore created automatically when you install the Application Server. If you do not want clients to verify a certificate’s revocation status. if you are generating a self-signed certificate on a Windows server called winappserver1. When you perform this procedure. update the password for each cooperating Application Server. do not provision the Application Server with a certificate that includes an OCSP URL. However. you should import those certificates into client trust stores. (A keystore contains certificates and a private key. password—A password used to encrypt the generated keystore file. the installation procedure provisions the Application Server with a self-signed certificate. If a new password is needed. A trust store only contains certificates. the client will attempt to verify the revocation status of the Application Server’s certificate.Securing communication with CA certificates ■ jksFileName—The path to the keystore you are generating. 2 Import the certificate and its corresponding private key into a keystore file on the Application Server.) If the certificate you are importing includes a URL for an OCSP Responder.

For example. the alias you use to identify the certificate must be blade and the format of the keystore must be jks. see “Synchronizing keystore files of multiple Application Servers” on page 58.p12 is the file being imported. When you use the blasadmin utility to set up keystores for cooperating Application Servers (described in the next step) you must provide this password. such as installDirectory/br/deployments/_template. you can use Java’s keytool utility. bladelogic. There are various tools for performing this type of conversion. This file should be stored in the /deployments directory for the Application Server that is being updated. update the password for each cooperating Application Server.keystore is the name of the keystore file you are creating. pkcs12Alias is the alias under which the certificate and private key are stored. you must convert your certificates and private keys into JKS. you are prompted for a destination keystore password.p12 -destkeystore bladelogic. The command shown above also prompts you for the source keystore password. which is the password originally used to create the PCKS12 file. If your CA cannot create a JKS file and instead provides you with a PKCS12 file. If you are importing a certificate with the Authentication Server’s version of keytool. which is available on any machine where the Authentication Server is installed. 3 If you are using a multi-Application Server environment.keystore -srcstoretype pkcs12 -deststoretype jks -srcalias pkcs12Alias -destalias blade In this command bladelogic.Securing communication with CA certificates Ideally. NOTE No matter what method you use to import the certificate. you might enter a command like the following: installDirectory/jre/bin/keytool -importkeystore -srckeystore bladelogic. Chapter 4 Administering security 225 . For information on this process. copy the JKS file you generated in step 2 from this Application Server to all cooperating Application Servers. When you enter the command shown above. your certificate authority should create a certificates and private keys and output them using the JKS format. If a new password is needed. This is the password used to encrypt the keystore.

Using the blcred utility The blcred utility manages authentication profiles. This procedure is not essential. the Authentication Service issues a session credential. but performing it configures the client so it communicates more securely with the Application Server.PEM. user name. you must install the BMC BladeLogic Console. when you establish a connection to the Application Server. On Windows. This file could be the Application Server’s certificate file. or it could be a CA’s certificate that can be used to verify the validity of the Application Server’s certificate. On UNIX. a user must provide an authentication profile. This functionality is equivalent to the default approach for BMC BladeLogic.pkcs12.pkcs12. To use blcred. To log into a BMC BladeLogic system. this command imports the certificate to C:\Documents and Settings\ user\Application Data\BladeLogic\client_keystore. This session credential can be stored in a credential cache file. If the Application Server is provisioned with a certificate chain. session credentials.PEM.Using the blcred utility Importing CA-issued certificates into clients If you have provisioned an Application Server to use a certificate or certificate chain obtained from a Certificate Authority (see “Securing communication with CA certificates” on page 224). which uses self-signed certificates. Use the blcred utility to import the certificate into the client trust store by entering the following command: blcred cert -import certificateFile In this command certificateFile provides the path to the certificate you are adding to the trust store. OCSP verification on the client side will only happen if the CA certificate was imported and the Application Server’s certificate contains an OCSP URL. 226 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The authentication profile specifies a BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service and the mechanism that should be employed to authenticate the user. If you do not perform this procedure. the certificate that you import into the client’s trust store should be the issuing certificate for the top of the certificate chain. and password. you are prompted to trust the certificate. this command imports the certificate to userHomeDirectory/. and trusted certificates. This file must use the PEM or DER format. The related certificate should be the issuing certificate for the Application Server’s certificate.bladelogic/ client_keystore. you should import a related certificate into the client’s trust store. Once the Authentication Service validates a user.

Application Server. On clients. and delete trusted X. ■ ■ Chapter 4 Administering security 227 . it cannot be used to establish a client/server session. When operating in a command line environment.509 certificates are used when establishing a TLS connection to an LDAP server. You must insert the smart card before you can use blcred to run the acquire command to obtain a session credential. add. ■ ■ Test whether a valid session credential already exists and determine the lifetime remaining for that credential.COM) and password.Using the blcred utility BMC BladeLogic client applications use session credentials to establish secure sessions with a middle tier service—either the Application Service or the Network Shell Proxy Service. X. Session credentials have a finite lifetime.COMPANY. import. — Domain Authentication—User name (in the form user@KRBDOMAIN. BMC BladeLogic client applications can use a cached session credential when the owner of the credential cache file invokes the client application. Review.509 certificates. the blcred utility lets you: ■ Create an authentication profile Acquire a session credential by providing an authentication profile and the appropriate user credentials for each authentication protocol. and delete authentication profiles. BMC BladeLogic users can log on and acquire session credentials using the BMC BladeLogic Console or blcred command line utility. X. However. users do not explicitly use the command line interface to provide AD/Kerberos credentials. add. as described below: — SRP—user name and password.509 certificates are used when establishing a TLS connection to an Authentication Service. On Application Servers. — SecurID—user name and passcode (PIN plus token code). — AD/Kerberos—The blcred utility retrieves the AD/Kerberos user credential from the host system's AD/Kerberos credential store. — PKI—Insert a smart card into a smart card reader and provide the appropriate PIN for that smart card. — LDAP—distinguished name and password. or Network Shell Proxy Server. Review. an established client/ server session can continue even though the session credential used to establish that session has expired. After a session credential has expired.

refer to the man page for blcred. Interactively obtaining a session credential If you are interactively running Network Shell (in proxy mode) or the BLCLI and you need to obtain a session credential but cannot use the console. enter a command like the following: blcred cred -test -profile MyProfile -time 500 where 500 is a remaining lifetime in minutes. run the following command: blcred cred -acquire 228 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . run the following command: blcred cred -test -profile MyProfile where MyProfile is the name of the authentication profile for which a session credential has been issued. To determine whether a credential's remaining lifetime exceeds a specified number of minutes. it generates a return code of 0. it generates a return code of 0. If this command is successful. Testing for valid session credentials If you are using a command line (BLCLI or Network Shell in proxy mode) and you want to determine whether you have a valid session credential. which means a valid session credential does exist for MyProfile. If this command is successful. Typical scenarios The following sections describe some typical scenarios for using blcred. which means the MyProfile session credential is valid for at least 500 minutes.Options Options For a complete description of all available command line options.

you can direct blcred to retrieve an SRP user name and password from an SRP keytab file. you must enter a profile name that calls for AD/Kerberos authentication. you can direct blcred to obtain a session credential. and you are using SRP authentication. you can specify the profile name as a command line option. The example below shows an authentication session that prompts the user for credential information. blcred cred -acquire -profile srpProfile -username BLAdmin -password ****** Chapter 4 Administering security 229 . (Alternatively. $ blcred cred -acquire profile name: srpProfile username: BLAdmin password ****** Authentication succeeded: acquired session credential If you are using AD/Kerberos authentication. user name and password if the named profile specifies SRP authentication.) When employing AD/Kerberos authentication. $ blcred cred -acquire profile name: adkProfile Authentication succeeded: acquired session credential Obtaining a session credential by referencing a keytab file If you are running Network Shell or the BLCLI in batch mode and you need to obtain a session credential non-interactively. you can enter the same command. using a command like the following blcred cred -acquire -profile srpProfile -i /home/user/user_info. as described in “Obtaining a TGT for a BMC BladeLogic client (UNIX only)” on page 201. blcred does not prompt the user for a name or password. Note that UNIX users must first manually run a kinit before attempting to authenticate. Instead.Typical scenarios The blcred utility will prompt for an authentication profile name. you need to obtain a session credential non-interactively. you can specify the profile name.dat Obtaining a session credential using SRP authentication profile If you are running Network Shell or the BLCLI in batch mode. but when prompted for an authentication profile name. it retrieves the user’s Kerberos credential from the host operating system’s AD/Kerberos credential cache. user name and password as command line options. Alternatively.

2 Name the file user_info.exe. ■ The utility prompts you to create a file name. password. and role. On UNIX. 1 From installDirectory/bin.1 Destination URLs: service:appsvc.0.Generating a user information file Obtaining a session credential using an LDAP authentication profile If you are running Network Shell or the BLCLI in batch mode.bladelogic:blauth://localhost:9840 Fri Aug 17 20:57:29 EDT 2007 Sat Aug 18 06:57:29 EDT 2007 127. run the command bl_gen_blcli_user_info.0.bladelogic:blsess://localhost:9841 service:proxysvc. you only have to provide a partial distinguished name (in this case admin) and an LDAP password. Username: Authentication: Issuing Service: Expiration Time: Maximum Lifetime: Client address: Authorized Roles: RBACAdmins RBACAdmin SRP service:authsvc. do one of the following: ■ On Windows.bladelogic:blsess://localhost:9842 Generating a user information file Use this procedure to generate a user information file. run the command bl_gen_blcli_user_info. you need to obtain a session credential non-interactively. you can direct blcred to obtain a session credential. which caches your user ID. you must provide a full distinguished name and a password. Displaying the contents of a session credential Using a blcred command like the following. you can display the contents of your current session credential. 230 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . If you are using a distinguished name template.dat. blcred cred -acquire -profile ldapProfile -username admin -password ****** If you are not using distinguished name templates. and you are using LDAP authentication.

Generating a user information file 3 When prompted. enter your user name. and role. the user_info.user/user_info.dat file. NOTE When running a Network Shell Script Job based on a Network Shell script that contains CLI commands. password.bladelogic/.dat 5 Make sure that only you have permission to access the directory where you have stored the user_info. 4 Move the file created in step 2 to one of the locations shown below: ■ Windows: userHomeDirectory\Application Data\BladeLogic \user\user_info. run the following command as root or a user with root privileges: sudo -u bladmin echo $HOME Chapter 4 Administering security 231 .dat ■ UNIX: userHomeDirectory/. To determine the userHomeDirectory for LocalSystem. run Network Shell on the Application Server and enter the following command: echo $USERPROFILE To determine the userHomeDirectory for bladmin.dat file must be saved in the userHomeDirectory for the LocalSystem account on Windows or the bladmin user on UNIX.

Generating a user information file 232 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

txt. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 233 . each machine where an RSCD agent is installed).local. secure. even if there are multiple client installations on the same machine.Chapter 5 5 Setting up configuration files This chapter describes how to modify BMC BladeLogic configuration files. The configuration files control how communication occurs between RSCD agents and their clients. The exports. Introduction to the configuration files BMC BladeLogic provides the following configuration files: exports users users.txt files are also installed for each client installation. and log4crc. users. securecert. The secure files on both the client and server configure how clients communicate with servers. users.txt files reside on each server (that is. When a client connects to a server. The chapter also provides an overview of logging in BMC BladeLogic. which clients and users have access to RSCD agents. The secure. securecert. and log4crc. the client user can be granted permissions on the server using two approaches: through configuration files on the agent (a process called user privilege mapping) or through Windows user mapping.local secure securecert log4crc. and discusses how logging is performed.

local configuration files. see “Setting up a Network Shell Client to run in proxy mode” on page 147. The alternative approach to user privilege mapping is to implement Windows user mapping. When a user is using a Network Shell client to connect to servers via a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. you must still create entries for the users. When a user is accessing a Windows server and the user’s role is not mapped to a Windows user through an automation principal.0 or later can recognize automation principals.Introduction to the configuration files In BMC BladeLogic. When a user runs a Network Shell client to connect directly to a server. these files define what permissions apply during the connection. even if you are using Windows user mapping. For information on implementing Windows user mapping.local. users. The information in these entries defines whether users can access a server. NOTE Only Windows servers running BMC BladeLogic 8. see the man page for the chapw command. the standard approach to granting user permission on managed servers is user privilege mapping. Any user mapping information in these entries is ignored for roles that employ Windows user mapping through automation principals. When you are using Windows user mapping to grant permissions to roles. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. For more information. Consequently. or exports files. Using this technique. For more information on configuring clients to use a Network Shell Proxy Server. When a user is running a Network Shell script defined to use the first and second script types and the appserver_protocol setting in the secure file is not set to ssoproxy. 234 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Disabling user privilege mapping BMC BladeLogic provides a mechanism for disabling user privilege mapping on Windows servers. and users. you should still push agent ACLs to servers when you add or modify user or role information in the BMC BladeLogic Console. you can grant permissions to roles that are mapped to local or domain users who are authorized for a Windows server. users. Together. It uses a combination of the exports. This approach should always be used in the following situations: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ When a user is accessing any UNIX server.

■ secure—Sets communication parameters that define how client and server machines communicate. (For more information on RBAC. A server’s secure file specifies how an agent communicates with clients. Strong security for communication requires X.txt. An Application Server’s secure file specifies how the Application Server communicates with agents and how the file server (typically created on the same host as the Application Server) communicates with clients. Storing passphrases lets BMC BladeLogic access private keys without any need for user interaction. With the exports file you can also establish global user permissions. a single machine can have multiple client installations. BMC BladeLogic recommends that you always use secadmin. and client installations each have their own secure file. ■ log4crc.) A client’s secure file specifies how the client communicates with agents. users and users.) You can use the users. ■ securecert—Stores passphrases used to encrypt the private keys for X. (On Windows.local file to override any permissions defined in the users file. Application Servers.local—Set access permissions for individual users that communicate with a server. A utility called secadmin allows you to configure the secure file on a particular machine. With log4crc.509 certificates. The secure file also determines whether a Network Shell client communicates with servers via a Network Shell Proxy Server. RSCD agents. you can also control the rolling of log files. the values specified in the users file are ■ automatically generated to implement decisions made in RBAC.Configuration file functions Configuration file functions The configuration files function as follows: ■ exports—Sets access permissions for client machines that communicate with a server.509 certificates. Although you can edit the secure file by hand.local files override any global user permissions defined in the exports file. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 235 . Permissions set in either the users and users. Typically. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. so that a single log file cannot get excessively large.txt—Controls logging in BMC BladeLogic so that all events are logged using consistent formats.

or a subnet. a subnet designation uses the following format: @<IP address or hostname>/mask The @ symbol indicates that a subnet is being defined.0/24 236 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .168. and users configuration files work together to control access to a server.0 might look like the following: @192. exports.255.168.0/24 The following are sample subnet mask definitions: 255.255.255. After the IP address or host name. you can use a resolvable host name. provide the number of bits in the mask. Subnet designations When designating a host in the configuration files. For example.10.Subnet designations The following graphic illustrates how the secure.255. a subnet with a subnet mask of 255. an IP address. In the configuration files.100. A subnet represents a range of IP addresses.000 @192.

First.128 @192.100.255.224 @192.168.249/29 How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents When a client contacts an RSCD agent.100.How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents 255. “Administering security.255.255. see Chapter 4.225/27 255.168.100.255. additional measures may be required before a connection can be successfully established between clients and servers.255.255.100.255.255.193/26 255. For a complete description of how to set up communication security for a BMC BladeLogic system. If there is no entry for that client in the secure file of the server. the client uses the information in the entry to establish a connection with the server. see “Secure file” on page 253.100.168. a connection is established.168.192 @192. If there is an entry and the communication parameters in the secure file on the server match those in the secure file on the client.” For more information on using on the secure file.255. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 237 . access to the agent is denied.129/25 255.255. the client reads its secure file to determine whether it includes an entry for a particular server. Depending on the type of authentication and encryption specified in the secure file.241/28 255.168.248 @192. If an entry for that server exists. Then.240 @192. the RSCD agent on the server reads its secure file to determine if it has an entry for the incoming client. BMC BladeLogic uses the following algorithm to determine whether a user has permissions for accessing the agent: 1 Every client installation (on Windows there can be multiple clients) and the RSCD agent each have their own secure file.

Using the map= field. the algorithm continues to step 3 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The agent being contacted must be running on a Windows server. Note that on Windows. however. the exports file produces no user mapping. entries in the users. all users are domain users. if you are using Windows user mapping. To take advantage of Windows user mapping. The agent must be running BMC BladeLogic 8. the system checks the exports configuration file. Typically. For more on the exports file. incoming users can only be mapped to local users. A Network Shell client must be communicating through a Network Shell Proxy Server. If any of the following conditions are not satisfied. the incoming role is granted the permissions of a local or domain user on the server and the process if complete. you can map users to root on UNIX-style systems or Administrator on Windows.local and users files produce no user mapping. you can map a user on a client to a user on a server. 238 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .local file is used for granting user permissions on a per-agent basis rather than granting system-wide user privileges. If a role is mapped to a Windows user through an automation principal. you can map a user to a domain user. If the same users have entries in both users. 4 The system checks the users. The users. the users file is used to implement the permissions that are defined and granted to users on a system-wide basis through RBAC Management. The agent being contacted must be running on a server that has already been added to the BMC BladeLogic system.00 or later. If a role is mapped to a Windows user through an automation principal.local file take precedence. 3 Once a connection is established between the client and server.How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents 2 Assuming the conditions described below are satisfied. On Windows domain controllers. see “Exports file” on page 240. — The secure file on the Application Server must be defined so the appserver_protocol option is set to ssoproxy. For example.local and users. Any job acting on a target server must be running in an Application Server environment that meets the following criteria: — The Application Server must also be running a Network Shell Proxy Service or the ProxyServiceURLs value in the Application Server profile must point to a valid Network Shell Proxy Server.local and users configuration files to determine if these files include any map= entries that supersede definitions set in the exports file. the users. with the user= field. Network Shell cannot contact an agent directly or communicate through a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. On domain controllers.0. where the user= field can map users connecting from specified machines to a particular user on the server.

then root equivalence is allowed.local files. Also. mapped to Anonymous unless a corresponding entry for the root= field is found.” On Windows systems. or users files. by default. including rejecting them with anon=-1. if the role is not mapped to an automation principal. Similarly. Note that. For example.” Note that on UNIX. access to the agent is denied. a mapping exists in the exports or users file. Similarly. if an entry in the users file says betty map=WindowsUser then any user named betty that tries to make a connection to this machine is mapped to the local user named WindowsUser. If there is a match. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 239 . access is denied. users are granted the permissions of user “nobody. the system maps the incoming user to a default user.local. the system attempts to match the user ID of the incoming user to a user ID defined on the server where the RSCD agent is installed. On UNIX-style systems. users are granted the permissions of user “Anonymous.How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents For more on the users and users. users coming in as root are. mapped to nobody unless a corresponding entry for the root= field is found. If a root= field is found. In UNIX-style systems. be aware that the validusers= option is treated the same as the allowed= option. On Windows. If there is no user named WindowsUser. 5 If there is no user mapping defined in the exports. users. see “Users and users. if you are not using Windows user mapping. on Windows. user “root” on a UNIX-style client is not allowed to map to its equivalent user “root” on a UNIX-style server. any client user found to be a member of the Administrators group cannot be mapped by default to an equivalent user on the server. on Windows. if an incoming user is not mapped to an automation principal and that user is a member of the Administrators group. by default.local files” on page 247. on Windows. and the user that is being mapped to does not exist. 6 If none of the previous steps succeed. then that user is. the user is assigned that user’s permissions. The anon= field is not supported for Windows. by default. you can use the anon= field to specify how to deal with anonymous users.

see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. Existing client connections are not affected by the changes. Linux. AIX. For example.Exports file Exports file The exports file determines which BMC BladeLogic clients have access to a server. If you are using Windows user mapping to grant permissions to roles. Updating the exports file on the host where you are running Network Shell or other BMC BladeLogic applications does not set access permissions for managed servers. For information on Windows user mapping. the exports file may still include entries that apply to Windows servers. you cannot establish a connection with an agent. Access permissions are defined for each individual RSCD agent and must be configured separately on each host where the RSCD agent is running. Often the exports file is used to set global permission that apply to users on all client machines. The exports file resides in different locations in Windows and UNIX-style systems. HP-UX Windows Location /usr/lib/rsc/exports WINDIR\rsc\exports (For example. use the users or users. When changes are made to the exports file. If the exports file does not exist or it does not contain any configuration information. as described in the following table. You do not have to restart the agent or otherwise instruct it to read the new exports file. When an rscd daemon starts on a server. when necessary. WINDIR can be \windows or \winnt.local files to override those permissions for particular users.) The exports file does not grant permissions on Windows servers to roles that are set up for Windows user mapping. Then you can use the users or users. With the exports file you can set permissions on a per-client basis and. it automatically reads the exports file. you can use the exports file to limit all clients to readonly permission on the server.local files to specify individual users who are granted read/write permission on that server. 240 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Only the user mapping information in the exports file is ignored. All subsequent client connections have the access permissions defined in the modified version of the exports file. Platform Solaris. the daemon automatically re-reads it.

Configuring the exports file Configuring the exports file The exports file consists of multiple entries. Each option defines a type of access permission that applies to the hosts you have named in that entry. with each entry identifying client hosts and the access permissions granted to those hosts.. see “Options for exports file” on page 241. Subnet designations are used to define a range of addresses (see “Subnet designations” on page 236). Options for exports file For each of the entries in the exports file. When defining multiple options. separate each value with a colon. Use the following format for each entry: hostNnames option1. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 241 . The allowed= option is read before the validusers= option. If a single option sets multiple values.. The user names entered here should be the login names of the users on the client machines.optionN is a list of comma-separated fields. enter options in a comma-separated list. Option allowed=username[:username] Description This option can be used to restrict access to specific users who do not have a local account. Using an asterisk (*) instead of a list of host names defines default options that apply to any host not specifically named in the exports file.optionN hostNnames is a list of comma-separated IP addresses. resolvable host names. If possible. you can apply any of the options listed below. To configure the exports file.. as in the following: validusers=user1:user2 Lines in the exports file that begin with # are considered to be comments. This option is similar to the validusers option except that the users named here are not required to have an account on the local system. create entries that correlate the host names of clients with the permissions that should be granted to those clients.. option1. or subnet designations. For a complete list of available options. use the validusers option instead of the allowed= option.

commands=cmd1[:cmd2] By default. If you specify the nosuid option. The commands= option allows you to limit the commands a client can execute against an agent. (UNIX only. The ro option takes precedence over the rw option if both are defined. the value 65534 is used. Setting anon=-1 disables anonymous access. the ro and rw options are ignored. the ro and rw options are ignored. Hosts not specified have read-only permissions if ro is defined or they are listed in the ro= option.) By default. The ro option takes precedence over the rw option if both are defined. If the user nobody does not exist. 242 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the RSCD agent silently ignores any attempt to enable the setuid or setgid bits when creating a file or changing a file’s permissions. clients are allowed to create files with the setuid or setgid bits enabled and to set setuid and setgid permission via chown(2). See “Restricting commands” on page 244 for more details on how to use this option. clients are allowed to create special files (character special and block special). The default is for no hosts to be granted root access. the corresponding UID and GID are determined and set accordingly. rw=hostname[:hostname] Hosts listed in this option are granted read/write permissions. Hosts not specified have read/write permissions if rw is defined or they are listed in the rw= option. Root users (uid 0) are always considered “unknown” by the RSCD agent unless they are included in the root= option. Specifying the nomknod option instructs the RSCD agent to prevent the client from making a mknod(2) call generating an EACCES (Permission denied) error.Options for exports file Option anon=uid Description (UNIX only. If the GID is not found. All clients have read-only access except those listed in the rw= option. BMC BladeLogic clients are allowed to execute any command against an agent. The value entered can be numeric or a user name.) By default. If ro is not set or the host is not listed in the ro= option. the client is denied access. root=hostname[:hostname] This option gives root access to root users from specified hosts. If both the ro= and rw= options are defined. the client is denied access. If a request comes from an unknown user. described below. the GID is set to the GID for the user nobody. (UNIX only. ro=hostname[:hostname] Hosts listed in this option are granted read-only permissions. If a UID is entered. The default value for anon= is the UID of the user nobody. nomknod nosuid ro rw All clients have read-write access except those listed in the ro= option.) This option specifies how unknown users should be treated. If both the ro= and rw= options are defined. the user is treated as an anonymous user and the effective user ID is uid. a corresponding GID is searched for. If rw is not set or the host is not listed in the rw= option. If a user name is entered.

For each group name and/or GID entered. For Windows systems. Note that on Windows domain controllers. the UID and GID for the user are determined and set accordingly. Enter user groups in a colon (:) separated list. but with the -p option no password is requested. the connection is refused. if a user name is entered. you can enter Windows user account SIDs rather than user names. rsu=user[:user] user=username validgroups=groupname[:groupname] This option allows you to specify user groups that are allowed access. the rscd server allows the client to “see” the complete directory tree from / on down. This option takes precedence over the root= and anon= options if they exist. it is validated against a list of local users on the machine.) If a numeric UID is entered. If the GID is not in the list.Options for exports file Option rootdir=dirname Description By default. Clients can only see files and directories from dirname on down. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 243 . default user mapping applies. the RSCD agent looks at the effective GID of the calling user (as reported by the calling host) and only allows it access if the GID is in the specified list. the rscd server sets the “root” directory to dirname by making a call to or emulating chroot(2). By default the client is challenged for the user’s password. you can use the native file naming convention rather than a Network Shellstyle path. When setting rootdir= on Windows systems. The comparison is done as a numeric equivalency and as such group names must be known on the local system to determine their corresponding GID. then its corresponding GID is also set. if a user name or user account SID is entered. If the user name entered is not known. access is denied. The client command rsu allows a client to get alternate remote permissions on the agent. By specifying the rootdir= option. you can map a user to a domain user. See “How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents” on page 237 for more details. If an account is associated with a UID. On UNIX. If the client tries to use the rsu command with the -p option (that is. The rsu= entry defines which users the client is allowed to rsu without challenging them for a password. access to the machine is denied. no password challenge) and then tries to switch to a user not in the list. Numeric GIDs do not have to correspond to a local group name. If the user name that is entered is not known. The single entry you provide for username can be a user name or a numeric UID (UNIX only). see “How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents” on page 237. Group information can be provided in the form of group names or numeric GIDs. On Windows. then the corresponding UID on the server is used even if no known user account is associated with that UID. (For more details on user privilege mapping. Use /etc/groups to define group names. The user name you enter is validated against the domain users on the domain controller. This option forces all incoming client connections to run with the permissions of username.

For each user name and/or UID that is entered. If the user name and UID of the client connection does not exactly match one of the user name/UID combinations generated by the daemon. This can be done using the commands= option in the exports or users files. In some circumstances you may want to restrict the commands a user can execute. you also inherently authorize the use of all nsh internal commands against the server. including cd. true. and more. the connection is refused. The first are Network Shell utilities. The order in which commands are entered and the format of the commands= field affect the way permissions are determined. BMC BladeLogic clients can run two types of commands. echo. and midair. the RSCD agent looks up the corresponding UID and user name to create a user name/UID combination. such as nsh. The user information you provide for validusers= can be in the form of user names or numeric UIDs. pwd. each distributed utility contains an encrypted string that is used to hard code the name of the utility into the executable. which each have distributed capabilities. Given that these commands are internal to nsh.Restricting commands Option validusers=username[:username] Description This option allows you to specify users who are allowed access. A distinction exists between distributed commands and remote commands. The other type of command that a client can run is called a remote command (remote. remote commands include ps. Access can be limited by host or subnet. Restricting commands The RSCD agent reads entries in the exports file to determine what access permissions a calling client should have. set. you cannot use the commands= option to explicitly restrict their use. and netstat. To allow remote commands. You must first define the allowable distributed commands and then define the allowable remote commands. If no corresponding user account can be found. Once you use the commands= option to authorize the nsh command to run against a server. the entry is ignored. Enter users in a colon (:) separated list. the nsh utility provides access to many internal commands. kill.) For example. and by the commands a user can run. User names and UIDs must correspond to a locally known user account. To prevent individuals from renaming executables to trick the RSCD agent. These commands do not have distributed capabilities and run remotely on the server host. ls. hostname $ mkdir //athens/tmp/foo //rome/tmp/bar Besides launching external applications. (The process is conceptually similar to doing an rsh. df. you must 244 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . For example. The RSCD agent then matches the user name/UID combination to each attempted client connection. by user name. Remote commands do not include this safeguard. from the client’s perspective). false. that is.

The decision to allow or disallow execution of a remote command is based on comparison of the effective (basename) of the command. This prevents users from trying to execute a different executable than the intended one. if you enter commands=nsh:nexec:/bin/ps the following commands work as expected (executing from /bin/ps): rome $ nexec athens ps -ef rome $ cd //rome/etc athens $ ps -ef Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 245 .Restricting commands also allow the distributed command nexec. For example. commands=nexec:df:ps:netstat allows the user to execute all distributed commands but only allows the user to execute three remote commands on this host. the last of which should be the nexec command. all subsequent commands in the list are assumed to be remote commands. Once the nexec entry is found. This command does allow the user to do things like: rome $ ls //athens/foo/ If you only want to limit the remote commands that can be executed. In order to ensure that only the desired remote commands are executed. No remote commands such as ps or df are allowed. In other words. commands=nsh:mkdir:rmdir allows users to execute Network Shell’s internal commands as well as to create and remove directories. you can specify the full pathname of the remote executable. Then you define the remote commands. first you define the distributed commands. The entry commands=ls:nexec:ps:df allows a user to execute the remote commands ps and df but does not allow a user to cd to the host because cd is not a remote command and the nsh command has not been authorized. For example. you can leave out the list of distributed commands. For example.

granting them root access from only one host and changing the root directory to /reports: host1. This entry would be added to the exports file on every remote server being managed by the two administrators. and it also maps their user privileges to root. The root directory for these users is set to /pubs.rootdir=/reports The following example is a configuration that could be assigned when administrators. The asterisk means permissions apply to all clients unless there are other entries that define different permissions for specific hosts. * ro. map users to Administrator or the administrator account for the domain.user=Administrator NOTE On Windows. * rw. all users are domain users. admin1. * rw. who typically work on Windows clients. It grants two users (sysadmin1 and sysadmin2) read/write permission for all servers. a configuration entry something like this example is important if administrators working on Windows clients want to modify the configuration of UNIX servers. need to manage remote UNIX servers. A configuration like this is typically necessary if you are deploying BLPackages to Windows machines because you need Administrator privileges to deploy packages.user=guest The following example grants read/write access to all users but turns off the setting of setuid/setgid bits and denies unknown users access.host2. This example grants read-only access to all clients and maps all incoming connections so that users have “guest” privileges. on Windows Domain Controllers.admin2 rw.anon=-1 The following example maps incoming connections from machines called admin1 and admin2 to the local user called Administrator.rootdir=/pubs. The following example allows both read/write and read-only access for selected hosts.root=host1 host4. When using the exports file to set up user privilege mapping on Domain Controllers.host3 rw. Because Windows machines have no inherent concept of root.allowed=sysadmin1:sysadmin2. the user name entered is validated against a list of local users on the machine.host5 ro.nosuid.user=root 246 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . However.Examples Examples The following example allows customers access to software updates from servers.rootdir=/reports.

129/25 Users and users. when user betty attempts to connect to a server. The users file is primarily used to implement user permissions that are defined through RBAC.local files have the same format.168.local and users.local files The following example demonstrates subnets. (For more on RBAC.1/25.) With RBAC you define the characteristics of a role and assign users to that role.ro=@192. Running an ACL Push Job automatically converts your role definitions and role assignments into entries in the users file on that server.168.1-255 is split up so that the range from 1-127 has read/write privileges while the range 128-255 has readonly privileges.local files override any permissions defined on a per-client basis in the exports file. If you want to have different access (ro/rw) permissions for various hosts within a subnet.local files The users and user.com has read/write privileges while everybody else in the subnet (subnet mask 255.10. @192. Typically the users. entries in the users.10. host1. The agent accomplishes this by doing the following: ■ Incoming users are matched to a user name on the server.foo. Administrators may want to modify the users.local file is used for granting permissions on a per-server basis rather than granting system-wide user privileges. You can apply RBAC decisions to a server by running an ACL Push Job in the BMC BladeLogic Console. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 247 . a user cannot connect to a server unless a matching user name has been defined on a server. If the same users have entries in both users. In other words.com ro @host1. The permissions in the users and user.local files grant access permissions to specific users connecting to a server.local file to override RBAC policy on a particular server.1/24 rw=@192.Users and users.com rw.root=host1.168. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.10.foo.168. she must operate with the privileges already assigned to user betty on that server. but the users. In the example below the host host1.local files are defined on a per-user basis.192) has read-only privileges.255. The agent on a server enforces user permissions defined in an ACL by mapping incoming users to users defined on the server. In this scenario.local file take precedence. The permissions granted in the users and user. Both the users and users.com/26 The following is an example where an address range of 192. Together these entries are called an access control list (ACL).10.255.local file is scanned before the users file.foo.foo. you should first define the exception hosts and then define the default value for the remaining subnet.

no command authorizations for that role are pushed to the agent. as described in the following table. If no command authorizations are specified on the server in BMC BladeLogic Console but command authorizations are specified for a role. This means the role has full authorization to use any Network Shell and nexec commands on that server.) 248 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .local files reside in different locations in Windows and UNIX-style systems.Users and users.local (For example.local files. no command authorizations for that role are pushed to the agent. AIX. HP-UX Windows Location /usr/lib/rsc/users /usr/lib/rsc/users. The job uses the following algorithm to create users file entries relating to command authorizations: ■ If no command authorizations are specified on the server in the BMC BladeLogic Console and no command authorizations are specified for a role. If command authorizations are specified on the server in BMC BladeLogic Console and command authorizations are specified for the role. incoming users are automatically mapped to a user with downgraded permissions. For example. The users and users. Linux. including permissions for commands. This means the role is authorized to perform those commands on the agent.local files ■ Incoming users are mapped to a specified user name. ■ An ACL Push Job generates users file entries that grant a variety of permissions. those command authorizations are pushed to the agent. all users connecting to a UNIX system can be mapped to root.local WINDIR\rsc\users WINDIR\rsc\users. If neither of the two previous techniques are possible. ■ ■ ■ When you make changes to the users or users. This means the role is authorized to perform only those commands on the agent. WINDIR can be \windows or \winnt. This means the role has full authorization to use any Network Shell and nexec commands on that server.local files. You do not have to restart the agent or otherwise instruct it to read the new users or users. Platform Solaris. the command authorizations common to both are pushed to the agent. the RSCD agent automatically detects your new settings and uses them for all subsequent client connections. UNIX users are mapped to user nobody and Windows users are mapped to Anonymous. while users connecting to a Windows system can be mapped to Administrator. If command authorizations are specified on the server in BMC BladeLogic Console but no command authorizations are specified for a role.

see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. hosts=host1:host2. such as BLAdmins:BLAdmin. hosts=host1:host2. Each entry grants permissions to a user. For information on Windows user mapping. However. you should still push agent ACLs to servers when you add or modify user or role information in the BMC BladeLogic Console. see “Options for users and users. The second field is a comma-separated list of permissions that apply to the user defined in the first field.local files Both the users and users.Configuring the users or users. All other settings still apply.local files” on page 251. The first field provides a role and a user name. If an option sets multiple values. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 249 .local files is ignored for roles that employ Windows user mapping through automation principals. see “Options for users and users. The second field is a commaseparated list of permissions that apply to the user defined in the first field. separate each value with a colon. For example.local files do not grant permissions on Windows servers to roles that are set up for Windows user mapping.local files are a list of entries. No role is necessary because Network Shell does not recognize roles. For example. separated by a colon. Only the user mapping information in the users and users. Consequently. the users or users. Configuring the users or users. even if you are using Windows user mapping. If an option sets multiple values.local files” on page 251. The name of a Network Shell user should match the name of the user on the client host who is attempting to make a connection to this server. The format of each entry consists of two fields. separate each value with a colon. For Network Shell users that are not communicating with servers through a Network Shell Proxy Server. the first field in a users file entry provides only a user name.local files The users and users.local files should still include an entry for each role so that role can be granted access to a Windows server. For a complete list of available permissions. For a complete list of available permissions.

local files that begin with # are considered to be comments.local files Below is a sample users file with entries for DBAdmins:george and DBAdmins:betty.map=root # NSH-only ACLs entries for Network Shell users george betty rw.local file allows you to use a wild card in place of user names when defining role:user combinations. Lines in the users and user.map=root rw. The entries for DBAdmins:george and DBAdmins:betty would grant george and betty access to this server. All users in the role are mapped to root.Configuring the users or users. Using wild cards in the users. DBAdmins is the role and george and betty are users.local file.map=root nouser If george and betty communicate with the server by means of a Network Shell Proxy Server. In these entries george and betty are not paired with any role # DBAdmins ACLs entries for DBAdmins role DBAdmins:george DBAdmins:betty rw. you could create a users file entry such as: SecOps:* rw.map=root An entry like this grants read/write access to all users who have assumed the role of SecOpcs. BMC BladeLogic places a nouser entry in the users file if that server has a property called PUSH_ACL_NO_USERS_FLAG set to true. The users file can also include a nouser entry.map=root rw. In this example. Below these entries. Including this entry instructs a server to allow a connection from a user only when that user has been explicitly defined in the users configuration file. For example.local file The users. When you use an ACL Push Job to push a users file to a server. 250 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the Network Shell entries shown above would not be necessary. This capability is unique to the users. two more entries grant george and betty access to this server using Network Shell.

If no commands= option is given..local files Identifying users with a wild card provides some benefits.local file when users are added to or removed from a group. In some organizations.local file for every server. This entry tells the RSCD agent that permissions should only apply if the user named in the first field is connecting from one of the hosts in this list of colon (:) separated host names and/or addresses. Thus an entry like the one shown above overrides any more restrictive settings defined for the role using RBAC. See “Restricting commands” on page 244 for more details on the use of this field.local files provide the following options that you can use to assign access permissions to users: Option Description commands=cmd1[:cmd2 .local files The users and users.. the corresponding entry in the exports file determines what commands the user can run.local file is a capability that should be used sparingly. Entries in the users. you can temporarily allow all users in a role to access a server without first running an ACL Push Job to change the users file on that server. the entries you make in the users. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 251 .Options for users and users. You do not have to update entries in the users. the entry applies to the user named in the first field regardless of what host that user is connecting from. TIP BMC BladeLogic recommends adding an entry for RBACAdmins:RBACAdmin and BLAdmins:BLAdmin to the users.) This entry tells the RSCD agent that an account with the same user name must exist on this host. Using a wild card like this also lets you authorize all members of a role to perform certain types of actions.local file should reflect those naming decisions. If no hosts field is provided.local file override entries in the users file. they provide a way to access a server in case you accidentally revoke everyone else’s permissions for that server. running an ACL Push Job may first require a lengthy change control process. Because these roles cannot be deleted. exists hosts=hosts1[:host2 .. By performing a modification like this. Using wild cards for user names in the users. If you choose to rename the RBACAdmins or BLAdmins roles. Options for users and users..] This is a list of colon (:) separated commands that the user is allowed to execute on the local host.] (Unix only.

The third and fourth entries. see “How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents” on page 237.] rw validuser Examples In the following example. generating an EACCES (Permission denied) error. For Windows systems. When the nouser name is included in the users or users. nomknod nosuid nouser ro rootdir=dirname rsu=user1[:user2 . (Unix only.local file. the RSCD agent allows the client to “see” the complete directory tree from / on down. the RSCD agent sets the “root” directory to dirname by making a call to. the first and second entries in the users file grant read/ write access to user1 and user2.) By default. no password challenge) and then tries to switch to a user not in the list. chroot(2). server access is limited to users specifically included in the users or users. user1 and user2 can access this server from any other server. Both users are mapped to Administrator on this server. For more information. access is denied. If the client tries to use the rsu command with the -p option (that is. The rsu= entry defines which users the client is allowed to rsu without challenging them for a password. This entry tells the daemon that the user name/UID/GID combination of the remote (incoming) user must match a user name/UID/GID combination on the local host. By default the client is challenged for the respective user’s password but with the -p option no password is requested..local files. which are for user1 and user2. By specifying the rootdir entry. Specifying the nomknod option instructs the RSCD agent to prevent the client from making an mknod(2) call. Clients can then see files and directories from dirname on down. By default. the RSCD agent silently ignores any attempt to enable the setuid or setgid bits when creating a file or changing a file’s permissions. who are associated with the role of SrAdmin. clients are allowed to create files with the setuid or setgid bits enabled and to set setuid and setgid permission via chown(2). The named user has read/write access.. clients are allowed to create special files (character special and block special). The client command rsu allows a client to get alternate remote permissions on the agent. Because no hosts field is provided. This is a special user name that denies user access to the server unless the user has an entry specifically configured in the users or users.Examples Option map=username Description This entry forces incoming client connections to run with the permissions of username. (Unix only. The named user has read-only access. If you specify the nosuid option. do not associate those users with a role but do 252 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . you can enter a Windows user account SID rather than a user name. or emulating.local files.) By default.

If user2 is not connecting from host1 or host2.validuser hosts=host1:host2.rootdir=/data.map=Administrator JrAdmin:user3 ro. or Network Shell Proxy Server that communicates directly with an RSCD agent or repeater. and users. The exports. These entries are used for granting permissions to Network Shell users. user1 user2 user1 user2 hosts=host1:host2.map=Administrator user2 rw. user1 user2 rw rw nouser Secure file The secure file defines how BMC BladeLogic applications for a client installation and the RSCD agent on a server communicate with each other. The fifth entry grants read-only access to user3.map=Administrator SrAdmin:user2 rw. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 253 . a client application can be a Network Shell client. users.local file grants read/write access to user1 and user2 and forbids access to all other users. The secure file on the server defines parameters that the RSCD agent uses to communicate with BMC BladeLogic applications on clients.map=Anonymous nouser The following example in the users.local files” on page 247). The last entry forbids access to all users who are not specified in the users file.validuser rw. BMC BladeLogic Application Server. user2 is granted read-only permission.rw. then user1 is only given access to the /data directory and granted the permissions of user3.map=user3 ro The following example in the users. In this discussion. SrAdmin:user1 rw. The secure file for a client application defines parameters that BMC BladeLogic applications use to communicate with the RSCD agent on a server.map=Administrator user1 rw.local file grants read/write access to user1 and user2 if they are connecting from either host1 or host2 and they have a local account with the same user name and user ID as they do on the host from which they are connecting.rw.local files control user access to servers (see “Exports file” on page 240 and “Users and users. who is associated with the role of JrAdmin and is mapped to Anonymous on this server.Secure file map them to user Administrator. If user1 is not connecting from host1 or host2.

and the secure file By default. “Administering security” for a full description of all the procedures needed to implement security in a BMC BladeLogic system. On Windows. as described in the following table. encrypted. WINDIR can be For example. Clients. For simpler security installations. servers. See Chapter 4. If an entry for the remote host is not found. the application checks the secure file to see if and how the connection should be redirected and whether data should be encoded. C:\Program Files\BMC Software\ BladeLogic2\version\NSH. the application first checks the secure file for a client to see how the connection should be established. The following table shows how the location of the secure file on Windows varies between the first instance and all subsequent instances. client and server processes communicate via TCP/IP port 4750 with the server process listening on all configured NIC (Network Interface Card) addresses. servers. Always use the secadmin utility to modify the secure file. Using the secadmin utility ensures that the secure file is formatted correctly. The secure file resides in different locations in Windows and UNIX-style systems. Stronger security requires additional modifications to a system. or sent as clear text. Name and location of secure file for first instance of BMC BladeLogic /usr/lib/rsc/secure Platform Solaris Linux AIX HP-UX Windows Name and location of secure file for additional instances Not applicable WINDIR\rsc\secure installDirectoryN\version\NSH\conf\secure For example. /etc/services). The port number can be set with an entry in the Internet services databases (for example. see “Using the secadmin utility” on page 258. you can have multiple instances of BMC BladeLogic client applications. For more information. the default location for the second instance of BMC BladeLogic would be \windows or \winnt. you need only modify the secure file to establish how data is communicated between clients and servers. each with their own secure file. the application searches for an entry 254 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . If an entry for the target server exists in the secure file. and the secure file When a BMC BladeLogic application on a client attempts to connect to an RSCD daemon on a server.Clients.

the daemon uses the default values from the rscd entry. By default. which automatically negotiates the strongest form of encryption that clients and servers can support. (For more on configuring entries in the secure file. As such. see “Configuring the secure file” on page 255. see “Session layer security” on page 118. Configuring the secure file When configuring the secure file. For a more detailed description of the capabilities of this suite. TCP is a bi-directional virtual circuit protocol.Communication protocol called default to determine how the connection to the remote host should be made. see “Configuring the secure file” on page 255.) The RSCD daemon can listen on a specified port on all available NICs or a particular NIC (specified using the host= field. that connection is used to both send and receive data. the software treats it as a special entry used by the RSCD daemon. (For more on configuring the rscd entry. when a client establishes a connection to an RSCD daemon on a server. The RSCD daemon cannot listen to a port on a list of specified NICs. Communication protocol Protocol 5. the successor to SSL. It looks for an entry for a host named rscd. If no entry for the connecting host is found. If such an entry exists. BMC BladeLogic clients and RSCD agents use the TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA cipher suite. the agent uses the connection parameters defined in that entry. the BMC BladeLogic default communication protocol. establishes rules for communication between BMC BladeLogic clients and Application Servers and the RSCD agent.) If the secure file does not include an entry for the remote host or a default entry. the attempt to establish a connection is aborted. The rscd entry can specify which port and address to listen to for connection requests and it can specify default communication parameters. The RSCD first checks for an entry for the connecting host. the RSCD daemon again refers to the secure file to determine what data encoding/encryption it should expect from the client host. If an entry is not found. In other words. it can only listen on one NIC or all NICs. If an rscd entry is found. you can make three types of entries: ■ ■ default rscd Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 255 . protocol 5 uses Transport Layer Security (TLS). When a client establishes a connection. as described in “Options for secure file” on page 258). the RSCD daemon consults the secure file on the server. To determine where to listen for connection requests. the daemon listens by default to port 4750 (or as otherwise defined in the Internet services databases).

It defines connection parameters for servers that otherwise do not have an entry in the secure file. The secadmin utility encrypts any keys needed for data encryption and guarantees that the secure file is formatted correctly. For a complete list of available options. A default entry in the secure file uses the following format: default:option1:option2:option3. Creating an rscd entry is an easy way to define the same communication parameters for all of the servers in your system that are not otherwise configured in the secure file.. see “Options for secure file” on page 258. or the RSCD agent. For more information. When you initially install Network Shell. where optionN is a list of colon-separated fields.. see “Using the secadmin utility” on page 258. The default entry specifies that the client use protocol 5 and instructs clients and servers to communicate using the TLS protocol for secure communication. An rscd entry in the secure file uses the following format: rscd:option1:option2:option3. Each option in the list defines a parameter for communicating with all servers that do not have a host entry specifically defined for them.Configuring the secure file ■ host Always use the secadmin utility to configure the secure file.. Creating a default entry is an easy way to define the same communication parameters for multiple servers without having to configure entries for each of those servers. The default entry also designates the default port as 4750.. 256 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the BMC BladeLogic consoles. a default entry is automatically created in the secure file. The default entry that is automatically generated in a client’s secure file reads as follows: default:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls rscd entry The secure file allows for another special host name called rscd. It defines standard connection parameters that are used for an RSCD agent on a server communicating with clients when those clients are not included in the list of host entries on the server’s secure file. Default entry The secure file allows for a special host name called default.

hostName can be a resolvable host name. For a complete list of available options. The rscd entry also designates the default port as 4750. You must make corresponding entries in the secure file on both the client and server to establish a connection between client and server. NOTE If you change the RSCD agent port number in the secure file. IP address. see “Options for secure file” on page 258. optionN is a list of colon-separated fields. see “Options for secure file” on page 258.Configuring the secure file where optionN is a list of colon-separated fields.. you must restart both the Application Server as well as the RSCD agent on the system(s) where you changed the secure file for the change to take effect.. Each option defines a parameter for communicating with the host (or subnet) named in hostName. an rscd entry is automatically created in the secure file. The rscd entry specifies that the RSCD agent use protocol 5 and instructs clients and servers to communicate using the TLS protocol for secure communication. or subnet designation. where. hostName is the host with which the client or server is communicating. The rscd entry that is automatically generated in the secure file on a server reads as follows: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls Host entries Host entries in the secure file on a server set connection parameters that define how that server communicates with individual clients. Subnet designations are used to define a range of addresses (see “Subnet designations” on page 236). Each option in the list defines a parameter for communicating with all agents that do not have a host entry specifically defined for them. To configure host entries in the secure file. Use the following format for each entry: hostName:option1:option2:option3. create entries that define parameters for a connection with a particular host. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 257 . When you initially install an RSCD agent on a server. For a complete list of available options. Host entries in the secure file on a client set connection parameters that define how that client communicates with individual servers.

you must include the full path to the secadmin utility when running a secadmin command. modify. and host4. By default. modify. Example If you are using protocol 5 and you want to specify TLS-style encryption between a client called host1 and three servers called host2. you can find secadmin in the following locations: ■ UNIX: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/secadmin Windows: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\RSCD\secadmin ■ For a complete description of the secadmin utility. host3. or delete default or rscd entries in the secure file. You can also create. or delete entries in a secure file. you would use secadmin to make the following additions to the secure file on host1: secadmin -a host2 -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls secadmin -a host3 -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls secadmin -a host4 -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Next. host3.Options for secure file Using the secadmin utility With the secadmin utility. and host4 by entering the following command on each of those servers: secadmin -m host1 -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls If you are using secadmin on a server where Network Shell is not installed. see the man page for secadmin. you can create. the secadmin utility lets you modify entries in the securecert file. you must use secadmin to modify the secure file on host2. Additionally. Options for secure file An entry in the secure file can include the following fields: 258 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

■ When applied to a non-rscd entry. then it will be the responsibility of the of the remote daemon to forward the data to an RSCD daemon and also return any data it may return. The default value. You can set protocol to the following: ssoproxy Use the single sign-on functionality when communicating with the Network Shell Proxy Server. however. that better compression is more CPU intensive. see “Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service” on page 142. In a LAN environment the overhead required for compressing and uncompressing data is usually greater than the time saved transferring compressed data. data is not compressed. By default. you do not have to set this field because the agent automatically listens on the default system NIC card (address). If a system has a single NIC card. which specifies that BMC BladeLogic should automatically negotiate an encryption method (usually AES). if unset. Be aware.Options for secure file Option Description appserver_protocol=protocol This field specifies the authentication protocol used when communicating with a Network Shell Proxy Server. This is the default value for appserver_protocol. If keep-alive messages are sent. The host= field should only be used for systems with multiple NIC cards (real or virtual) so you can select the NIC (address) to which the RSCD agent should listen. the connecting system will notice the death of a connection or a machine crash. If you want to use data compression. Set this field to tls. the host= field determines the address to which the agent should listen for client connections. Typically you should use compression when communicating through a thin pipe. For more on Network Shell Proxy Servers. the host= field can be used to redirect data between hosts. sessions may hang indefinitely leaving hung processes or threads on the agent. If TCP keep-alives are not sent. This field specifies whether the agent should send TCP keepalive messages to the other side of a connection. This field is used differently. If the remote daemon to which the data is being sent is not another RSCD daemon. where a higher number calls for better compression. This field determines the type of data encryption that should be used. encryption=type host=value keepalive=value Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 259 . is yes. set value to a number between 1 and 9. Possible values for this field are yes or no. compression=value This field sets a data compression level. depending on whether a secure file entry defines the special host name rscd: ■ When applied to an rscd entry.

Options for secure file

Option lock=value

Description When set to a non-zero positive value, this field determines the maximum number of times a bad connection is allowed from a source address before the address is locked. A bad connection can happen if encryption is not set up properly or a particular host is not granted access. The address is locked for a period of time as defined by the unlock= field (see below). This field can be used to redirect data to a port other than the default port of 4750. On most UNIX systems, access to port numbers under 1024 requires root permissions. When selecting an alternate port number, make sure it does not conflict with some other existing service. Also, when using this field, make sure that both the client and server machines are configured to use the same port number. This field determines the transport protocol used for communication between BMC BladeLogic applications and the RSCD agent. Protocol 5, the default protocol, uses the TLS protocol (TLS is the successor to SSL) for communication between client and server. This field identifies the authentication profile that should be used to provide session credentials to Network Shell when communicating with a Network Shell Proxy Server. If you need to use multiple Network Shell Proxy Servers, you can set up a different secure file entry for each profile. Using the BL_AUTH_PROFILE_NAME environment variable, you can override the value defined with this field. For more on Network Shell Proxy Servers, see “Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service” on page 142. This field provides the Network Shell-style path to the file containing authentication profile definitions, which are necessary when Network Shell communicates with a Network Shell Proxy Server. Using the BL_AUTH_PROFILES_FILE, you can override the value defined with this option. For more on Network Shell Proxy Server, see “Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service” on page 142. When first contacting a remote server, the TCP protocol may continue to contact an offline or unavailable server for several minutes before finally giving up and reporting that a server is unavailable. This option lets you set the maximum number of seconds that a client will wait before giving up. The default value is 30 seconds. This timeout mechanism is implemented within the BMC BladeLogic code and does not in any way alter any system wide TCP parameters. If the operating system has an effective TCP timeout less than the value defined here, the OS value will take precedence.

port=value

protocol=value

auth_profile=profile

auth_profiles_file=filename

timeout=secs

260

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Examples

Option tls_mode=value

Description When using protocol 5, this field specifies one of the following values: encryption_only Use the TLS protocol to autonegotiate an encryption type (that is, a cipher) and then use that cipher to communicate. Client-side authentication or certificates are not required. Use TLS for encryption and clientside authentication. This option requires a certificate. For more on certificates, see “Implementing security – Application Server to agents or repeaters” on page 202.

encryption_and_auth

unlock=value

This field is used in conjunction with the lock= field, which allows you to lock out IP addresses that repeatedly fail to connect to the (RSCD agent) server. These failures are limited to encryption misconfigurations and host authorization errors. With the unlock= field, you can specify how many minutes the IP address should be locked before allowing connection attempts to resume. If value is a negative number, the IP address is locked until the RSCD agent is restarted. The default value for unlock= is 1 minute. This field turns off X11 forwarding. By default this field is set to on and X11 forwarding is enabled for this agent. This field defines an offset from 6000, and together these values specify the port that the agent binds to for X11 forwarding. By default X11 forwarding starts at port 6010 (6000 plus an offset of 10). Any new connections afterwards increments the offset by one (that is, 6011, 6012, and so forth).

x11_fwd=on |off x11_port_offset=value

Examples
The following examples are meant to serve as sample uses of the fields available in a secure file. To generate entries in a secure file like those shown below, use the secadmin utility. Using the secadmin utility ensures that the secure file is formatted correctly. For more information, see “Using the secadmin utility” on page 258. The following example shows a typical default entry for BMC BladeLogic clients.
default:port=4750:protocol=5:encryption=tls

The following example shows a subnet in an entry:
@192.168.12.13/24:protocol=5:encryption=tls

Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files

261

Securecert file

The following example instructs a Network Shell client to communicate with a Network Shell Proxy Server using an authentication profile called QAProfile. The authentication profile is stored in the default location for the authentication profile file: default:protocol=5:encryption=tls:appserver_protocol=ssoproxy: auth_profile=QAProfile:auth_profiles_file=/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/ authenticationProfiles.xml The following example shows how to use a port other than the default port of 4750. If you use host1 as the client host and host2 as the remote host, the following entry should be in the secure file of host1
host2:port=987

while the following entry should be in the secure file of host2:
host1:port=987

The following example shows how to instruct the RSCD agent to listen on a specific address for client connections: rscd:host=192.168.10.20

Securecert file
The securecert file stores passphrases used to encrypt the private keys for X.509 certificates. By storing passphrases in the securecert file, BMC BladeLogic can access those passphrases without any user interaction. Accessing passwords noninteractively is essential for setting up secure, certificate-based communication with an Application Server. It is also necessary when using secure communication to deploy assets via repeaters (that is, with an indirect deployment). When setting up a securecert file for an Application Server, you must provide an entry for the owner of the process that communicates securely with repeaters and servers. The owner of the process is bladmin on UNIX-style systems and SYSTEM on Windows. When setting up a securecert file for a repeater, you must provide an entry for all users that communicate with servers. On UNIX-style systems, you must provide an entry for any users to whom other users are mapped (typically root). On Windows, you must provide an entry for the user named BMC BladeLogicRSCD. For more information on using the securecert file while setting up security for a BMC BladeLogic system, see Chapter 4, “Administering security.”.

262

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Configuring the securecert file

The securecert file resides in different locations on Windows and UNIX-style systems, as described in the following table. On Windows, you can have multiple instances of BMC BladeLogic client applications, each with their own securecert file. The following table shows how the location of the securecert file on Windows varies between the first instance and all subsequent instances.
Name and location of securecert file for first Name and location of securecert file for instance of BMC BladeLogic additional instances /usr/lib/rsc/securecert Not applicable

Platform Solaris Linux AIX HP-UX Windows

WINDIR\rsc\securecert For example, WINDIR can be \windows or \winnt.

installDirectoryN\version\NSH\conf\ securecert For example, the default location for the second instance of BMC BladeLogic would be C:\Program Files\BMC Software\ BladeLogic2\version\NSH.

Configuring the securecert file
When configuring a securecert file, you can make entries for the Application Server and repeaters. On the Application Server, create an entry like the following for the owner of the process that communicates securely with repeaters and servers:
[Default] processOwner=********

where processOwner is bladmin for UNIX-style systems and SYSTEM for Windows. You must use the secadmin utility to modify a securecert file. (For more on secadmin, see “Using the secadmin utility” on page 258 or the man page for secadmin). To create an entry like the one shown above using the secadmin utility, enter the following command:
secadmin -m default -cu bladmin -cp password

Enter the password in clear text. The secadmin utility encrypts the password. On repeaters, create an entry like the following for the administrative user that communicates with servers:

Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files

263

BMC BladeLogic log file reference

[Default] adminUser=********

where adminUser is typically root for UNIX-style systems and BladeLogicRSCD for Windows. Using the secadmin utility to create the entry like the one shown above, enter the following command:
secadmin -m default -cu root -cp password

BMC BladeLogic log file reference
About logging configuration for BMC BladeLogic
BMC BladeLogic uses log4j to capture log messages from the console and the BMC BladeLogic Application Server. Log4j is an open source logging framework used to control logging output from Java applications. For more information on log4j, see http://jakarta.apache.org/log4j/docs/. Unless instructed otherwise by BladeLogic Support, the default logging configuration is recommended for normal operation. BladeLogic Support may ask the Application Server Administrator to enable DEBUG logging for a single logger when debugging a particular issue. This change will typically be backed out once the requested DEBUG information has been gathered.

Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files
A standard BMC BladeLogic installation provides default logging behavior that satisfies the needs of many organizations. Defaults vary for Windows and UNIX-style systems. The default behavior for Windows is:

The RSCD agent logs to rscdInstallDirectory\rscd.log as a rollfile at the info1 level. The RSCD agent service logs to rscdInstallDirectory\rscdsvc.log as a rollfile at the info level. BLPackage Deploy Jobs log at the debug level to locations based on the name and location of the jobs.

264

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files

BLPackage Deploy Jobs on the console log to stdout as a stream at the debug level. The priority level can be overridden using Transaction Options when defining the BLPackage Deploy Job. For more information, see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. The Application Server logs to installDirectory\br\appserver.log as a stream at the info level.

The default behavior for UNIX is:

The RSCD agent logs to rscdInstallDirectory/log/rscd.log as a rollfile at the info1 level. BLPackage Deploy Jobs log at the debug level to locations based on the name and location of the jobs. BLPackage Deploy Jobs on the console log to stdout as a stream at the debug level. The priority level can be overridden using Transaction Options when defining the BLPackage Deploy Job. For more information, see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. The Application Server logs to installDirectory/br/appserver.log as a stream at the info level.

Table 1 lists the various log files that are used by BMC BladeLogic which may be of interest to you. Table 1 Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files (part 1 of 3)
Description and default location Application Server appserver.log Application Server log installDirectory/br/appserver.log Infrastructure Management => AppServer Launcher => Edit AppServer LogfileName attribute installDirectory/br/deployments/ deploymentName/log4j.properties AppServerLauncher.log AppServer Launcher log installDirectory/br/ AppServerLauncher.log post_install.log Application Server configuration log installDirectory/br/post_install.log installDirectory/br/deployments/ deploymentName/log4j.properties installDirectory/br/deployments/ _template/log4j.properties Where to configure

Log file name

Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files

265

Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files

Table 1

Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files (part 2 of 3)
Description and default location Application Server Console log installDirectory/br/Console.log Where to configure Infrastructure Management => AppServer Launcher => Edit AppServer ConsoleLogfileName attribute installDirectory/deployments/ deploymentName/log4j.properties RSCD Agent (Windows)

Log file name Console.log

rscd.log*

Windows RSCD Agent log rscdInstallDirectory\rscd.log

rscdInstallDirectory\log4crc.txt

keystroke.log*

nexec session log rscdInstallDirectory\keystroke.log*

rscdInstallDirectory\log4crc.txt

rscdsvc.log*

RSCD agent service rscdInstallDirectory\rscdsvc.log

rscdInstallDirectory\log4crc.txt

*.log

Deploy Job log rscdInstallDirectory\Transactions\log\*.log RSCD Agent (UNIX)

rscdInstallDirectory\log4crc.txt

rscd.log*

UNIX RSCD Agent log rscdInstallDirectory/log/rscd.log

rscdInstallDirectory/log4crc.txt

keystroke.log*

nexec session log rscdInstallDirectory/log/keystroke.log*

rscdInstallDirectory/log4crc.txt

*.log

Deploy Job log rscdInstallDirectory/Transaction/log/*.log RCP Client (Windows)

rscdInstallDirectory/log4crc.txt

.log

BMC BladeLogic Console log WindowsHomeDirectory\BladeLogic\ 1_1_2\Workspacen\.metadata\.log

installDirectory\br\rcp.cf

BLWorkbenchPlugin.log BLWorkbenchPlugin log WindowsHomeDirectory\BladeLogic\ 1_1_2\Workspacen\.metadata\.plugins\ com.bladelogic.client.ui\ BLWorkbenchPlugin.log RCP Client (UNIX) .log BMC BladeLogic Console log /root/.bladelogic/1_1_2/Workspacen/ .metadata/.log 266 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

installDirectory\br\rcp.cf

installDirectory/br/rcp.cf

log* PXE Server log installDirectory/br/pxesrvr.bladelogic/blcli-log. the file is located in installDirectory/br/deployments/deploymentName/log4j.metadata/. By default.cf /.properties installDirectory/br/tftpsvr.log PXE server pxesrvr.client. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 267 .log BLWorkbenchPlugin log /root/. Within the configuration files for each specific deployment.bladelogic.log* TFTP Server log installDirectory/br/tftpsvr. logging is controlled by the log4j.log file.ui/ BLWorkbenchPlugin.plugins/ com. also located in the Application Server installation directory for the specific deployment.bladelogic/blcli.bladelogic/1_1_2/Workspacen/ .log BLCLI Windows log C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Application Data\BladeLogic\blcli. Application Server logging output is written to the appserver.cf C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Application Data\BladeLogic\blcli-log.Application Server logging Table 1 Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files (part 3 of 3) Description and default location Where to configure installDirectory/br/rcp.log BLCLI UNIX log /. which is located in the Application Server installation directory for that deployment.cf Application Server logging Logging is controlled at the Application Server instance level.log BLCLI (UNIX) blcli.log installDirectory/br/deployments/ _pxe/log4j.properties file. The following sections provide information on the log4j.cf Log file name BLWorkbenchPlugin.log* tftpsvr.log* BLCLI (Windows) blcli.properties configuration file.properties By default.

By default. To do so.properties In addition to controlling the logging information. There are comments within the file describing other options not defined here.MaxFileSize option. This section describes how to manipulate some of the basic properties of the configuration file.properties file contains a large list of loggers that can be configured to add useful debug information. You can enable logging of Content Authoring debug information. specifying the relative or full path of the log file. Modifying basic logging attributes Table 2 on page 268 describes some of the basic log attributes that can be controlled by modifying options in the log4j. This option instructs the log4j system to use the specified path for logging.appender. a backup file will be made and a new log file will be created. the log4j. You can enable logging of performance-related information pertaining to the Application Server. To do so.properties file can also control where the logging information is stored and how the log files are managed. locate the Content Authoring related debug logs section in the file and uncomment the lines in that section. You can set the number of roll-over files using the log4j.appender. When debugging specific issues with the system. These loggers are initially configured with the log level INFO to prevent the log files from containing too much information. By default. You can enable logging of timing information pertaining to the Deploy Jobs. To do so. When a log file reaches its maximum size.File option. 268 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Table 2 Attribute Log Files Location Modifying basic Application Server logging attributes Description You can set the log file location using the log4j. You can set the maximum file size for the log file using the log4j. locate the BlDeploy appserver performance logging section in the file and uncomment the lines in that section.R.MaxBackupIndex option. the maximum log file size is 5000KB. This value controls how many backup files will be retained. locate the timing for deploy jobs section in the file and uncomment the lines in that section.Application Server logging Modifying logging configuration using log4j. you can modify one or more of the specified loggers in the file to set the log level to DEBUG.R.appender. Maximum file size Number of roll-over files Performance logging Timing for Deploy Jobs Content Authoring Log configuration Additional debug logging The log4j.R.properties file. the maximum number of roll-over files is 5.

R.logger.bladelogic. To enable basic debug logging 1 Open the log4j. For example. C Once saved. Modifying log file names from the BMC BladeLogic Console You can also modify basic logging options for the Application Server from the BMC BladeLogic Console.app.properties file control loggers that are useful for debugging: ■ log4j. 2 Locate the following line: log4j. ■ log4j. C 3 Modify the line to read: log4j.Demux – This logger controls messages generated by the networking layer. 3 Right-click the Application Server you want to edit and select Edit.com.Application Server logging NOTE Debugging issues with the Application Server often require assistance by BMC BladeLogic Customer Support.demux.properties file.bladelogic.rootLogger=DEBUG.logger. There are many logger options that give you the ability to enable debug logging for very specific tasks.rootLogger=INFO. See the comment lines in the log4j. select Infrastructure Management.mfw.com. from the Configuration menu.properties file for additional information on these logger options. 2 Expand the hierarchy of the Application Servers node.DBServiceImpl – This logger controls messages generated by the database service. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. The Edit Application Server Profile dialog opens.db. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 269 . the following options in the log4j. the application server will automatically detect the logging level modification after a short period of time and being logging data in debug mode. R.

When you create a new Application Server. LogfileName The name of the log file for the Application Server. The console. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. BMC BladeLogic sets the console log file’s name to the Application Server name plus “_console”. but in addition it also captures any output that does not go through the log4j logging system. set the ConsoleLogfileName to be empty. click OK. specify a name that is unique on the host.properties). To disable console logging. If you edit this attribute.log extension. plus any information logged to the console.log file. The console log file contains all information logged to the Application Server log. You can set the number of roll-over files for the console log file in the log4j. BMC BladeLogic sets the log file’s name to the Application Server name plus the . If you edit this attribute.log file contains the same information as the appserver.log file is useful for debugging when certain output is not captured by the regular log files. 5 When you are finished editing the profile. 7 Start or restart the Application Server to have changes take effect.properties file accessed from the _template deployment directory (/br/ deployments/_template/log4j. an Application Server running on Linux or Solaris can be configured to write all the standard output and standard error information into a file called console. Console logging is enabled by default. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host.Application Server logging 4 In the Edit Application Server Profile dialog. When you create a new Application Server. For example. information such as the java thread dump and any messages generated by third party code used by the Application Server that logs messages to standard out/err. The console. 6 Click OK on the warning that configuration changes do not take effect until you restart the Application Server.log file. As with the Application Server log files. the console log files are configured to rollover. Enabling more detailed logging In addition to the appserver. Attribute ConsoleLogfileName Description The name of the console log file for the Application Server. specify a name that is unique on the host. add or change values for the following attributes. 270 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .log.

log. which logs messages from the TFTP server.txt. ■ For more information on log4j.txt file” on page 272. see http://jakarta.Agent logging Agent logging The log4crc. PXE Server logging The log file for the PXE Server is controlled with the log4j.txt file allows you to control Agent logging in BMC BladeLogic so that all Agent events are logged using consistent formats. which logs messages from the BMC BladeLogic Console. how often logs are rotated. tftpsvr. The Generate Support Data tool generates data about the Application Servers and other components in the BMC BladeLogic environment and packages that data into a zip file. BMC BladeLogic uses the following configuration files (all found in installDirectory/br) to control logging with log4j: ■ ui. and what sort of layout the contents of each log should use. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 271 .properties file located in the PXE server deployment (_pxe directory). you can control which log files BMC BladeLogic generates.cf—Configures ui.cf—Configures tftpsvr.org/log4j/docs/.txt file is XML-based. For detailed information. see “About the Log4crc. Collecting log data You can use the Support Data Generation tool to capture log data that you can then send to BMC Software Customer Support. how much information is included in each file. This data can be useful for diagnostic purposes when you contact Customer Support. You access the tool from the BMC BladeLogic Console by selecting Configuration => Generate Support Data. By modifying XML tags in log4crc. see “Generating data for support” on page 19. For specific instructions. Additional log files of interest Additionally.log. The log4crc.apache. where each log file is generated.

properties file. By modifying XML tags in log4crc. WINDIR can be \windows or \winnt. Name and location of log4crc.txt file for additional instances Not applicable WINDIR\rsc\log4crc.txt file allows you to control Agent logging in BMC BladeLogic so that all Agent events are logged using consistent formats.txt.txt file The log4crc. The following table shows how the location of the log4crc.txt file on Windows varies between the first instance and all subsequent instances. On Windows. see “Application Server logging” on page 267. installDirectoryN\version\NSH\conf \log4crc. you control logging attributes using the Infrastructure Management window on the BMC BladeLogic Console and in the Application Server profiles of each default and custom profiles.txt file. each with their own log4crc. For Application Server logging.txt file About the Log4crc.txt file resides in different locations on Windows and UNIX-style systems.txt For example. how much information is included in each file.txt file for first instance of BMC BladeLogic /usr/lib/rsc/log4crc. logging level.txt file is used to control Agent logging. The log appender.txt For example. where each log file is generated. you can have multiple instances of BMC BladeLogic client applications.About the Log4crc. and what sort of layout the contents of each log should use. Syntax The syntax of the log4crc. how often logs are rotated.txt file consists of three tags: <category> <appender> <layout> 272 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .txt file is XML-based. you can control which log files BMC BladeLogic generates. the default location for the second instance of BMC BladeLogic would be C:\Program Files\BMC Software\ BladeLogic2\version\NSH. For more information. The log4crc.txt Platform Solaris Linux AIX HP-UX Windows Name and location of log4crc. NOTE The log4crc. as described in the following table. The log4crc. and logging format for Application Server logs are controlled using the log4j.

Agitator managed internally by Deploy Job executables. Logs all warnings and errors.log"/--> <category name="rscdsvc" priority="info" appender="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/ BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscdsvc. Generates a keystroke log that records nexec sessions. Logs all errors. see “Enabling keystroke logging” on page 283. Logs only connection information. The following list shows the <category> tags included by default in the log4crc. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 273 . this is disabled (commented out).txt file category The <category> tag identifies the types of logging that BMC BladeLogic generates. <category name="root" priority="info"/> <category name="rscd" priority="info1" appender="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/ BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscd.txt file in a Windows installation. priority. Generates a log for the RSCD agent server. Do not modify this <category> tag. Do not modify this <category> tag. The <category> tag can include three options: name. Agitator managed internally by Deploy Job executables. A category managed internally by Deploy Job executables.log" debugappender="stderr"/> <!-category name="keystroke" priority="info1" appender="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/keystroke. Uncomment it to enable keystroke logging. This option only applies to Windows installations. which monitors the RSCD agent and restarts the agent if necessary. rscdsvc bldeploy bldeployConsole bldeployAppserver The priority= option specifies the amount of information included in a log. and appender.About the Log4crc. Do not modify this <category> tag. Default values vary somewhat for UNIX-style installations. The following table identifies all possible names: Name rscd keystroke Description Generates a log for the RSCD agent. including fatal errors. By default. The following table identifies the possible priority levels: Priority fatal error warn info Description Logs only fatal errors.log" debugappender="stderr"/> <category name="bldeploy" priority="debug"/> <category name="bldeployConsole" priority="debug" appender="stdout"/> <categoryname="bldeployAppserver"priority="error"appender="blbasic"/> The name= option identifies the type of log file BMC BladeLogic generates. For more information.

Logs the STDIN and STDERR streams of the command being run by nexec.log2. info2 debug Note that keystroke logs (where name is set to keystroke) support only the following options: Priority info info1 info2 Description Logs only the STDIN stream of the command being run by nexec.log1 is renamed to rscd. the current log file is renamed to rscd. This priority corresponds to logging level 1 in older releases of BMC BladeLogic.log1. Do not use a Network Shell-style path. and STDOUT streams of the command being run by nexec. the <category> tag named rscd). This priority is only valid for the RSCD agent log (that is. When a log file is rolled.log file. All new information is then recorded in the rscd.log is renamed to rscd.log.log1.About the Log4crc. usually to prevent log files from getting excessively large. Enter the path using a UNIX or Windows format. Logs connection information and user actions. When the log file is rolled again. as well as all the system calls that an RSCD agent performs to execute user actions. Logs the STDIN. You can specify that log files are rolled at specified intervals or when log files reach a particular size. For example. the <category> tag named rscd). 274 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Logs all messages.txt file Priority info1 Description Logs connection information and user actions. The <appender> tag also lets you specify secure agent logging and keystroke logging. This priority corresponds to logging level 2 in older releases of BMC BladeLogic. rscd. STDERR. The appender= tag provides a name and path for a log file. rscd. the file is renamed with a number appended to its name. This priority is only valid for the RSCD agent log (that is. appender The <appender> tag specifies whether logging information is stored as a stream in a file or periodically rolled over into a new file. and all new information is recorded in rscd.

Instead. only one category can be output to a single log. The following table identifies the possible types: NOTE You can only roll log files when one source of logging data is being used to create a log file.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/> The name= option must match the name (including its full path) assigned to an appender option in a <category> tag.log" type="digisign" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. For information about secure logging. see “Using secure agent logging” on page 277 and “Using keystroke log files” on page 281.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. In other words. a feature that is disabled by default. <appender name="stdout" type="stream" layout="basic"/> <appender name="stderr" type="stream" layout="basic"/> <appender name="syslog" type="syslog" layout="basic"/> <appender name="/tmp/bllog" type="stream" layout="dated"/> <appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscd. Logging information is output to the UNIX syslog.txt file The <appender> tag can include three options: name.pem"/--> <appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscdsvc.About the Log4crc. The type= option specifies what type of log file to generate. If you are using this option for UNIX systems. Type stream syslog Description Logging information is output in a continuous stream to a file. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 275 . you must set type=stream. you cannot use type=rollfile to roll log files. The following list shows the <appender> tags that are included by default in the log4crc.pem"/--> <!-appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/ keystroke.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. type. NOTE The two commented out entries (where type is set to digisign or encrypt) are used in secure logging. and layout. If multiple sources are output to the same log.txt file.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/> <!-appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/ rscd. you must configure the UNIX syslog daemon (see “Configuring the UNIX syslog” on page 284).log" type="encrypt" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="rawtime" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.

1 to log. and rollmaxfiles mean the same as they do for rollfile. the information in file log. If you set type=rollfile. In addition to these parameters. Specifies the file containing the agent’s private key. 276 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . you can specify how log files are rotated by including one or more of the following options in the <appender> tag: rollsize Specifies a maximum number of characters for the log file. rolltimeinsec and rollmaxfiles mean the same as they do for rollfile. logging information is output to a file that is periodically rolled over into another file. the next time the log files roll over.txt file Type rollfile Description Logging information is output to a file that is periodically rolled over into another file. In this case. When the file reaches that maximum. In addition. logging information is output to a file that is periodically rolled over into another file. digisign needs the following additional parameters: certfile privatekeyfile Specifies the file containing the agent’s certificate. if you set rollmaxfiles=10. As with rollfile. if you have already generated ten log files. For example. log entries and rolled log files are encrypted and protected using the security mechanisms described in “Using keystroke log files” on page 281. rolltimeinsec. log files are rolled. encrypt needs the following additional parameters: certfile privatekeyfile Specifies the file containing the agent’s certificate.10 is lost.10. Specifies the maximum number of files used for logging. you can store log files named log. rolltimeinsec rollmaxfiles digisign As with rollfile. encrypt Used for keystroke log files. In addition to these parameters.About the Log4crc. In addition. The parameters rollsize. log entries and rolled log files are protected using the security mechanisms described in “Using secure agent logging” on page 277. The parameters rollsize. Specifies the file containing the agent’s private key. Specifies an interval in seconds for rolling log files.

rawtime <layout> The <layout> tag defines the format of logging entries. log entries use the same format as the data that is generated for the log message.About the Log4crc. Verifying the integrity of log files. This layout outputs minimal information in the log file—just the timestamp and the actual message. Except for the time stamp. To develop additional logging formats.txt file The layout= option specifies the type of layout used for logging information. A time stamp precedes all log entries. see: ■ ■ ■ ■ Overview of the security processes Verifying the integrity of log files Enabling secure agent logging Disabling secure agent logging Overview of the security processes Here is an overview of the security processes that take place as an agent writes and rolls a log file. It does not output the category name and log level that the basic and dated layouts do. You can later check log file integrity by using the bllogman command. Using secure agent logging Secure agent logging is a rolling log mechanism that protects your RSCD agent log files by: ■ Securing each entry in the current log file with a Message Authentication Code (MAC) and sequence number. Protecting rolled log files with digital signatures. and recording the status of each verification. Used only when type is set to encrypt. Users should not modify the syntax of the <layout> tag. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 277 . The following table identifies all possible layouts: Type basic dated Description Log entries use the same format of the data that is generated for the log message. contact BMC Software support. ■ ■ For additional information about secure agent logging.

It also associates a sequence number with each entry. rscd. the agent will generate a new session key. the status field is set to Inconsistent.222 23694 99/99 (Administrator): nexec: nexec engrhes40vm10 ifconfig -a 3.txt file 1. the RSCD agent generates a random session key.21. Note that this session key will be used only for the writing of this one log file.log is rolled to rscd. In this case.About the Log4crc. the order) of each log entry. It also verifies the sequence number (or in other words.10.log.sig1. the corresponding signature file would be called rscd.log1. ■ Digital signature file. it uses the session key to calculate a MAC and associate this MAC with each log entry. The following events take place at rollover: ■ MAC verification test and sequencing test. The RSCD agent starts writing its first log file—rscd.269 INFO rscd . rscd. — The signature file has a status field. The agent creates a corresponding digital signature file for the rolled log file rscd. When it is time for a rollover. As it writes each log entry. If the rolled log file passed the MAC test and the sequencing test. If either the MAC test or the sequencing test fails. When this log file is rolled and it is time to start a new log file. MAC Sequence number 3d8591f27a805b0edac5 0000000012 07/28/07 02:45:16. the status field is set to Consistent. against each entry’s MAC.log1. The agent will use this key to calculate a Message Authentication Code (MAC) for each entry in the log file. the agent raises an event (in EventLog on Windows and syslog on UNIX-style systems) indicating that the file has been tampered with. If the rolled log file failed the MAC test or the sequencing test.log. 278 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .20.log1. The agent verifies the integrity of each log entry in the rolled log file. 2. Before beginning to write its first log file.

txt file You can use the information stored in the status field to verify the integrity of a rolled log file. there are five log files on the agent machine.log1 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd. NOTE If an agent is restarted. with the creation of a new random session key for use in creating MACs for the next version of rscd. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 279 . — The MAC and sequence number fields are stripped as part of the process of signing the rolled log file. the signature file will be rolled along with its associated log file. Example: engw2k3agt1% bllogman list --verify engrhes40vm10 Logfile(s) for host engrhes40vm10 with status: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd.log. One file (rscd. engrhes40vm10. as described in “Verifying the integrity of log files” on page 279.log3 () --> Inconsistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd. The agent also does the MAC verification test and sequencing test on the rolled log file. as described the procedure below. For additional information about bllogman.About the Log4crc. Enabling secure agent logging You can enable secure agent logs as part of your initial installation (see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide) or later on.log () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd.log2 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd.log3) is reported as Inconsistent. Verifying the integrity of log files You can verify the integrity of all agent log files by using the NSH command. the previous log file is automatically rolled and signed at agent startup. The cycle begins again. which indicates that it has been tampered with. 4. bllogman. see the bllogman man page. — At the next roll.log4 () --> Consistent engw2k3agt1% In the above example.

rscd.log.log" type="digisign" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. rscd. rscd.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/ WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. 2 Back up all your existing agent log files (if any).pem"/> 5 Start the RSCD agent. remove or comment out the rscd. secure agent logs are only enabled (even if you have followed these steps) if the server on which the agent is running has either a working random number generator or PRNGD installed. 3 Delete all the agent log files. and so on. 4 Delete all the agent log files. Otherwise.txt configuration file: In the <appender> section.log1.pem file and the signature files. 5 Make the following changes to the log4crc. rscd. usual rolling logs will be generated.log appender entry that has type set to rollfile: <!-appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/ rscd. 2 Stop the RSCD agent.log. 3 Stop the RSCD agent.log1. Disabling secure agent logging If you have enabled secure agent logging and you now want to disable it: 1 Back up the certificate.txt configuration file: 280 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . These files have names like rscd.log2. See the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide for more information.txt file 1 Back up all your existing agent log files (if any). These files have names like rscd.log2.About the Log4crc. NOTE On UNIX agents.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/--> Uncomment or add the following entry where type is set to digisign: <appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscd. 4 Make the following changes to the log4crc. and so on.

txt file In the <appender> section. Using keystroke log files You can configure the BMC BladeLogic RSCD agent to generate keystroke logs that record nexec sessions. Whenever a remote user uses the NSH command nexec to execute a command on an agent machine. Similar to the secure agent logs. add or uncomment the rscd.pem"/>--> ■ Start the RSCD agent.log appender entry that has type set to rollfile: appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscd. Additionally. which lets you verify the integrity of a keystroke log file. you can verify the integrity of all the keystroke logs on an agent machine. STDOUT. each keystroke log file is accompanied by a digital signature file. Keystroke logs are similar to the secure agent logs described in “Using secure agent logging” on page 277: keystroke logs are rolled periodically and are digitally signed after they are rolled. By using the NSH command blkeylogman. the keystroke log captures and stores the command’s STDIN.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated" Comment out or delete the following entry where type is set to digisign: <!--<appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/ rscd. and STDERR streams. or a particular keystroke log file on an agent machine. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 281 .log" type="digisign" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. keystroke logs are encrypted and so are not readable.About the Log4crc.

Copy a (decrypted) keystroke log file from an agent to the client host.log10 () --> Consistent engw2k3agt1% In the above example. an event is raised (In the Eventlog on Windows and syslog on UNIXstyle systems).log2 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke.log8 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke.log7 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. The blkeylogman utility also lets you: ■ View the decrypted contents of keystroke log files. 282 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . which indicates that it has been tampered with.txt file Example: engw2k3agt1% blkeylogman list --verify engrhes40vm10 Keystroke Logfile(s) for host engrhes40vm10 with status: \ /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke.log1 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. These two are then stripped off from the file and a digital signature is computed for it. MAC Sequence number 967ff34b84f754c0774a 0000000011 Zl8abih3bvmLNHwTnE4iK5UqeYXWMk2ZQ4 2xdR3nNo8lE2/xUoVxPOd8CSlg7hAygMQgO7D6VmbB2QZVAG6ucg== When the active keystroke log file is rolled. there are ten keystroke log files on the agent machine.log5) is reported as Inconsistent.log9 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. One file (keystroke. ■ ■ For more details.log3 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke.log in the above example) is also protected by MAC codes and sequence numbers. the agent tests it for consistency using the MACs and the sequence numbers.log6 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke.log5 () --> Inconsistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. View a list of various nexec sessions that have been recorded in the keystroke logs. If the log file was detected Inconsistent during this process.log4 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke.About the Log4crc. see the blkeylogman man page.log () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. The active keystroke log file (/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke.

where name is set to keystroke: <categoryname="keystroke"priority="info1"appender="C:/ProgramFiles/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/keystroke. 2 Make the following changes to the log4crc.txt configuration file: In the <category> section. where type is set to encrypt: <appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/ keystroke.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. 2 Stop the RSCD agent. Disabling keystroke logging If you have enabled keystroke logging and you now want to disable it: 1 Back up the certificate. See the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide for more information. keystroke logging is only enabled (even if you have followed these steps). 1 Stop the RSCD agent.log"/> In the <appender> section. see “Disabling keystroke logging” on page 283. as described in “Enabling keystroke logging” on page 283. 3 Make the following changes to the log4crc. To disable keystroke logging.log" type="encrypt" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="rawtime" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.txt file You can enable keystroke logs as part of your initial installation (see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide) or later on. NOTE On UNIX agents. Enabling keystroke logging You can enable keystroke logging as part of your initial installation (see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide) or later on.txt configuration file: Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 283 . as described in the procedure below. uncomment or add the following entry. if the server on which the agent is running has either a working random number generator or PRNGD installed. uncomment or add the following entry.pem file.About the Log4crc.pem"/> 3 Start the RSCD agent.

comment out or delete the following entry. Within /etc/syslog.txt file In the <category> section. you must configure the syslog daemon to accept output from BMC BladeLogic. a priority level.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.debug /var/log/rscd-syslog BMC BladeLogic uses the local6 facility. configure a facility.log"/>--> In the <appender> section. where type is set to encrypt: <!--<appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/ keystroke.conf. 284 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . comment out or delete the following entry.pem"/>--> ■ Start the RSCD agent. and a location for the syslog by creating an entry like the following: local6.About the Log4crc. Configuring the UNIX syslog If you are logging output to the UNIX syslog. where name is set to keystroke: <!--<category name="keystroke" priority="info1" appender="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/keystroke.log" type="encrypt" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="rawtime" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.

log" debugappender="stderr"/> <category name="bldeploy" priority="debug"/> <category name="bldeployConsole" priority="debug" appender="stdout"/> <category name="bldeployAppserver" priority="error" appender="blbasic"/> <!-.log" type="encrypt" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="rawtime" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.root category ========================================= --> <category name="root" priority="info"/> <category name="rscd" priority="info1" appender="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/ version/RSCD/rscd.appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscd.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1"?> <!DOCTYPE log4c SYSTEM ""> <log4c version="1.About the Log4crc.0"> <!-.log"/--> <category name="rscdsvc" priority="info" appender="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/ version/RSCD/rscdsvc.txt file for a Windows installation.pem"/--> <!-appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/keystroke.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/> <!-.1.default layouts ======================================= --> <layout name="basic" type="basic"/> <layout name="dated" type="dated"/> <layout name="rawtime" type="rawtime"/> </log4c> Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 285 .log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/> <!-.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. <?xml version="1.pem"/--> <appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscdsvc.log" debugappender="stderr"/> <!--categoryname="keystroke"priority="info1"appender="C:/ProgramFiles/BMCSoftware/ BladeLogic/version/RSCD/keystroke.log" type="digisign" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.default appenders ===================================== --> <appender name="stdout" type="stream" layout="basic"/> <appender name="stderr" type="stream" layout="basic"/> <appender name="syslog" type="syslog" layout="basic"/> <appender name="/tmp/bllog" type="stream" layout="dated"/> <appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscd.txt file Default default log4crc.txt file examples The following is an example of a default log4crc.

log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/> <!-.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1"?> <!DOCTYPE log4c SYSTEM ""> <log4c version="1.log" debugappender="stderr"/> <!--categoryname="keystroke"priority="info1"appender="/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/ NSH/log/keystroke.txt file The following is an example of a default log4crc.root category ========================================= --> <category name="root" priority="info"/> <categoryname="rscd"priority="info1"appender="/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/ rscd. <?xml version="1.default layouts ======================================= --> <layout name="basic" type="basic"/> <layout name="dated" type="dated"/> <layout name="rawtime" type="rawtime"/> </log4c> 286 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .0"> <!-.pem" privatekeyfile="/usr/lib/rsc/certificate.log"/--> <category name="rscdsvc" priority="info" appender="/tmp/rscdsvc.About the Log4crc.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/> <!-.pem" privatekeyfile="/usr/lib/rsc/certificate.pem"/--> <appender name="/tmp/rscdsvc.appender name="/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd.log" type="digisign" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated" certfile="/usr/lib/ rsc/certificate.log" debugappender="stderr"/> <category name="bldeploy" priority="debug"/> <category name="bldeployConsole" priority="debug" appender="stdout"/> <category name="bldeployAppserver" priority="error" appender="blbasic"/> <!-.default appenders ===================================== --> <appender name="stdout" type="stream" layout="basic"/> <appender name="stderr" type="stream" layout="basic"/> <appender name="syslog" type="syslog" layout="basic"/> <appender name="/tmp/bllog" type="stream" layout="dated"/> <appender name="/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd.pem"/--> <!--appendername="/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke.log"type="encrypt" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="rawtime" certfile="/usr/ lib/rsc/certificate.txt file for a UNIX-style installation.1.

snapshot results.Chapter 6 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data BMC BladeLogic provides a suite of tools for managing data in the BMC BladeLogic system and controlling its growth where necessary. Target Servers (Agents). Repeater Servers. The BMC BladeLogic Database. the Application Server to which you are connected. For information. audit results. The database clean-up utility also deletes old audit trail entries. patch analysis. This data consists of old files that are no longer accessed. For information. and auto-remediation. This utility lets you delete old temporary files from a specific Application Server. For information. You can mark these objects for deletion. You can reduce the number of temporary files in the Application Server cache (directory) by using the Application Server clean-up utility. see “Marking data for deletion” on page 289. you can use the target server clean-up utility to delete these files. For information. see “Cleaning up target servers (Agents)” on page 293. You can reduce the amount of space taken up by unused data in the database by executing the database clean-up utility. the objects are deleted from the database the next time the database clean-up utility is run. This utility deletes from the database objects users have deleted in the BMC BladeLogic Console and objects marked for deletion with the retention policy utility. or all accessible Application Servers. You can manage data in these areas: ■ The BMC BladeLogic Console. For information. You can delete data that has accumulated on target servers (BMC BladeLogic agents) from Deploy Jobs. You can delete these files by using the repeater clean-up utility. and compliance results. see “Cleaning up repeater servers” on page 294. You can reduce clutter in your workspace from objects created by job runs. see “Cleaning up the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 288. see “Cleaning the Application Server cache” on page 293. These tools let you delete unused data or data no longer needed for BMC BladeLogic operations. Data from Deploy Jobs can also accumulate in the staging directory on repeater servers. The Application Server Cache. ■ ■ ■ ■ Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 287 .

see “Marking data for deletion” on page 289. For information. TIP BMC Software recommends that you run the clean-up utility once per week. The result drops to 0 when the cleanup completes. see “Cleaning up the file server” on page 295. To run the database clean-up utility. While the database clean-up utility is running. This utility lets you mark for deletion from the BMC BladeLogic database old job runs and objects automatically generated by operations such as auto-remediation and patch analysis. You can delete unused files from the file server. Objects marked as deleted with the retention policy utility. To execute the retention policy utility using the CLI or to run the database clean-up utility. ■ About the clean-up utility The database clean-up utility works in conjunction with the retention policy utility. see “Executing the database clean-up utility” on page 292. if you query again. This clean-up utility deletes any data from the database that has been previously marked for deletion. These objects include old job runs and job and depot objects automatically created during patching and auto-remediation. you can run the following database query to determine how many depot objects the database clean-up utility will delete: select count (*) from depot_object where is_deleted = ‘1’. For information on the retention policy utility. you must first start the Network Shell and then start the BMC BladeLogic command line interface (CLI). Before using the database clean-up utility.Cleaning up the BMC BladeLogic database ■ The BMC BladeLogic File Server. For more information on the CLI. to avoid longrunning clean-up runs. 288 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . This data includes: ■ Objects users have already deleted in the BMC BladeLogic Console. see the BLCLI Help. the initial result displays until the cleanup completes. Cleaning up the BMC BladeLogic database BMC BladeLogic provides a database clean-up utility (cleanupDatabase) to minimize the amount of space taken up by unused data.

For information on setting the retention period for automatically-generated objects. ■ 3 Execute the retention policy utility. Once they are marked for deletion. By default. These objects include old job runs and job and depot objects automatically created during patching and auto-remediation. By enabling the utility and setting the retention period. Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 289 . the objects that are candidates for deletion (because they are older than the specified retention period) are marked for deletion when the retention policy is executed. see “Setting the retention period for automatically-generated objects” on page 291. files associated with the objects are deleted from the File Server the next time the file server clean-up utility is run. ■ For information on setting the retention period for job runs. See “Enabling/disabling the retention policy utility” on page 289. the objects are deleted from the database the next time the database clean-up utility is run. The following master procedure summarizes the steps for marking job runs for deletion: 1 Enable the retention policy utility. such as audit trail information and job run events. the objects are deleted from the database the next time the database clean-up utility is run. Marking data for deletion BMC BladeLogic includes a retention policy utility that allows you to mark objects for deletion from the BMC BladeLogic database. see “Setting the retention period for job runs” on page 290. the retention policy utility is not enabled to avoid the possibility of deleting data unknowingly. See “Executing the retention policy utility” on page 291. Once they are marked for deletion. you can use the CLI to run the Delete:cleanupHistoricalData command.Marking data for deletion If you want to remove historical data. (In addition. For more information on this command see the BLCLI Help. 2 Set the retention period for objects you want to mark for deletion. Enabling/disabling the retention policy utility The following procedure lets you enable or disable the retention policy.) Using the retention policy utility in this way lets you manage the amount of physical space the database requires and avoid potential performance issues resulting from your database getting too large.

3 Restart the Application Server to have this change take effect. set the RESULTS_RETENTION_TIME property for the specific job property class in the Property Dictionary (for example. For details on setting a property using the Property Dictionary. set the RESULTS_RETENTION_TIME property for the Job property class in the Property Dictionary. You cannot mark objects for deletion during database cleanup. the SnapshotJob property class). (Objects are deleted from the database the next time the database clean-up utility is run. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. files associated with the objects are deleted from the file server the next time the file server clean-up utility is run. set the RESULTS_RETENTION_TIME property using the Properties tab for a specific job.) false — Disables the retention policy utility. To set the default retention period for job runs of a specific job. To set the number of days to retain job runs before marking them for deletion. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. In addition. enter the following: set Cleanup EnableRetentionPolicy true|false Where: true — Enables the retention policy utility. For information on setting property values using the Properties tab for a system object (such as a job). do any of the following: ■ To set the default retention period for all jobs. To set the default retention period for all jobs of a specific type.Marking data for deletion 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. ■ ■ 290 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .) Setting the retention period for job runs You can set the number of days to retain job runs before marking them for deletion. which lets you mark objects for deletion from the BMC BladeLogic database. For details on setting a property using the Property Dictionary. (See “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 2 To enable or disable the retention policy utility.

For example. 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. a specific job value overrides any value defined for the specific job type or for all job types. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. Executing the retention policy utility To execute the retention policy utility. For information.Marking data for deletion NOTE The most specific retention value will be used when executing a retention policy. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 291 . Setting the retention period for automatically-generated objects To set the number of days to retain automatically-generated objects before marking them for deletion. 3 Restart the Application Server to have this change take effect. do the following: 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the retention policy utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete executeRetentionPolicy For more information about this command. see “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. do the following: 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. 2 Specify the retention period (in days) with the set command: set Cleanup AutoGeneratedRetentionTime #days Where: # days — is the number of days that job and depot objects are retained before being marked for deletion (when you execute the retention policy utility). the CLI prompts you for a user name and password. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic.

Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic.System_Cleanup authorization. to avoid longrunning clean-up runs. For information. NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. For information on using the retention policy utility. TIP BMC Software recommends that you run the clean-up utility once per week. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period. 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. For information. your role must be granted the BL_Administration. see “Single sign-on” on page 121. NOTE BMC BladeLogic also provides the performFullCleanupJob CLI command for database cleanup. storing this information in the credentials cache. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password. Executing the database clean-up utility Use this procedure to remove superfluous BMC BladeLogic data from Oracle and SQL Server databases. To execute a database clean-up operation. 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the database clean-up utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete cleanupDatabase For more information about this command. For information.Executing the database clean-up utility NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. 292 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. see “Single sign-on” on page 121. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period. storing this information in the credentials cache. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. see “Marking data for deletion” on page 289.

use the target server clean-up utility To clean up transactions. 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the Application Server cache clean-up utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete cleanupAppServerCache <retention time> For more information about this command. These files are temporary and will probably no longer be accessed. you can use the Application Server cache clean-up utility to delete them from the cache.Cleaning the Application Server cache Cleaning the Application Server cache Each Application Server has a file cache (directory) containing files that it uses for operations it performs. You can also use the utility to clean up caches of all accessible Application Servers. NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. To delete these objects from a target server. 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. objects such as BL packages.System_Cleanup authorization. Cleaning up target servers (Agents) During Deploy Jobs. the target server clean-up utility uses the value of the server’s TRANSACTIONS_DIR property to locate the transactions directory. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. transaction information and log files are created on the target servers and in certain cases are not deleted. Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 293 . see “Single sign-on” on page 121. To execute a clean-up operation. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic. For information. storing this information in the credentials cache. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period. These files are temporary files no longer needed after the operation. For information on configuring this property. your role must be granted the BL_Administration. The utility lets you specify parameters for the cleanup. such as Application Server name and the minimum elapsed time before files can be considered for deletion. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help.

System_Cleanup authorization. 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the repeater server clean-up utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete cleanupRepeater For more information about this command. see “Single sign-on” on page 121. To execute a clean-up operation. storing this information in the credentials cache. 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the target server clean-up utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete cleanupAgent For more information about this command. 294 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . For information. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic. NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password. To clean up a set of target servers. your role must be granted the BL_Administration. Cleaning up repeater servers Old temporary files from Deploy Jobs can accumulate in the staging directory on repeater servers.System_Cleanup authorization. your role must be granted the BL_Administration. use the command in a Network Shell Script Job. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help.Cleaning up repeater servers To execute a clean-up operation. You can use the repeater clean-up utility to delete these files. The utility lets you specify parameters for the cleanup. such as maximum size for the staging directory and the minimum elapsed time before files can be considered for deletion. See “Scheduling the target server (Agent) cleanup” on page 300. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period.

you must run the Delete updateDeleteDependencies to remove these directories. Cleaning up the file server When users delete objects from the BMC BladeLogic Console. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password. Neither the file server clean-up utility or database clean-up utility removes these directories. these directories still exist. storing this information in the credentials cache. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period. NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. the system marks for deletion from the file server all files associated with the objects. 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic. Before you begin When a Custom Package Deploy Job runs. You can use the file server clean-up utility to delete these unused files from the file server and from the temporary file storage on the Application Server. For information. Even after the job run history is removed by the retention policy. it creates a subdirectory under the BLPackage directory for every iteration. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password. Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 295 . Prior to running the Delete cleanupFileServer command. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic. To clean up the file server 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the file server clean-up utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete cleanupFileServer For more information about this command. see “Single sign-on” on page 121.Cleaning up the file server 2 If you have not cached your session credentials.

snapshot results. To clean up one specific type of object. storing this information in the credentials cache. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period. for example. you can also clean up historical data by using the historical data clean-up utility. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic. The utility deletes the following objects: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Old audit trail entries Audit results Job run events Compliance results Snapshot results Job schedules Using this utility. see “Single sign-on” on page 121. enter the command and specify a value for the objectName variable.Cleaning up historical data NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. However. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password. 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the historical data clean-up utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete cleanupHistoricalData This command deletes all historical data. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. you can delete all historical data or only one specific type of object. For more information about this command. 296 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .System_Cleanup authorization. the database clean-up utility (cleanupDatabase) cleans up historical data from the database. your role must be granted the BL_Administration. To execute a clean-up operation. For information. 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. Cleaning up historical data As part of its operation.

For information. for example: /Jobs/BMC BladeLogic Administration/Cleanup Scheduling the retention policy utility to mark data for deletion Use this procedure to run the retention policy utility as a Network Shell Script Job. storing this information in the credentials cache.) Application Server cache cleanup (See “Scheduling the Application Server cache cleanup” on page 299. You can set up Network Shell Script Jobs for performing these clean-up tasks: ■ Marking data for deletion (See “Scheduling the retention policy utility to mark data for deletion”. Running a utility as a script job lets you schedule the job so it executes on a regular basis rather than running it interactively. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period. 1 In a text editor.) File Server cleanup (See “Scheduling the file server cleanup” on page 299. create a Network Shell script to run the retention policy utility.) Database cleanup (See “Scheduling the database cleanup” on page 298. Scheduling the cleanup The clean-up utilities can be run as Network Shell Script Jobs.) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE BMC BladeLogic recommends that you create all Network Shell Script Jobs for cleanup in a single directory. see “Single sign-on” on page 121.) Target server (agent) cleanup (See “Scheduling the target server (Agent) cleanup” on page 300.Scheduling the cleanup NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. The script should consist of the CLI command that invokes the utility: blcli Delete executeRetentionPolicy Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 297 .) Repeater cleanup (See “Scheduling the repeater server cleanup” on page 300.

add the Network Shell script to the Depot. B Schedule the job to run at a frequency you prefer. For information. to avoid longrunning clean-up runs. A Assign any name to the script. 3 Create a Network Shell Script Job based on the script you added to the Depot in the previous step. B When you specify the Script Type. TIP BMC Software recommends that you run the clean-up utility once per week. create a Network Shell script to run the database clean-up utility.Scheduling the database cleanup 2 Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. 3 Create a Network Shell Script Job based on the script you added to the Depot in the previous step. For information. specify the server functioning as the Application Server. specify the server functioning as the Application Server. For information. 298 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . choose the first option. For information. Scheduling the database cleanup Use this procedure to run the database clean-up utility as a Network Shell Script Job. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. B When you specify the Script Type. A Assign any name to the script. 1 In a text editor. The script should consist of the CLI command that invokes the utility: blcli Delete cleanupDatabase 2 Using BMC BladeLogic Console. choose the first option. A For the target server. A For the target server. B Schedule the job to run at a frequency you prefer. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. add the Network Shell script to the Depot.

see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. For information. add the Network Shell script to the Depot. create a Network Shell script to run the Application Server cache clean-up utility. A For the target server. A Assign any name to the script. The script should consist of the CLI command that invokes the utility: blcli Delete cleanupAppServerCache <retention time> 2 Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. A Assign any name to the script. 3 Create a Network Shell Script Job based on the script you added to the Depot in the previous step. create a Network Shell script to run the file server clean-up utility. Scheduling the Application Server cache cleanup Use this procedure to run the Application Server cache clean-up utility as a Network Shell Script Job. 1 In a text editor. specify the server functioning as the Application Server. The script should consist of the CLI command that invokes the utility: blcli Delete cleanupFileServer 2 Using BMC BladeLogic Console. B When you specify the Script Type.Scheduling the file server cleanup Scheduling the file server cleanup Use this procedure to run the file server clean-up utility as a Network Shell Script Job. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. choose the first option. B Schedule the job to run at a frequency you prefer. For information. 1 In a text editor. Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 299 . B When you specify the Script Type. add the Network Shell script to the Depot. choose the first option. See “Cleaning up the file server” on page 295 for notes on pre-requisites for running the utility. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. For information.

Scheduling the target server (Agent) cleanup Use this procedure to run the target server clean-up utility as a Network Shell Script Job. Scheduling the repeater server cleanup Use this procedure to run the repeater server clean-up utility as a Network Shell Script Job. 1 In a text editor. For information. The script should consist of the CLI command that invokes the utility: blcli Delete cleanupRepeater 2 Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. For information. 3 Create a Network Shell Script Job based on the script you added to the Depot in the previous step. choose the first option.Scheduling the repeater server cleanup 3 Create a Network Shell Script Job based on the script you added to the Depot in the previous step. A Assign any name to the script. create a Network Shell script to run the target server (agent) cleanup utility. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. A For the target server. B When you specify the Script Type. B Schedule the job to run at a frequency you prefer. create a Network Shell script to run the repeater server clean-up utility. specify the server functioning as the Application Server. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. For information. A For the target server. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. specify the repeater servers you want to clean up. B Schedule the job to run at a frequency you prefer. add the Network Shell script to the Depot. The script should consist of the CLI command that invokes the utility: blcli Delete cleanupAgent 300 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 1 In a text editor.

B Schedule the job to run at a frequency you prefer. A For the target server. A Assign any name to the script. B When you specify the Script Type. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 301 . add the Network Shell script to the Depot. specify the target servers (agents) you want to clean up.Scheduling the target server (Agent) cleanup 2 Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. choose the first option. 3 Create a Network Shell Script Job based on the script you added to the Depot in the previous step. For information. For information.

Scheduling the target server (Agent) cleanup 302 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 7 An advanced file server or Advanced Repeater server uses BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater technology with deploy jobs to enable file servers and repeater servers to store and share deploy data more efficiently. Overview Using advanced file servers and Advanced Repeater servers can help you improve the bandwidth utilization between the central file server and the repeaters. With the standard BMC BladeLogic Server Automation file server and repeater. Figure 1 shows a sample configuration. You can also configure bandwidth throttling on links between the Advanced File Server and the Advanced Repeater. Using an Advanced File Server on the existing File Server with one or more Advanced Repeaters uses a more efficient protocol to ensure that only changes to the content are downloaded across the network. the Depot objects are sent to the repeater in their entirety whenever they are required for a deployment. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 303 .

It uses the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Client Automation master transmitter component to hold a second copy of the depot content in a compressed. proprietary format that is well suited to providing bandwidth efficient transfer of data.Key terms Figure 1 Sample configuration Key terms The BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater is the combination of Advanced File Server and Advanced Repeater server. The following list defines some of these key terms. the Transmitter (used by the Advanced File Server). 304 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The three key components are the Content Replicator. and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Client Automation Proxy (used by the Advanced Repeater server).an enhanced Java application server running on an existing File Server. ■ Advanced File Server . Both the Advanced Repeater and Advanced File Server are built on BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Client Automation technology.

Using the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater technology for deploying data offers several key benefits: ■ Improved performance of staging data for deploy jobs. It is also used to pull the content down to the file system on the Advanced Repeater. If you are using deploy jobs in a large-scale environment. see “Installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater” on page 307. Any targets which have been configured to use a standard repeater continue to do so. ■ ■ What is the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater? The BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater provides scalable transport of data over wide-area networks. using the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Client Automation proxy. Advanced Repeater installer .the Advanced Repeater and Advanced File Server are both installed from the same installation file. any targets which have been configured through Routing Rules to use an Advanced Repeater will make use of the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. See “Best practice information” on page 306. you can configure an Advanced File Server and one or more Advanced Repeaters.a Java application that runs instead of the traditional BMC BladeLogic Server Automation repeater and uses the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Client Automation Proxy component to efficiently download data from the Advanced File Server. Content Replicator . consider setting up Advanced File Servers and using Advanced Repeater servers. When a Deploy Job is run and is set for indirect staging. Any targets which are not configured to use a repeater stage the data directly on the target.What is the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater? ■ Advanced Repeater . which use the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater.used to publish the content from the existing file server to the Transmitter on the Advanced File Server. and is an alternate option when configuring file servers or repeater servers. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 305 . Using BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater technology enables file servers and repeater servers to store and share deploy data efficiently. ■ If the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater components have been installed. Ability to manage the use of network resources by the Advanced File Server and Advanced Repeater server. An RSCD agent must be installed on the servers hosting both the Advanced Repeater and Advanced File Server components. NOTE For instructions on installing the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater.

In addition. by removing cache files to reduce the amount of storage. but the CPU usage will spike when new content is published as this needs to be compressed. The Advanced Repeater transmitter component uses the additional space for optimizations that improve the efficiency of data replication. the transmitter stops maintaining storage size ratio. it maintains three times the size of the data as cache. non-redundant. but efficiency degrades. BMC BladeLogic recommends that the file server have 200 GB or more of available RAID 5 disk space. An Advanced File Server cannot be disabled if there are existing Advanced Repeater servers. such as diffing. Memory utilization The default Java heap size is configured for a maximum of 512MB in the advanced file server. it runs in limited disk space mode. CPU utilization The advanced file server does not make intensive usage of the CPU. This setting means that about 1GB RAM should be allowed to run the advanced file server. caching. In limited disk space mode. disk space. and attempts to maintain at least 10% free disk space. 306 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Best practice information Disk space If you are implementing an Advanced File Server.Best practice information NOTE Note the following requirements when configuring Advanced File Servers and repeater servers: ■ ■ An Advanced Repeater server cannot be enabled unless an Advanced File Server is enabled. and starts maintaining free disk space instead. It is possible to run the transmitter with less than optimal disk space. and compressing. the file server must have a minimum of 72 GB of available. When the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater has enough disk space. If the transmitter does not have enough disk space to maintain the optimal storage size ratio. using SSL also increases the CPU usage by about 40% due to the encryption and decryption of the content.

5 On the Welcome screen. copy the installation file to a directory on the server you want to configure as an Advanced File Server or Advanced Repeater Server.Installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater Installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater You can install the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater using the installation program or by performing an unattended (silent) installation. 2 Do one of the following: ■ In Microsoft Windows environments. click OK. Different installers are provided for 32-bit and 64-bit Windows. Installing using the installation program To install the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater 1 Download the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater installation file according to the download instructions in provided in the “Before you begin” chapter of the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide. In Linux Environments. ■ 3 Start the BMC BladeLogic installation program for your platform. The installer files applicable to the Advanced Repeater are labeled BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater for hostPlatform on the EPD site. 6 Accept the license agreement and click Next. upload the installer bin to the file server or repeater server. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 307 . click Next. The download instructions in the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide provide a standard method for downloading the product files from the BMC Software Electronic Product Download (EPD) website. 4 On the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater Installation screen.

— Proxy Listener Port: Specify the TCP port for the Proxy Service listener. The default port is 8081. Specify this TCP port if you are installing the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater behind a firewall. The Advanced Repeater Credentials window opens. Specify an integer between 0 and 65535. You can use any port. 10 Specify the following: — Transmitter RPC Port: If the server is using remote procedure calls (RPC). The Workspace Directory window opens. as long as the port number is not already in use. Specify an integer between 0 and 65535. enter the port number used to establish a new connection for each RPC client connecting to the RPC server. 8 Specify the workspace directory (where the Advanced Repeater stores its channels). The default port is 5282. — Click Next. 9 Specify the credentials for the Advanced Repeater administrator.Installing using the installation program 7 Specify the destination directory. click Finish. The Advanced Repeater Service Port window opens. NOTE You must use the RPC port number that was set during installation. or accept the default credentials by selecting Use default tuner credential settings. Click Next. Click Next.port number to be used by the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. 11 Review the current settings to confirm that you have specified the correct installation configuration. Click Next. 308 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . or accept the default. A notification panel window appears if the installation program detects an existing installation. 12 When the installation completes. NOTE The default installation folder (AdvancedRepeater) is the same for both Advanced File Server and Advanced Repeater Server. or accept the default. Click Next to upgrade the installation. and then click Install. The default port is 7717. — Transmitter Listener Port: Specify the TCP port for the Transmitter service listener.

On Linux. 8.Performing an unattended (silent) installation To uninstall the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater Do one of the following: ■ On Microsoft Windows. select Start => All Programs => BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Uninstall Advanced Repeater and follow the prompts on the uninstall wizard./uninstall where version is the version number for BMC BladeLogic Server Automation (for example. enter the following command and follow the prompts on the uninstall wizard: ■ :/opt/adv/rptr/version/AdvancedRepeater/UninstallAdvancedRepeater # . Performing an unattended (silent) installation Install the Advanced Repeater using silent mode You can perform an unattended (silent) installation of the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater. For example: -A -P -J -J -J -J -J -J featureAdvancedRepeater installLocation=installationDirectory WORKSPACE_DIRECTORY=pathToWorkspace TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_USER_NAME=admin TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_PASSWORD=password TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_PORT_NUMBER=7177 PROXY_PORT_NUMBER=8081 XMITTER_PORT_NUMBER=5282 Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 309 .1). create an options file and add the options for the installation that you want to run. To install the Advanced Repeater in silent mode 1 In a text editor. Before you begin Certain Terminal Server configuration options that pertain to temporary folders must be turned off. to enable running the installation wizard through a Terminal Services connection or a remote desktop session.

The default is 5282. For example. -J XMITTER_PORT_NUMBER= Guidelines ■ Each option must be on a single line. The default is 8081. ■ 310 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Specify an integer between 0 and 65535. You can use any port. -J PROXY_PORT_NUMBER= The TCP port for the Proxy Service listener. The NUMBER= default is 7717. -J TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_USER_ NAME= -J TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_ PASSWORD= -J The TCP port to be used by the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_PORT_ Advanced Repeater. -J WORKSPACE_DIRECTORY= pathToWorkspace Specifies the workspace directory (where the Advanced Repeater stores its channels). on Windows: -J WORKSPACE_DIRECTORY=C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic. as long as the port number is not already in use.0\AdvancedRepeater On UNIX: -P installLocation= opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. Values for options may contain spaces. on Windows: -P installLocation=C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner On UNIX: -J WORKSPACE_DIRECTORY=/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. Specify an integer between 0 and 65535. The TCP port for the Transmitter service listener.0/AdvancedR epeater/tuner The user name and password for Advanced Repeater administrator. Specify this TCP port if you are installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater behind a firewall. For example.Performing an unattended (silent) installation Where: Option -P installLocation= installationDirectory Description Sets the installation directory for the product.0/AdvancedRepeater -A featureAdvancedRepeater Specifies installation of the Advanced Repeater. Specify an integer between 0 and 65535.

txt Upgrade the Advanced Repeater using silent mode You can perform an unattended (silent) upgrade of the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater. 3 Run the installation program with the -i silent option. Windows: AdvancedRepeater_8_1_win32. However.0\silent_upgrade.txt Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 311 .txt UNIX example sh AdvancedRepeater_8_1_win32.0/silent_install. AdvancedRepeaterInstallerName -i silent DOPTIONS_FILE=silentOptionsFilePath You must use an absolute path to the options file.exe -i silent -DOPTIONS_FILE=C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic.Performing an unattended (silent) installation ■ All Java properties have default values if not specified in the options file. Windows example AdvancedRepeater_8_1_win32. create an options file that contains this option: -A featureAdvancedRepeater 2 Change directory to the location where the installer resides.0/silent_install.exe -i silent DOPTIONS_FILE=/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. AdvancedRepeaterInstallerName -i silent -DOPTIONS_FILE=silentOptionsFilePath You must use an absolute path to the options file. 1 In a text editor. 2 Change directory to the location where the installer resides. you should specify TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_USER_NAME and PASSWORD. 3 Run the installation program with the -i silent option.bin -i silent DOPTIONS_FILE=/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.

312 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . An automation principal defines a user credential that can be used for accessing external systems. create an automation principal which contains the user-defined Administrator credential used to configure the Advanced File Server. see the following: ■ Configuring Advanced File Servers Configuring Advanced Repeater servers Changing the administrator user and password for Advanced Repeater Servers ■ ■ Before you begin NOTE Configuring an Advanced Repeater server behind a SOCKS proxy server is not supported.0/silent_upgrade. See the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide for information on creating automation principals.bin -i silent DOPTIONS_FILE=/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers UNIX: sh AdvancedRepeater_8_1_win32. Set up credentials If you have not already done so.txt Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers To adjust the configuration settings for the an Advanced File Server or Advanced Repeater server.

as described in “Installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater” on page 307. 2 Install the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater on the file server. 4 Right-click the file server and select Properties to open the Modify File Server dialog. while the File Server Root Path points to the directory on the file server where data is stored. click Enable Advanced File Server. select Configuration => Infrastructure Management. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 313 . change the Advanced File Server root directory path to point to the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater installation directory.Configuring Advanced File Servers Configuring Advanced File Servers Use this procedure to modify a file server to be used as an Advanced File Server. the Transmitter and Performance tabs are not accessible. 3 On the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Console. If you do not specify the install directory. NOTE The Advanced File Server Root Directory path is different than the File Server Root Path. The Advanced File Server Root Directory points to the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater installation directory. which uses the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. If necessary. 1 Create a file server as described in “Setting up the file server” on page 75. 5 On the General tab.

select "Default". specify the following: Option SSL Settings Description By default the traffic between the advanced file server and advanced repeater is not encrypted. ■ If you have not changed any credential during the installation or post-installation procedures. check SSL Enabled. This credential is needed by BMC BladeLogic Server Automation to access and configure the Advanced File Server. ■ 314 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The automation principal is used to access and configure the Advanced File Server. However. This default automation principal matches the built-in administrator credential. If you specified a custom user/password combination during installation or in the post-install procedure. See “Securing communication between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers (optional)” on page 319. Advanced File Server Administrator Select an Automation Principal from the drop-down list. you can use SSL if your environment requires encryption. select the automation principal that was created for that user/password combination.Configuring Advanced File Servers 6 On the Security tab. If you have configured secure communication for the file server.

In this case. Select the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater installation directory.Configuring Advanced File Servers 7 On the Transmitter tab. the value for the Transmitter Root Directory field reflects the installation directory for Copy B. By default. In this case. You can use any port as the listener port. For example. specify the following: Option Transmitter Host Name Transmitter Root Directory Description By default. however. Transmitter Listener Port RPC Port Enter the port on which the Advanced Repeater listens for requests. if there is not sufficient disk space on the file server host. as long as the port number is not already in use. Enter the RPC port number that was set during installation. Install Copy B on a separate transmitter host. The Host field on the General tab will be the same as the Transmitter Host Name field on the Transmitter tab. the transmitter is located on the same host as the File Server. The value Advanced File Server Root Directory on the General tab reflects the installation directory for Copy A. The Advanced File Server Root Directory field on the General tab will be the same as the value specified here. In some cases. The RPC port is used to administer the Advanced Repeater components. ■ In this case. you must install two copies of the Advanced Repeater. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 315 . you may want the transmitter to be on a different host than file server. the transmitter (in the Advanced File Server) is located on the same host as the existing file server. ■ Install Copy A on an existing file server host. you only need to install one copy of the Advanced Repeater on the file server host.

the transmitter uses byte-level differencing to send only the changed bytes.specifies the level of compression the transmitter should use for the files it sends. you can specify options that help you control the amount of network resources used during deployment. 316 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 10 Click OK. Specify the following: ■ ■ File transfer efficiency ■ Compression enabled .specifies whether the transmitter should use byte-level differencing. If you select the Enable bandwidth management option. — high .Configuring Advanced File Servers 8 On the Performance tab. Compression level . Set the amount of memory to allocate for differencing. Differencing enabled . such as files in the index cache. Maximum throughput .enter the maximum amount of available bandwidth (as a percentage) that the transmitter can use. A bandwidth setting of “0” (zero) sets specifies maximum bandwidth speed (unlimited). To keep the specified amount of disk space free. which allows the transmitter to send faster payload updates and to use less bandwidth. across all parallel connections.specifies whether the Advanced File Server should compress the files it sends.specify the number of kilobits per second that the Advanced File Server can use as throughput. Instead of transferring entire files when updating payloads.the file is compressed as much as possible. specify the following: Option Disk resources Description Enter the minimum amount of disk space (as a percentage) that the transmitter should keep free. — low . — medium . 9 On the Network tab. This setting limits the total traffic leaving the transmitter. specify the following: ■ ■ Percentage of bandwidth .the compression is fast but the file size isn't reduced as much as on high (however the byte-savings difference is minimal). the transmitter automatically deletes optional files. Specify the following: Option Network connections Network bandwidth Description Enter the number of clients (Advanced Repeaters) allowed to connect to the Advanced File Server at one time. but for large files the process can take a long time and can use many CPU resources.balances time and size.

3 Do one of the following: — Right-click Repeater Servers and select New Repeater Server to start the New Repeater Wizard. see the Exports File section in the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide. which uses the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. click Enable Advanced Repeater. change the Advanced Repeater root directory path. For more information. 1 Install the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater on the system that you will use as an Advanced Repeater server. select Configuration => Infrastructure Management. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 317 . If necessary.Configuring Advanced Repeater servers Configuring Advanced Repeater servers Use this procedure to create or modify a server to be used as an Advanced Repeater server. 2 On the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Console. 4 On the General panel. — Right-click an existing repeater server select Properties to open the Modify Repeater Server dialog. See “Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers” on page 312. NOTE You must have first configured an Advanced File Server before you can configure an Advanced Repeater server. NOTE The Advanced Repeater server must be able to access the Advanced File Server directly using the user name defined in the exports file on the file server. as described in “Installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater” on page 307.

This default automation principal matches the built-in administrator credential. If you have configured secure communication. specify the following: Option Cache maximum size Description Cache management options Enter the total size (in MB) for the Advanced Repeater cache. select "Default". This credential is needed by BMC BladeLogic Server Automation to access and configure the Advanced Repeater. BMC Software recommends that you set the cache low watermark to a value between 75 and 80 (indicating that it is 75% to 80% of the maximum cache size). ■ If you have not changed any credential during the installation or post-installation procedures. you can use SSL if your environment requires encryption. ■ 6 On the Cache and Port panel. However. Enter a percentage that represents the lower limit (cache low watermark) for the Advanced Repeater cache size. select the automation principal that was created for that user/password combination. Advanced Repeater Server Administrator Select an Automation Principal from the drop-down list. check SSL Enabled.Configuring Advanced Repeater servers 5 On the Security tab. Once the cache reaches the maximum cache size. When the Advanced Repeater starts cache garbage collection. the Advanced Repeater starts garbage collection to delete older channel files from the cache. The automation principal is used to access and configure the Advanced File Server. Cache low watermark 318 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . specify the following: Option SSL Settings Description By default the traffic between the advanced file server and advanced repeater is not encrypted. it takes a snapshot of the cache and then determines the number of files it must delete to reach the low watermark. The cache does not exceed this disk-space limit. If you specified a custom user/password combination during installation or in the post-install procedure. See “Securing communication between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers (optional)” on page 319.

Maximum throughput . you can change it using a Runchannel command. when running the installation program.specify the number of kilobits per second that the Advanced Repeater can use as throughput. Changing the administrator user and password for Advanced Repeater Servers You can change the administrator user and password for Advanced Repeater Servers in any of the following ways: ■ In the installation wizard. Enter the RPC port number that was set during installation. as long as the port number is not already in use. If you know the administrator user/password combination. The RPC port is used to administer the Advanced Repeater components. Specify the following: Option Network connections Network bandwidth Description Enter the number of concurrent connections to the Advanced Repeater. the default directory is C:\Program Files\BMC Software\Bladelogic.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\). (On Windows. 8 Click OK. execute the following command: ■ Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 319 . — From a command prompt. You can use any port as the listener port. you can specify options that help you control the amount of network resources used during deployment. — Navigate to the Advanced Repeater Server installation directory. RPC port 7 On the Network panel. specify the following: ■ ■ Percentage of bandwidth . If enabled.Changing the administrator user and password for Advanced Repeater Servers Option Listener port Description Port management options Enter the port on which the Advanced Repeater listens for requests. This setting applies for each repeater to file server connection. A bandwidth setting of “0” (zero) sets specifies maximum bandwidth speed (unlimited).enter the maximum amount of available bandwidth (as a percentage) that the Advanced Repeater can use.

if you are using the built-in default user/password).plain:newAdminPwd" Securing communication between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers (optional) Optionally. (On Windows. (Note that the Tuner program can only be run locally. all communication between the Advanced File Server and Advanced Repeater servers using the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater can be encrypted using SSL. — From a command prompt. execute the following command: tuner. for example) that is able to issue credentials used for PKI authentication.Securing communication between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers (optional) runchannel http://localhost:5282/Marimba/Current/TunerAdministrator -tuner localhost:7717 -username oldAdminUser -password oldAdminPwd set -property "marimba. use the following command: /etc/init.plain:newAdminPwd" ■ If you do not know the administrator user/password combination (for example.d/advancedrepeater start 320 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . All other traffic is all local and does not require encryption. you can use the Tuner program to override the current user/password combination. the default directory is C:\Program Files\BMC Software\Bladelogic. using one of the following methods: ■ On UNIX and Linux.tuner.) — Navigate to the Advanced Repeater Server installation directory.exe -admin "newAdminUser. NOTE The following instructions assume you have a valid certificate authority (using OpenSSL. You can secure the link between the Advanced Repeater server and the transmitter located on the Advanced File Server.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\).admin" -value "newAdminUser. Set up the Advanced File Server for secure communication 1 Start the Advanced Repeater.

select the root certificate you just imported and select SSL from the Trust Type group box. TIP When specifying Host name. The root certificate is now configured on the Advanced File Server. 3 Click Next. Do not enter localhost. and click Next. 2 Click Request.Generate the SSL certificate ■ On Windows. The Certificate Manager dialog is displayed. leave the entry field blank. select SSL in the left pane. Generate the SSL certificate 1 In the Certificate Manager dialog. 2 Right-click the Certificate Manager option and select Start. select Root. The SSL Certificate Request dialog is displayed. 3 In the left pane. from the Start menu. 5 Specify a password. click Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Advanced Repeater. 4 Click Import to display the Import Certificate dialog. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 321 . 7 On the Root Certificates dialog. 6 When prompted for a password or nickname. 5 Browse to the location of the root certificate and select it. select Channel => Show internal channels to populate the list. use the actual name of the Advanced File Server host system. 4 On the Class 3 Digital ID Information panel. TIP If you do not see any channels listed in the Channels list. complete the fields and click Next.

3 Click View. 13 Click Done to complete the SSL certificate. The certificate request is generated. 2 Select the certificate you just created. select SSL in the left pane. 1 In the Certificate Manager dialog.http. paste the contents of the signed certificate and click Next.http. copy the contents of the file. enter the following commands to configure the transmitter to use the certificate and only accept https traffic: runchannel transmitterURL runchannel transmitterURL runchannel transmitterURL plain:password runchannel transmitterURL hostname property -setProperty transmitter.savepw true hostname property -setProperty transmitter. 4 Using the Unique ID displayed in the certificate. The Unique ID is displayed on the Certificate Information dialog. 11 On the SSL Certificates dialog.pw hostname property -setProperty transmitter. Enable SSL on Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters To configure the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater for secure communication. 8 Copy the certificate request and paste it into a text file. 322 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . click Install.http. 10 Once you have received the signed certificate. 7 Click Copy CSR to paste buffer.Enable SSL on Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 6 Click inside the text box and enter characters until the counter reaches zero. 12 On the Install SSL Certificate dialog. complete the following steps on the Advanced File Server.secure true where ■ uniqueID is the ID you obtained in step 3.certID uniqueID hostname property -setProperty transmitter.http. 9 Forward the file to your Certificate Authority.

Configure the Advanced Repeater server for secure communication ■ transmitterURL is the URL to the Transmitter Administrator of the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater installed on the Advanced File Server. 2 Right-click the Certificate Manager option and select Start. 4 Click Import to display the Import Certificate dialog. click Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Advanced Repeater. The Certificate Manager dialog is displayed. use the following command: /etc/init. https://localhost:5282/Marimba/Current/TransmitterAdministrator. Configure the Advanced Repeater server for secure communication 1 Copy the root certificate you created to the Advanced Repeater server. http://localhost:5282/Marimba/Current/TransmitterAdministrator. For example. 3 In the left pane. select Root. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 323 . 6 Restart the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater on the Advanced File Server. The browser should display the status information for the Advanced Repeater.d/advancedrepeater start ■ On Windows. by entering the following string in any browser address field: https://transmitterURL/?status transmitterURL is the URL to the Transmitter Administrator of the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. 5 Browse to the location of the root certificate and select it. For example. 5 Validate that the communication type is enabled. 1 On the Advanced Repeater server. start the Advanced Repeater using one of the following methods: ■ On UNIX and Linux. from the Start menu.

Configure the Advanced File Server to use secure communication 6 Click OK to bypass the Enter Password and Enter Nickname dialogs. 4 Click OK. select the root certificate you just imported and select SSL from the Trust Type group box. clear the Enable SSL check box. Disabling SSL communication 1 Enter the following command to disable secure communication between the Advanced File Server and the Advanced Repeater server: runchannel transmitterURL hostName property –setProperty transmitter. 1 Select Configuration => Infrastructure Management. For more information on using the Certificate Manager. Configure the Advanced File Server to use secure communication You must configure the Advanced File Server to use SSL when communicating with the Advanced Repeater. see BMC Configuration Automation CMS and Tuner Guide. 7 On the Root Certificates dialog.http. Do not enter a password or a nickname.secure false 2 Restart the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater. 3 Validate that the secure communication type has been disabled. NOTE To disable SSL communication. 3 Select Enable SSL. by entering the following string in any browser address field: 324 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 2 Right-click the Advanced File Server and choose Properties.

The browser displays the status information for the Advanced Repeater. The options are particularly useful in large scale environments. For example. ■ Configuring bandwidth throttling between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers Location of log files Location of configuration files Starting and stopping the Advanced Repeater ■ ■ ■ Configuring bandwidth throttling between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers Both the Advanced File Server and Advanced Repeater server include options that you can use to control the use of network resources during file staging and deployment.Troubleshooting advanced file servers and advanced repeaters http://transmitterURL:portNumber/?status transmitterURL is the URL to the Transmitter Administrator of the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. as well as the number of kilobits per second that the Advanced File Server or repeater can use as throughput. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 325 . The options are ■ ■ Network connections Network bandwidth (Percentage of bandwidth and Maximum throughput) These options enable you to enter a maximum amount of available bandwidth that the Advanced File Server or repeater can use. http://localhost:5282/Marimba/Current/TransmitterAdministrator. The Network tab on the Advanced File Server or Advanced Repeater server Properties include options for controlling the number of network connections and the amount of network bandwidth. Troubleshooting advanced file servers and advanced repeaters The following topics may be useful if you are experiencing issues with advanced file servers and advanced repeaters. where data is being pushed out to a large number of servers.

log The proxy access log is located in: Windows C:\Program Files\BMC Software\Bladelogic. Location of log files Log files specific to the Advanced Repeater are listed in Table 3 on page 325.0/AdvancedRepeater/tuner/.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\.marimba\BCAC\ UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.marimba\proxyroot\lo gs\ UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. Table 3 Log file history-<n>. across all parallel connections.marimba/ws3/ Proxy log files access-y<yyyy>-w<w>. The bandwidth setting on Advanced File Server limits the total traffic leaving the transmitter.marimba/proxyroot/logs/ 326 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .0/AdvancedRepeater/tuner/. These options are described in detail in the procedures for Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers and Configuring Advanced Repeater servers.log Log files for Advanced Repeater Default location Tuner log files The tuner log file is located in: Windows C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic.Location of log files NOTE The bandwidth setting on an Advanced File Server is different from the bandwidth setting on an Advanced Repeater server.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\. while the bandwidth setting in Advanced Repeater server is a per connection setting (for each repeater to file server link).

marimba/proxyroot/logs/ Location of configuration files Configuration files specific to the Advanced Repeater are listed in Table 4.txt The main configuration file for the tuner is located in: Windows C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic.tuner. Table 4 Configuration files for Advanced Repeater Default location Properties file properties.0/AdvancedRepeater/tuner/lib/tuner/properties.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\lib\tuner\properties.txt file (see Table 4 for location of file): marimba.txt UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. However.Location of configuration files Table 3 Log file Log files for Advanced Repeater Default location admin-y<yyyy>-w<w>. In general these configuration files should not be modified.nodisplay=true 2 Restart the advanced file server. if you are experiencing problems on Linux or UNIX systems that are not running X-Windows.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\. perform the following steps: 1 Add the following property to the properties.txt Configuration file Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 327 .display.marimba\proxyroot\lo gs\ UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.0/AdvancedRepeater/tuner/.log The proxy admin log is located in: Windows C:\Program Files\BMC Software\Bladelogic.

d/advancedrepeater {start|stop} ■ On Windows.txt Configuration file prefs.0/AdvancedRepeater/tuner/.txt Starting and stopping the Advanced Repeater Use the following procedures to start and stop the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater: ■ On UNIX. use one of the following procedures: — From the Start menu.txt UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. use the following command: /etc/init.Starting and stopping the Advanced Repeater Table 4 Configuration files for Advanced Repeater Default location Preferences file The preferences file is located in: Windows C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic.marimba\BCAC\prefs. click Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Advanced Repeater. start or stop the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater Service.marimba/ws3/prefs.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\. 328 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . — From the Services dialog.

and describe the configuration tasks in BMC BladeLogic that are required to communicate with BMC Remedy ITSM. and describe how to enable that integration within BMC BladeLogic. Once configured and enabled. NOTE BMC BladeLogic supports integration with BMC Remedy ITSM Change Management. Levels of integration The following sections provide an overview of the integration points. ■ The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution Requirements for integration ■ Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 329 . you can track infrastructure changes when a change is initiated by the BMC BladeLogic operator or when a remediation job is required due to the results of audit and compliance jobs.Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 8 You can integrate BMC BladeLogic with your Change Management processes. enabling you to track infrastructure change actions. The following topics provide an overview of integrating BMC BladeLogic with the BMC Remedy ITSM change management solution.

For complete details on installing and configuring BMC Atrium Orchestrator and setting up the BMC Remedy ITSM templates and filters. The integration of BMC BladeLogic with BMC Remedy ITSM is accomplished through standard application interfaces (APIs). auditing. The solution reduces the risk of unauthorized and unplanned changes through enforced change tracking and automated documentation of all changes. enrich BMC Remedy ITSM incidents with server configuration information. such as incident management and change management. ensure continuous compliance for servers.The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution increases the value of BMC BladeLogic by providing an out-of-the-box integration with BMC Remedy ITSM applications. If you implement the solution. For an overview of these tasks. and remediation processes with IT management systems such as BMC Remedy ITSM. compliance. There are also a number of installation and configuration tasks for other BMC Software tasks to enable the solution. Benefits of the integration Implementing the BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution enables compliance to the change process without requiring IT personnel to manually create change tickets. See “Facilitating BMC BladeLogic operator-initiated change” on page 331. These tasks are described in “Enabling BMC Remedy ITSM integration for job approval” on page 333. 330 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . See “Enriching BMC Remedy ITSM incidents with server configuration information” on page 331. but also reduces errors commonly associated with the manual coordination of change and configuration management. See “Ensuring continuous compliance for servers” on page 331. For more information on the BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution. The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution automates the integration of BMC BladeLogic monitoring. you can ■ ■ ■ facilitate the tracking of infrastructure change actions initiated by a BMC BladeLogic operator. contact your BMC Software sales representative. enabling an automated coordination of configuration management processes with other ITIL® processes. This automation not only saves organizations time. see “Requirements for integration” on page 332. There are several configuration tasks you need to perform to enable the integration of BMC BladeLogic and BMC Remedy ITSM. see BMC Continuous Compliance for Server Automation Solution Getting Started Guide.

The server auditing and server compliance capabilities in BMC BladeLogic involve: ■ detecting discrepancies between specific servers or component configurations against a baseline server or configuration monitoring and detecting compliance violations between specific servers or component configurations against specific rules related to operations. After the job has run. and governance ■ BMC BladeLogic integrates the remediation of discrepancies and compliance violations in BMC BladeLogic to the change management processes facilitated by BMC Remedy ITSM management system. These details added to the workinfo note of incident include things such as: ■ ■ ■ ■ audit trails basic server configuration information historical deployments in the past 24 hours links to BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation reports Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 331 .The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution Facilitating BMC BladeLogic operator-initiated change When operations changes are implemented. or if deviations from a master server configuration are detected. Ensuring continuous compliance for servers This integration involves automatically creating incidents and change requests if noncompliant servers are detected. operators need to document these changes in BMC Remedy ITSM Change Management. the BMC Remedy ITSM change task is closed with an associated completion status and any changed configuration items (CIs). the job is scheduled for execution in BMC BladeLogic. Once the change is approved in BMC Remedy ITSM. To automate this change tracking process. The integration reduces the risk of unauthorized and unplanned changes through enforced change tracking. Enriching BMC Remedy ITSM incidents with server configuration information This integration involves automating the addition of information from various relevant sources (such as BMC Atrium Configuration Management Database (CMDB) and BMC BladeLogic servers) to the incident ticket when a server-related incident is detected in BMC Remedy ITSM. a change request is automatically created in BMC Remedy ITSM when a BMC BladeLogic operator submits a job that requires BMC Remedy ITSM tracking and approval. The BMC Remedy ITSM user can launch the job details report from the task to verify the change actions. The main benefit of this integration is to enforce continuous compliance to the change process without introducing labor intensive activities. security.

To implement the solution. you must have several BMC Software products installed and configured: ■ ■ ■ ■ BMC Atrium Orchestrator BMC Remedy ITSM BMC BladeLogic Server Automation BMC BladeLogic Integration for Atrium The BMC BladeLogic solution integrates the BMC Remedy ITSM and the BMC BladeLogic systems. see “Enabling BMC Remedy ITSM integration for job approval”.The BMC Atrium Orchestrator workflows create incidents. and tasks using BMC Remedy ITSM templates. To complete the integration tasks associated with BMC BladeLogic. see BMC Continuous Compliance for Server Automation Solution Getting Started Guide. — Review default BMC Remedy templates . you must complete the following configuration tasks in BMC Atrium Orchestrator and BMC Remedy ITSM: ■ Tasks for integration with BMC Remedy IT Service Management — Create the user ID which is used for monitoring the BMC Remedy alerts. using BMC Atrium Orchestrator as the enabling technology. 332 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . change tickets. ■ Tasks for integration with BMC Atrium Orchestrator — Configure and deploy the required Operations Actions (OA) management modules — Configure BMC Atrium Orchestrator Run Book modules For details on installing and configuring BMC Atrium Orchestrator and setting up the BMC Remedy ITSM templates and filters.Requirements for integration Requirements for integration To integrate BMC BladeLogic with BMC Remedy ITSM.

2 On the Job Approval Required Configuration dialog. if integration with BMC Remedy ITSM for job approval is desired. the approval for each supported job type is turned off. you can track these infrastructure changes when the change is initiated by the BMC BladeLogic operator. By default. set the Approval Required option for each available job type. select Configuration => Approval Configuration. To configure job approval for job types 1 From the BMC BladeLogic Console. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.Enabling BMC Remedy ITSM integration for job approval Enabling BMC Remedy ITSM integration for job approval If your environment has been configured to integrate BMC BladeLogic with BMC Remedy ITSM Change Management (as described in BMC Continuous Compliance for Server Automation Solution Getting Started Guide). Use this procedure to enable or disable the BMC Remedy ITSM job approval capability at the job type level. complete the following configuration tasks in BMC BladeLogic: ■ Configuring job approval for job types Assigning job approval permissions Setting up the connection to BMC Atrium Orchestrator Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection ■ ■ ■ NOTE Two of these tasks—setting up the connection to BMC Atrium Orchestrator and (optionally) enabling HTTPS support—are necessary also for integrating with BMC Atrium Orchestrator for the creation of Workflow Jobs through the BMC BladeLogic Console. 3 Click OK. To fully enable the integration. Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 333 . Configuring job approval for job types The Approval Configuration option enables you to configure whether or not jobs of a given type require BMC Remedy ITSM approval. For more information about Workflow Jobs.

the BLAdmins Role has permissions to all approval permissions. 6 Click OK to exit the Update Permissions panel.Assigning job approval permissions All job types with Yes specified for the Approval Required option will require the completion of the Approval tab information in the job wizard. 334 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . you may create a role for junior operators that has only Manual permission. select Roles. ensuring that any jobs they initiate would be reviewed and approved by a BMC Remedy ITSM prior to execution. 2 Right-click a role and select Open. 5 Click OK to save the updates. 3 Click the Systems tab. NOTE By default. Assigning job approval permissions Use this procedure to assign permissions to different BMC BladeLogic users for integrating job execution with BMC Remedy ITSM. 4 Add any of the following RBAC controls to enable specific BMC Remedy ITSM job approval permissions ■ ■ ■ ■ Automatic Manual Emergency NoApproval For example. only the job approval type assigned for the user role is listed when running the job wizard. When that user logs on. Assign the appropriate approval type to each user role. To assign job approval permissions 1 In the RBAC Manager workspace of the BMC BladeLogic Console.

NOTE The integration between BMC BladeLogic Server Automation and BMC Atrium Orchestrator supports connections to a single grid only. Specify the name of a grid only if this is the first defined CDP connection.* authorizations. The BMC Atrium Orchestrator password for the specified user. as all defined connections must be on the same grid. To configure the connection with BMC Atrium Orchestrator 1 Select Configuration => AO Configuration. User Name The name of the BMC Atrium Orchestrator user used to log on to the CDP. and then click OK. before a BMC BladeLogic job that connects to BMC Atrium Orchestrator times out.* and the AutomationPrincipal. this field is read-only.Setting up the connection to BMC Atrium Orchestrator Setting up the connection to BMC Atrium Orchestrator Through the BMC BladeLogic Console. 3 On the Add new AO configuration dialog box. The connection with BMC Atrium Orchestrator is established through the CDP or through a high availability CDP (HACDP). The name defined for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator grid. in seconds. Before you begin From the BMC BladeLogic Console. Password Time-out Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 335 . This user must be associated with the ADMIN role in BMC Atrium Orchestrator. The amount of time. 2 On the AO Configuration dialog box. enter the configuration information required to connect to BMC Atrium Orchestrator. The default is 300 seconds (five minutes). Parameter Host Port Grid Name Description The IP address or fully-qualified host name of the BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP server. you must add the configuration information required to connect to BMC Atrium Orchestrator. For any additional CDP connection (see step 4). click Add. Other types of peers are not supported. ensure that your role is granted the AOConfig. The port number used to connect to the BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP.

the value is w2k3-sp-vm5. port. and password details that you specified. ensure that only one of your CDPs is set as the primary instance (using the Primary AO check box). ensure that you select the correct CDP. repeat step 2 and step 3 for every additional CDP instance of the same grid. to ensure high availability. 336 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection Parameter Primary AO Description Whether to specify this CDP as the primary instance. create the keystore file by entering a command such as the following example: keytool -genkey -alias w2k3-sp-vm5 -dname "cn=w2k3-sp-vm5" -keyalg RSA -keystore C:\. Multiple CDPs installed on a grid form a High Availability (HACDP) environment and allow communication to continue even when the connection with one CDP fails. user name.keystore -storepass changeit The value entered for the -dname option must match the host name where the BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP is installed. you must enable an HTTPS connection on both products. To enable HTTPS support on BMC Atrium Orchestrator 1 On the system where the BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP is installed. click Check Connection. Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection If you want to secure the communication of data between BMC BladeLogic Server Automation and BMC Atrium Orchestrator. SSL enabled? Whether the connection to the CDP is SSL enabled and based on an HTTPS connection (as described in “Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection”). 4 If you want to add additional CDP connections to BMC Atrium Orchestrator. grid name. as defined in BMC Atrium Orchestrator. In a high-availability environment with multiple CDP instances. If you want to test whether or not you can connect to the CDP with the host. In this example. If you define multiple BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP instances. 5 Click Close on the AO Configuration dialog box.

copy the C:\. keystore is the keystore file name and location that you created for BMC Atrium Orchestrator.xml file. B Uncomment the following block of configuration information and add two attributes.csr -keystore C:\.5.1" SSLEnabled="true" maxThreads="150" scheme="https" secure="true" clientAuth="false" sslProtocol="TLS" keystoreFile="C:\. 3 Restart the BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP.0_13\jre\lib\security\cacerts" /> The keystoreFile attribute points to the location where the keystore file resides and the truststoreFile attribute points to the CA issued certs in the JDK installation location. 2 On the system where the BMC BladeLogic application server is installed. export the public certificate from the keystore file which was generated for BMC Atrium Orchestrator to a temporary file by entering a command such as the following example: keytool -export -alias w2k3-sp-vm5 -file C:\cert.keystore file from the BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP system to the system where the BMC BladeLogic application server is installed.keystore" truststoreFile="C:\Program Files\Java\jdk1. To enable HTTPS support for BMC Atrium Orchestrator on BMC BladeLogic 1 If BMC Atrium Orchestrator is installed on a different machine.keystore storepass changeit In the command shown above. <Connector port="8443" protocol="HTTP/1. alias is the name used to distinguish certificates. ■ ■ 3 Add the public certificate from the temporary file to the trusted certificate file by entering a command such as the following example: Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 337 .Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection 2 Enable HTTPS on Tomcat by completing the following steps: A Open the server. note the following: ■ file is the name and location of the certificate file that is going to be created from this command.

Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection keytool -import -alias w2k3-sp-vm5 -file C:\cert. 4 Enter the following command to check whether the certificate was added to the cacerts file: keytool -list -keystore C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\jre\lib\security\cacerts 5 Restart the BMC BladeLogic application server.csr -keystore "C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\jre\lib\security\cacerts" -keypass changeit where C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version is the default installation path of BMC BladeLogic. Change the path if BMC BladeLogic was installed in a different location. 338 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

known to everyone. AD/Kerberos authentication The Active Directory/Kerberos (AD/Kerberos) approach to authentication. authentication profile A collection of information that a BMC BladeLogic client (BMC BladeLogic Console. printers. and the private key. C certificate authority (CA) Security Glossary 339 .A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Security Glossary This chapter provides definitions of terms commonly encountered when discussing network security. the authentication service stands alone. Network Shell. or the BLCLI) uses to specify the Authentication Service from which a session credential should be obtained and the authentication mechanism that should be USED to acquire that session credential. is used to decrypt the data. known only to the recipient of the data. files. such as applications. AES The Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) is an encryption algorithm that has become the encryption standard used in most commercial transactions. Typically. asymmetric encryption A method of encryption that uses public and private keys. which integrates BMC BladeLogic with a key distribution center (KDC) to utilize the Kerberos v5 protocol for authenticating client-tier users. A Active Directory Microsoft's directory service. which provides a centralized system for automating management of networked entities. but for BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation. is used to encrypt data. and users. Authentication Service A service implemented within the BMC BladeLogic Application Server that is responsible for authenticating a user and issuing a session credential. The public key. an authentication service is implemented within the BMC BladeLogic Application Server.

DC=sub1. a distinguished name might be CN=admin. A certificate authority can be managed by an external certification service provider or the CA can belong to the same organization as the end entities in a public key infrastructure (PKI). certificates Digital documents used for secure authentication of communicating parties. A certificate binds identity information about an entity to the entity's public key for a certain validity period. D Data Encryption Standard (DES) A common method of data encryption using a secret key that is shared by the sender and receiver. Certificates can be thought of as analogous to passports that guarantee the identity of their bearers. If allowed by the certificate policy of the CA. certification request A request for a certificate. A certification request contains at least the public key and some identity information about the entity making the request. A certificate is signed with the private key of the entity. CAs can also issue certificates to other sub-CAs. DC=bladelogic. The highest trusted CA in the tree is called a root CA. Those objects are listed from bottom to top. certificate revocation list (CRL) A signed list containing the serial numbers of the certificates that have been revoked or suspended by the certificate issuer (the certificate authority (CA)) before their expiration date. The CA usually issues new CRLs at frequent intervals. DC=kerbtest. CN=Users. A certificate is digitally signed by a trusted third party who has verified that the key pair actually belongs to the entity. For example. and the certificate authority (CA) in a public key infrastructure (PKI). certificate management protocol (CMP) A definition of the online interactions between end entities. a certificate can be issued based on the request. registration authority (RA). generated by end entities or registration authority (RA) and sent to the certificate authority (CA). DC=com. certification service provider (CSP) An organization that acts as a trusted third party or a certificate authority (CA) host providing public key infrastructure (PKI) services to other organizations and individuals. distinguished name An PKCS entry that identifies a user for an LDAP server.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z The trusted party issuing digital certificates (especially X.509 public-key certificates) to an identified end entity and vouching for the binding between the data items in a certificate. DN 340 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . A distinguished name consists of the name of an entry as well as the names of the objects above that entry in the LDAP directory. This leads to a tree-like certification hierarchy.

domains are used to manage access to network resources. they can encrypt all of their communications to assure privacy and data integrity. After a client and server have used Kerberos to prove their identity. J JKS Java keystore. The primary domain controller periodically sends copies of its database to the backup domain controllers. The protocol uses strong cryptography so a client can prove its identity to a server (and vice versa) across an insecure network connection. Security Glossary 341 . Additional servers can function as backup domain controllers. One server on the network functions as the primary domain controller by managing a master database of users for the domain. domain controller A role assigned to a server in a network of computers running the Windows NT operating system.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z An LDAP distinguished name. A type of keystore file used for holding certificates. for protecting IP traffic at the packet level. and password when logging in. In Windows NT. which delegates user authentication to the Active Directory domain controller. The IPSec protocols are defined in RFC 2401. IPSec can be used for protecting the data transmitted by any service or application that is based on IP. Domain Authentication An approach to authentication that is based on AD/Kerberos authentication. The BMC BladeLogic implementation of Kerberos is based on MIT’s Kerberos v5. Kerberos A cross-platform mechanism for mutual authentication between a client and server or between two servers before a network connection is opened between the two. K keystore A file used to store a list of certificates along with their private keys. defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). A user can access network resources by logging into the domain. domain. Domain Authentication only requires a user to provide a name. I Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) A protocol suite. This information is passed to the Authentication Service. F failover A mode of operating in which a secondary component takes over the functions of a primary component when the primary component cannot function.

a public key and a private key. which requires a secure exchange of a shared key. public key cryptography A method for authenticating a sender or encrypting a message sent over a network. The number is used only once to ensure that any communication used for authentication cannot be reused. and other mechanisms needed to authenticate. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) A directory access protocol for accessing directories supporting the X. tree-like structure. proxy mode A method of using Network Shell to connect to a remote server via a Network Shell Proxy Server rather than connecting directly to the remote server. 342 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . P PKCS A group of public key cryptography standards devised and published by RSA Security.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z L LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). encrypt. BMC BladeLogic provides an approach to user authentication based on PKI. the encryption and decryption of messages is done with different keys. Many companies are using LDAP-based solutions as directories and user management systems. In public key cryptography. The protocol for querying and modifying directory entries that are arranged in a hierarchical. and decrypt communication using public key cryptography. public key infrastructure (PKI) A collection of mechanisms that together allow network users to exchange data securely over a network.500 models. This means that each participating entity (person or device) of the public key infrastructure (PKI) has two keys. PKI See public key infrastructure (PKI). certificate repositories (directories). N nonce A random number used for cryptographic processes. Public key infrastructure consists of a certificate authority (CA). R RC4 An encryption algorithm.

Because symmetric encryption is very fast and asymmetric encryption is very slow. meaning the same key is used to encrypt and decrypt data. SHA1 is used for many security application and protocols. SHA1 The most commonly used function in the Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA) family of cryptographic hash functions. role-based access control (RBAC) A system of granting permissions to perform certain types of actions to a role and then assigning users who need those permissions to the role. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. single sign-on Security Glossary 343 . This output is sometimes called a digital fingerprint. session credential A credential issued to a BMC BladeLogic client application after a successful user login. For more information on RBAC. session key A key used for encrypting and decrypting traffic during a communication session. service URL The identity and address of a BMC BladeLogic Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service that can be accessed using a session credential. SecurID RSA’s authentication protocol based on two-factor authentication.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z RBAC The BMC BladeLogic system of role-based access control (RBAC). including TLS. SRP is the default approach to user authentication in BMC BladeLogic. BMC BladeLogic clients use session credentials to establish secure sessions with BMC BladeLogic Application Servers and Network Shell Proxy Servers. After the session key is decrypted. asymmetric encryption is used only to encrypt a session key. A hash function like SHA1 takes a long string as input and produces a fixed-length string as output. it is used for symmetric encryption of all subsequent communication during a session. RSA SecurID See SecurID. The RBAC Manager workspace in the BMC BladeLogic Console lets you define roles. such as expert administrators or help desk personnel. In this way you can define a set of permissions that might be used by an entire class of users. Session keys are symmetric. S secure remote password (SRP) A protocol for integrating secure password authentication into networked applications.

TLS is typically used to secure HTTP connections. 344 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the user does not have to authenticate again.509 certificates and the X.509 certificate revocation list (CRL). TLS is the successor to the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol. T Transport Layer Security (TLS) A protocol providing confidentiality. The ITU-T X.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z The capability for users to cache session credentials so they can be used to secure subsequent sessions between client-tier applications and the Application Server or Network Shell Proxy Server. X X. authentication. and integrity for stream-like connections.509 recommendation defines the formats for X. trust store A file used to store a list of trusted certificates. As long as the session credential is valid.509 A standard for defining digital certificates.

208 scheduling cleanup of 300 secure file 253 users file 247 users.conf file 188 creating blclient_krb5.conf file 198 creating blclient_login.txt file 273 <layout> tag for log4crc. 237 provisioning with SHA1 fingerprints 204. 209 exports file 240 granting access 233.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Index Symbols <appender> tag for log4crc.conf file 186 creating blappserv_login.properties file for clients 200 updating Kerberos registry settings 196 verifying a keytab file 190 advanced file server configuring 312 Index 345 .txt file 277 network throttling options 315 advanced repeater configuring 316 disk space recommendations 306 installing 307 network throttling options 318 overview 305 securing communication 319 using network throttling 324 AES defined 339 agent logs disabling secure logging 280 enabling secure logging 279 security overview 277 verifying integrity of 279 agents and configuration files 233.local file 247 anonymous user on Windows 17 Application Server information about 106 reporting information about 108 Application Server Administration console 44 binding to an IP address 67 canceling jobs 60 configuring Application Server 52 configuring database server 78 configuring file server 74 configuring mail server 76 configuring Network Shell Proxy Server 68 configuring Perl 77 configuring process spawner 79 configuring remote execution objects 68 configuring SNMP server 77 configuring the PXE Server 89 A access to RSCD agents 233.conf file 196 creating user accounts 181 default users and roles 194 defined 339 exporting keytab file 181 implementing 177 locating KDC for client’s domain 197 locating KDC for service principal 186 overview 178 registering Authentication Service 180 requirements for Active Directory server 180 running kinit to get a TGT 201 sample domain structure 171 updating config. 235 cleanup of 293 configuring to authenticate using client-side certs 206. 185.txt file 274 <category> tag for log4crc. 237 accounts locking out 88 Active Directory defined 339 Active Directory/Kerberos 123 AD/Kerberos setting up Network Shell Proxy Servers 193 user names 192 AD/Kerberos authentication configuring Authentication Service 184. 191 console to Application Server 194 copying keytab file to Application Server 185 creating blappserv_krb5.

163. 100 provisioning agents with SHA1 fingerprints 204. 70 configuration wizard 34 configuring 29. 111 terminating process for 111 tier 13 time-out behavior 61 types of 96 undeploying 110 understanding 30 work item threads 31 Application Service 135 configuring 140 architecture of BMC BladeLogic system 13 asymmetric encryption defined 339 asynchronous execution enabling 92 audience intended 11 authentication AD/Kerberos 123 Application Server framework 33 described 117 domain 124 for BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics 132 LDAP 122. 166 single sign-on 121.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z controlling user interface settings 84 crossing mount points 82 default permissions 86 deleting group 84 enabling asynchronous execution 92 enabling import/export of property classes 87 enabling import/export of Property Dictionary 87 enabling/disabling the retention policy utility 289 evaluating SOCKS Proxy Server rules 73 job distribution 55 limiting smart live browse results 85 preparing HTTP proxy server support 66 restricting size of configuration objects 83 restricting size of extended objects 83 scaling Application Server 52 setting client idle time 60 setting communication ports 65 setting compliance results maximum 62. 191 configuring for Domain Authentication 171 registering in Active Directory domain 180 authorization described 120 automatically-generated objects setting retention time for 291 346 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 151. 93 creating client-side certs 203. 125 SecurID 123. 64 deleting the deployment of 110 deployment directories for 95 deployments 94 discontinuing client-side certs 210 introduced 15 job distribution 32 job execution thread 31 managing 44 maximum client idle time 60 multiple 93. 135 SRP 122 Authentication Service 135 configuring 137 configuring for AD/Kerberos 184. 70 setting connection types 65 setting database connections 64 setting login requirements 88 setting past due job behavior 63 setting retention time for automatically-generated objects 291 setting time-out behavior 61 showing no access nodes 84 specifying update group location 87 starting 45 Application Server cache scheduling cleanup of 299 Application Server Launchers editing access list for 113 Application Servers attributes for 100 attributes of 96 authentication framework 33 canceling jobs 60 changing access to 113 changing configuration of 100 cleanup of caches for 293 communication ports 65 compliance results maximum 62. 207 creating multiple 97 database connections 33. 129. 128. 126. 206 security for 133 setting up to cooperate 58 shutting down gracefully 43 starting 41. 158 managing profiles with blcred 226 PKI 123 profile files 150. 109 stopping 42. 152 profiles 124. 96 past due job behavior 63 pausing 43 profiles 93 profiles for 96. 42. 109. 208 restarting 111 restricting size of configuration objects 83 restricting size of extended objects 83 scaling 52 securing with certificates 223 securing with client-side certs 202.

conf file 173 creating for Application Server 186 blappserv_login. 194 illustrated 116 Network Shell to agent 133. 222 used by agents to authenticate 206. 221. 211. 206. 219. 219. 216. 115–231 security glossary 339 BMC BladeLogic Console and secure file 253 job parts 31 jobs and Application Server 31 security 130 BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics authentication 132 security for 132 server-side certificates 132 BMC Software. 13–19 Perl support 17 security 115. 206. 14. 175 configuration files exports file 240 Index 347 . 203.properties file for clients 200 configuration for Domain Authentication 172. 212 Network Shell to Network Shell Proxy Server 131 repeater to agent 134. 221. 217. 226 bltray 215 BMC Atrium Orchestrator integration 333 BMC BladeLogic architecture 13. 11–12 overview 13. 218.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z B BladeLogic integration configure job approval for job types 333 blappserv_krb5. 209 commands restricting access with exports file 244 communication legs Application Server to agent or repeater 133. 173. 210 BLCLI to Application Server 130 console to Application Server 130.conf file creating for consoles 198 blclient_login. 233–264.conf file 174 creating for Application Server 188 blasadmin utility 44 starting 45 BLCLI security 130 settings for 84 blclient_krb5. 207 for Network Shell client 212. 224 verifying with OCSP 153 certification request 340 service provider 340 chrole command 128 cleanup of agents on servers 293 of BMC BladeLogic database 288 of repeater servers 294 of the Application Server cache 293 of the file server 295 scheduling of 297 cleanupDatabase command 292 client connections maximum idle time 60 client tier 13 of BMC BladeLogic 14 clients connections to database 64 secure file 253 use of term 11 client-side certs 119 discontinuing use 210. 271 configuring Application Server 29 default permissions 16 default security configuration 16 introduced 11. 202. 70 config. 216 for repeaters 218. 174. 15 configuration files 233. contacting 2 browsing limiting number of results 85 C caching user information 230 certificate authority 339 management protocol 340 revocation list 340 certificate trust store for LDAP 159 certificates defined 340 for BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics 132 for secure communication 258 importing to clients 226 managing with blcred 226 setting up 223.conf file creating for consoles 196 blcred configuring for AD/Kerberos 194 utility 125. 222 reports client to reports server 132 security for 130 communication ports setting 65 Compliance Job results setting maximum number displayed 62. 222 for Application Server 202.

253–262 securecert file 262 setting up 233. 64 databases configuring 78 connecting to Application Server 15 connections to 64 default entry in secure file 256 deployments 95 deleting for an Application Server 110 of Application Servers 94 DES defined 340 distinguished names for LDAP 160 documentation conventions 12 for Network Shell 12 Domain Authentication 124 configuring 171.txt 272–285 logging 272. 235 secure file 253. 272–285 overview 233. 192 customer support 3 user names 176 domain controller defined 341 E encryption described 118 for secure communication 258 environment variables 129 exports file 240. 74 configuring advanced file servers 312 scheduling cleanup of 299 D Data Encryption Standard defined 340 database cleanup 288. 247–253 users. 233–264. 166. 175 default users and roles 177 implementing 170 G groups deleting in console 84 H high availability 159 host entries in secure file 257 HTTP proxy server 66 I impersonation 119 described 119 import and update process specifying temporary group location 87 indirect deployments and certificates 262 Infrastructure Management window Application Server information 106 installing the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater 307 integration and configuration checklist 332 Internet Protocol Security defined 341 348 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 240–247 configuring 241 examples 246 introduced 233. 172. 289 scheduling 298 utility for 292 database configuration for Application Server 36 database connections for Application Server 33. 235 options for configuring 241 restricting access to commands 244 extended objects restricting size 83 F file servers cleanup of 295 configuring 37.local file 247. 173. 271 subnet designations 236 users file 247. 247–253 configuration objects restricting size 83 configuration wizard for Application Server 34 connection types for Application Server 65 console settings for 84 conventions used in documentation 12 copying objects default permissions 86 cross-registering users in RBAC database 160. 174. 169.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z log4crc. 176.

txt file 272.conf file 198 creating blclient_login.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z introduction to BMC BladeLogic administration 11. 191 configuring blcred 194 copying keytab file to Application Server 185 creating blappserv_krb5. 11–12 IP address binding Application Server to 67 IPSec defined 341 disabling 283 enabling 283 keytab files 128 copying to Application Server 185 exporting 181 verifying 190 klist displaying SPN for Application Server 189 J job execution thread for Application Server 31 job parts for BMC BladeLogic Console jobs 31 job runs setting retention time for 290 jobs canceling 60 defining time-outs 60 distributing between Application Servers 32. 55 past due 63 setting maximum for Application Server 52 L LDAP defined 342 user names 160 LDAP authentication 122 certificate trust store 159 configuring 161 distinguished names 160 high availability 159 implementing 158 overview 158 listening ports on Application Server 65 log4crc. 178 client to Application Server 194 configuring Application Server 185 configuring Authentication Service 184. 272–285 <appender> tag 274 <category> tag 273 <layout> tag 277 configuring syslog 284 default values 285 syntax 272 logging configuration file 272 configuring syslog 284 default values 285 login setting requirements 88 K KDC locating for client’s domain 197 locating for service principal’s domain 186 Kerberos defined 341 Kerberos authentication 123.properties file for clients 200 updating Kerberos registry settings 196 verifying a keytab file 190 keystore file for cooperating Application Servers 58 keystroke logs 281 M mail server configuring 76 man pages 12 middle tier communication 118 of BladeLogic 13 of BMC BladeLogic 15 mount points setting up in Application Server 82 N Network Shell and secure file 253 caching private keys 214 discontinuing use of client-side certs 216 Index 349 .conf file 188 creating blclient_krb5.conf file 186 creating blappserv_login.conf file 196 creating user accounts 181 default users and roles 194 exporting keytab file 181 implementing 177 locating KDC for client’s domain 197 locating KDC for service principal 186 registering Authentication Service 180 requirements for Active Directory server 180 running kinit to get a TGT 201 sample domain structure 171 updating config.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z documentation 12 man pages 12 managing private keys 214 securing with client-side certs 212 security 131. 221 security for 134 using advanced repeater servers 305 RESULTS_RETENTION_TIME property 290 retention policy utility P passwords requiring periodic changes 88 setting minimum length 88 setting through configuration wizard 38 past due jobs 63 Perl 17 configuring 77 permissions default 16 for copied objects 86 PKCS# 12 defined 342 PKI 350 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 166. 133 Network Shell Proxy Servers 68 configuring 142 configuring clients for 147 configuring stand-alone 145 setting up for AD/Kerberos 193 user information for scripts 147 Network Shell Proxy Service 135 configuring 142. 176. 208 securing with client-side certs 218. 13–19 of Application Server 30 of configuration files 233. 192 defined 343 RC4 defined 342 remote execution objects configuring ports 68 repeater servers cleanup of 294 scheduling cleanup of 300 repeaters and certificates 262 configuring advanced repeaters 316 discontinuing use of client-side certs 222 provisioning with SHA1 fingerprints 204. 219. 149 Network Shell Script Jobs for Application Server cache cleanup 299 for cleanup 297 for database cleanup 298 for file server cleanup 299 for repeater server cleanup 300 for retention policy utility 297 for target server (agent) cleanup 300 network throttling for advanced file servers 315 for advanced repeater 318 overview 324 no access nodes showing in console 84 nobody user on UNIX 17 notifications setting through configuration wizard 38 defined 342 PKI authentication 123 ports Application Server 65 for remote execution objects 68 Post-Install Configuration wizard 34 database configuration 36 file server configuration 37 notification configuration 38 password configuration 38 private keys caching in UNIX 215 caching in Windows 215 managing 214 privilege mapping described 119 process spawner configuring 79 product support 3 profiles 100 property classes enabling import/export 87 Property Dictionary enabling import/export 87 protocol levels defined in secure file 255 for secure communication 258 public key cryptography defined 342 public key infrastructure defined 342 PXE Server configuring 89 O OCSP 153 overview BMC BladeLogic 13. 235 R RBAC 128 cross-registering users 160. 169.

166 security administering 115. 253–262 certificates 258 client and server interaction 254 communication protocols 255 configuring 255 configuring for agents 210. 216 secure remote password defined 343 securecert file 262 configuring 263 SecurID user names 166. 235 exports file 240 granting access 233. 152 session credentials 121. 235 options for configuring 258 protocol levels 258 rscd entry 256 setting defaults for clients 256 setting defaults for servers 256 setting parameters for a client 257 setting up for NSH clients 212. 202 authentication using client-side certs 117 authorization 120 BLCLI to Application Server 130 console to Application Server 130 default configuration 16 for different communication legs 130 fundamentals 117 glossary 339 impersonation 119 Network Shell to agent 133. 135 using blcred 226 self-signed certificates 119 server tier communication 119 of BladeLogic 13 of BMC BladeLogic 15 servers use of term 11 server-side certificates for BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics 132 service principal name displaying with klist 189 service URLs 117 session credential cache file 150. 124. 237 secure file 253 users file 247 users. 140. 168 configuring RSA Authentication Manager 163 implementing 163. 217 reports client to reports server 132 session layer 118 single sign-on 121. 151.local file 247 rscd entry in secure file 256 SecurID authentication 123 configuring 163. 169 Index 351 . 222 configuring for Network Shell Proxy Servers 147 default entry 256 encryption method 258 examples 261 host entries 257 introduced 233. 115–231 Application Server to agent or repeater 133. 125 certificate verification using OCSP 153 client file locations 152 client files 150. 167. 235 secure agent logging 277 disabling 280 enabling 279 secure agent logs security overview 277 secure file 253. 137. 211 Network Shell to Network Shell Proxy Server 131 privilege mapping 119 repeater to agent 134. 151 described 121 Domain Authentication 124 environment variables 129 implementing 135. 123. 122. 142 importing CA certs to clients 226 keytab files 128 LDAP authentication 122 S scripts user information for 147 secadmin utility 258 introduced 233.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z description of 289 enabling/disabling 289 executing 291 scheduling for execution 297 retention time for automatically-generated objects 291 for job runs 290 roles selecting 128 RSA SecurID 123 RSCD agents and configuration files 233. 126 managing with blcred 226 session key defined 343 session layer security described 118 single sign-on 117 AD/Kerberos authentication 123 authentication profiles 124.

192 requirements for names 160. 221.509 certificates 118 U update process 352 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 206. 235 options for configuring 251 T target server scheduling cleanup of 300 target servers cleanup of 293 technical support 3 terminology BMC BladeLogic 11 TGT running kinit to get 201 three-tier architecture 13 ticket-gathering ticket running kinit to get 201 time-outs defining for job parts 60 defining for jobs 60 TLS communication protocol 118 middle tier communication 118 server tier communication 119 TLS with client-side certs Application Server to agent or repeater 202.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z overrides for client SSO files 150 PKI authentication 123 SecurID authentication 123 selecting roles 128 session credentials 126 SRP authentication 122 smart card authentication 123 SNMP server configuring 77 SOCKS Proxy Servers 73 SPN displaying with klist 189 SRP defined 343 SRP authentication 122 standard terminology 11 subnet designations 236 support. 219. 61 Workflow Jobs 333 X X. 222 trusted keystore 150. 166. 247–253 configuring 249 examples 252 introduced 233. 169.txt file 272 syslog configuring for logging 284 system architecture overview 13 specifying temporary group location 87 user accounts adding default for AD/Kerberos 194 adding default for Domain Authentication 177 creating in Application Server’s domain 181 locking out 88 user information for Network Shell scripts 147 generating 230 user interfaces settings for 84 user privilege mapping 17. 192 users file 247. 210 Network Shell to agent 212 repeater to agent 218. 119 user_info.local 250 Windows client configuration for Kerberos 196 Windows user mapping 149 work item threads for Application Server 31. 52. 176.dat 128 users cross-registering 160.local file 247. 169. 176. 152 W wild cards using in users. 247–253 configuring 249. 151. 250 examples 252 introduced 233. 235 options for configuring 251 users. 166. customer 3 syntax for log4crc.

.

*363391* *363391* *363391* *363391* *193363* .